Home

LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual

1. 13 2 Overview 13 3 Pediatrics 13 4 Chapter 14 ReportWriter Accessing the Report 14 2 Storing the Report 14 3 Retrieving the Report 14 4 Report Template 14 5 Chapter 15 Recording Images Overview 15 2 Adding Devices 15 4 Adding a Dataflow 15 4 Adding Devices to a Print Button 15 4 Formatting Removable Media 15 4 Using the DICOM Spooler 15 4 Troubleshooting 15 4 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual i ix Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Clipboard 15 5 Storing an Image 15 8 Using the Monitor Display Controls to Manage Images 15 9 Image Management Guide 15 11 Save As Saving Images to CD ROM to View on Any PC 15 12 Save As Saving Images to USB Memory Stick 15 14 Moving Images Image Archive 15 15 Export Import Movin
2. 5 4 B Mode Scanning Hints 5 5 Depth 5 6 Gain 5 7 FOCUS 5 8 Auto Optimize Auto 5 9 M D Cursor 5 9 Frequency 5 10 TGC 5 11 Scan Area 5 12 Reverse 5 12 Dynamic Range Compression 5 13 Line Density 5 14 Map 2 2 eee eee eee eee eee ee eee 5 15 Frame Average 5 17 Colorize 22 ee eee eee ee eee 5 18 Edge Enhance 5 19 Rotation Updown Invert 5 19 Rejection eee 5 20 Image Rotate 5 20 Intended Use 5 21 Typical exam protocol 5 21 M Mode Display 5 22 M Mode Selection Menu 5 23 Scanning Hi
3. 17 3 Labeling 17 3 LOGIQ Book Applications 17 6 LOGIQ Book Features 17 6 Specifications 17 7 Probe Usage 17 8 Care and Maintenance 17 8 Probe Safety 17 9 Special handling instructions 17 10 Probe handling and infection control 17 12 Probe Cleaning Process 17 13 Coupling gels 17 18 Planned Maintenance 17 18 Introduction 17 19 LOGIQ Book Convex Probes 17 21 LOGIQ Book Linear Probes 17 21 Precautions Concerning the Use of Biopsy Procedures 17 22 Displaying the Guidezone 17 23 Preparing the Biopsy Guide Attachment 17 26 Biopsy Need Path Verification 17 34 The Biopsy Procedure 17 35 Post Biopsy 17 36 E8C Probe Biopsy Guide 17 36 Chapter 18
4. 8 2 Introduction 8 3 B Mode Measurements 8 4 M Mode Measurements 8 6 Doppler Mode Measurements 8 7 B Mode Measurements 8 15 M Mode Measurements 8 18 Doppler Mode Measurements 8 19 Chapter 9 OB GYN Exam Preparation 9 2 Acoustic Output Considerations 9 3 To Start an Obstetrics Exam 9 4 Introduction 9 8 B Mode Measurements 9 10 M Mode Measurements 9 34 Doppler Mode Measurements 9 35 OB Worksheet 9 40 i vili LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Table of Contents Overview eee 9 44 To View OB Graphs 9 45 Using other OB studies 9 57 Multiple Fetus 9 59 Introduction 9 65 To Start a Gynecology Exam
5. 5 56 Trace Direction 5 57 Full Timeline 5 57 Display Format 5 57 Time Resolution 5 57 Modify Auto Calcs 5 58 Overview 5 59 3D Acquisition 5 60 Easy 3D ee eee eee eee ee eee 5 65 Chapter 6 Scanning Display Functions Introduction 6 2 ZOoOM 6 2 Introduction 6 3 Freezing an image 6 3 Post processing 6 5 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual i vii Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Introduction 6 6 Activating CINE 6 6 CINE and Monitor Display 6 7 Using CINE 6 7 Introduction 6 8 Adding Comments to an Image 6 10 Body Patterns 6 15 Documentation Distribution 6 19 Using Online Help Vi
6. 5 38 Transparency Map 5 39 Spatial Filter 5 39 Packet Size 5 39 Intended Use 5 40 Doppler Display 5 43 Imaged Doppler 5 43 Doppler Mode Display 5 44 Doppler Mode Scanning Hints 5 46 Doppler Mode Selection Menu 5 47 B Pause eee eee ee eee 5 48 Doppler sample volume gate position Trackball 5 49 Doppler sample volume length 5 49 PRF 5 50 Angle Correct 5 51 Quick Angle 5 51 Wall Filter 5 52 Baseline ee eee eee ee eee 5 52 M D Cursor 5 53 Audio Volume 5 54 Invert 5 54 Dynamic Range 5 55 Spectral Trace Trace Method 5 55 Trace Sensitivity
7. Figure 9 9 Input Past Exam screen page 2 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 53 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN To edit patient data When you are working with graphs you can change or enter the following patient data e _GA LMP this field is computed using the LMP date on the Patient Data Entry screen To change this field NOTE You can only change this field on the Fetal Growth Curve Graph in single view a Move the Trackball to the field which is left of the graph To select the field press Set The system displays a window with the GA weeks and days b To select each field move the Trackball to the field and press Set c Type the correct weeks or days d Select OK The system makes the following changes e GA LMP is now GA GA and shows the age you entered e In the Patient Data section the GA changes Inthe Patient Data section The EDD LMP changes to EDD GA and shows an updated date using the GA you entered The LMP is erased e FetusPos type information about the fetus position e PLAC type information about the placenta To return from a graph to the scan display After viewing graphs to return to the scan display do one of the following e On the graph display select Exit e On the Selection Menu select Graph Display 9 54 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Fetal Growth Bar Graph OB Graphs The fetal growth bar graph shows cu
8. 1 3 Principles of Operation 1 4 Indications for Use 1 5 Contraindication 1 6 Prescription Device 1 6 Contacting GE Medical Systems Ultrasound 1 7 Manufacturer 1 11 Manual Content 1 12 Manual Format 1 14 Chapter 2 Safety Precaution Levels 2 2 Hazard Symbols 2 3 Patient Safety 2 5 Equipment and Personnel Safety 2 8 Device Labels 2 10 EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility 2 13 Patient Environmental Devices 2 22 Acoustic Output 2 24 Warning Label Locations 2 26 Chapter 3 Preparing the System for Use Introduction 3 2 Before the system arrives 3 3 Environmental Requirements 3 4 Console graphics 3 5 Peripheral Accessory C
9. 9 66 B Mode Measurements 9 67 M Mode Measurements 9 74 Doppler Mode Measurements 9 75 Chapter 10 Cardiology Chapter 11 Vascular Introduction 11 2 General Guidelines 11 2 Introduction 11 3 B Mode Measurements 11 5 M Mode Measurements 11 6 Doppler Mode Measurements 11 7 To view the Vascular Worksheet 11 23 Worksheet Display Selection Menu 11 25 To edit a worksheet 11 26 Examiners Comments 11 30 Intravessel ratio 11 31 Vessel Summary 11 33 Recording Worksheet 11 36 Chapter 12 Urology Introduction 12 2 General Guidelines 12 2 Introduction 12 3 Urology B Mode Measurements 12 4 Chapter 13 Pediatrics Introduction 13 2 General Guidelines
10. Settings Densities Job Film Session Label Film Destination MAGAZINE X Color Priority Medium Copies coor HIGH CLEAR FILM yf Figure 16 43 DICOM Print Service Type Job Table 16 50 Job Preset Parameter Description Film Session Label Type a name for the group of film labels associated with the print job Film Destination Specify the film destination for the exposed filmMagazine Store in a film magazineProcessor Develop in a film processor Color Select whether to have the image Color or Grey Priority Specify the print job priority High Medium or Low Medium Select the print medium Clear Film Paper or Blue Film Copies Enter the number of copies LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 73 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System DICOM Media Storage 16 74 DICOM Media Storage provides the ability to send or receive ultrasound cine or multiframe images in a format that can be interpreted by PACS Dicom Media Storage aa SoS san Sa EEN TO Name UCR EEE here omy IV Enable Location Type RW X pem CEU 1ouuuutusussst luluuuulaaalia ais _ F Allow Raw Data F Allow Muttiframe Max Framerate l z Compression l z Quality J Figure 16 44 DICOM Media Storage Service Type Table 16 51 DICOM Media Storage Preset Parameter Description Location Type the location of the media storage Type Select
11. 09 03 03 9 36 03 AM Abdominal B Generic PS ED Show All Worksheet Display PW Fra 2 5 MHz Gn 11 Fs ev Lo ADY 2o Pee s tz SV 4 DR 36 SVD 5 7 cm Menu Delete Active SS Measure Cycle Select Angle Correct Cursor Select Mode PW PS ED start w M amp A Figure 8 5 Aorta folder Abdomen and Renal Exam Calcs continued The system displays all possible measurements 8 GE Medical Systems MI0 4 Tis 0 0 3C RS 09 03 03 9 38 04 AM F6 99103103 9 34 55 AM adm b sclecies Abdomen Abdominal a B Vel 31 47 cmis Fra 40 MHz i 3 ME Generic Prox Ao PS 0 00 cm s EA 32 na a D 70 cm DR 81 Prox Mid Dist FR 14 Hz AO 100 HR TAMEAN PW PY Fra 2 5 MHz Gn 11 Show All ie AO 100 wily UL hs vy PRF 4 5 kHz Worksheet Display f WF 408 Hz SV 4 DR 36 SVD 5 7 cm Menu Delete i Active Measure Cycle Select Angle Correct Cursor Select A moder PS ED MD Accel AT start a Mark a point on the spectral doppler M amp A Figure 8 6 Show All measurements 3 Select the desired measurement NOTE The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze Abdomen Abdomen and Renal Exam Calcs continued Acceleration T Acceleration Time 1 Select Accel The system displays an active caliper with vertical and horizontal dotted lines To position the caliper at peak systole move the Trackball To fix the measure point press Set The s
12. 8INX10IN X SCALE SHARP1 Magnification Type Smoothing Type Figure 16 34 Connectivity Services Preset Menu The Services screen has the following sections of information 1 Destination Device lists information about destination devices You can add devices select from a list of currently existing devices and remove a device LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity Services Destinations continued 2 Services lists information about services for the destination device You can add services select from a list of currently existing services and remove services Service Parameters lists parameters for the service currently selected in the Services section The name and parameters in this section change depending on what service is currently selected In the above figure this section shows DICOM Print parameters Adding a destination device Destination Device E Hame My Computer bd Add AE Title PEGAEXT7 W address 9 Oo oO 0 Remove Figure 16 35 Destination Device Table 16 43 Destination Device Preset Parameter Description Name Free text give a descriptive name to the device AE Title The Application Entity Title defines DICOM applications running on a specific device It is set during DICOM configuration Refer to your network specifications IP address The Internet Protocol address of the devic
13. AE Title The Application Entity Title for the service Port No The port number of the service Retry Max the maximum number of times to try establishing a connection to the service Interval the time interval in seconds to wait before retrying to establish a connection Timeout The amount of time after which the system will stop trying to establish a connection to the service 16 66 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity Changing parameters for a service continued Many service parameters are specific to each type of service The parameters are described on the following pages e DICOM Verification e DICOM Image Storage e DICOM Performed Procedure e DICOM Print DICOM Media Storage e DICOM Worklist e Echo Database V1 1 e Echo Database V2 0 e EchoPac Media e Standard Print LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 67 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System DICOM Verification To verify a service 1 In the Destination Device section in the Name field select the destination device In the Services section select the service In the bottom section of the screen with the service parameters select DICOM Verify If the device is communicating with the network the yellow face is displayed with a smile See Figure 16 38 If the device is not connected the face has a frown Boas Wore eto Ed F reat
14. Adjusting Values Benefits Affect on other controls Optimizing Spectral Doppler Displays the Doppler Mode cursor on the B Mode image To activate deactivate the Doppler Mode cursor press M D Cursor Trackball to position sample volume graphic Adjust SV Length on the Selection Menu to adjust sample volume gate size The M D Cursor key backlights On Off If blood flow velocities cannot be presented the message PRF unavailable Change Vel Scale appears Lets you position the cursor before you go into Doppler Mode so that you can make optimum use of the larger B Mode image If the M Mode cursor is on clicking SV Gate or Angle Correct changes the cursor to a Doppler Mode cursor LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 53 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Audio Volume Description Adjusting CAUTION Values Benefits Invert Description Adjusting Values Benefits Affect on other controls 5 54 Controls audio output To adjust the audio adjust the Volume control The volume defaults to the last Doppler audio volume setting Audio sounds change rapidly often abruptly Increase the volume in small steps to avoid startling the patient Usually a one third adjustment of the dial gives you the best volume The volume decreases increases logarithmically An audio representation of the flow within a vessel can be used to evaluate proper probe angle and position Vertically inv
15. CAPS start e Figure 7 9 Selection Menu BPD Measurement LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 21 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Selecting a study or measurement continued To select a folder or measurement 1 Move the Trackball to the Selection menu and highlight the folder or measurement 2 Press Set e Ifyou selected a folder the system displays the folder in the Folder section of the Measurement amp Analysis screen e Ifyou selected a measurement the system displays the measurement in the Measurement section of the Measurement amp Analysis screen NOTE Items must be selected in the Available folders and measurements list to be in the Selection menu To move or change an item that is in the Available folders and measurements list but not in the Selection menu move the Trackball to the check box for the item and press Set The item is now listed in the Selection menu See Figure 7 10 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 18 Tis 0 0 E8C RS F6 08128103 4 31 46 PM adm ree Gyn 08 28 03 4 46 25 PM Cardiac MI Generic Connectivity Measure About Admin cardiac Mp z MEASUREMENT amp AHALYSIS imension ME area M amp A Advancea l Doppler OB Table amp volume Measurement menu Add measurement Add folder 2D 4 i mass x Delete measure and folder S E shunts Factory Edit Calc Dop Mi pisa BE wallMotion m Folder B Lao Hame Volume Auto sequ
16. Description Benefit Procedure 18 24 Lateral resolution is the minimum reflector separation between two closely spaced objects to produce discrete reflections perpendicular to the axis of the sound beam It can also be monitored by checking the horizontal size of known pin targets See Figure 18 1 for more information Lateral resolution is dependent upon the beam width produced by the probe The narrower the beam the better the lateral resolution The beam width is affected by the frequency degree of focusing and distance of the object from the face of the probe Clinically poor lateral resolution will display small structures lying close together as a single dot This may lead to improper interpretation of the ultrasound image To measure lateral resolution 1 Scan a test phantom with precisely spaced horizontal pin targets 2 Adjust all scan controls as necessary for the best image of the pin targets from side to side 3 Press Freeze to stop image acquisition and perform a standard distance measurement of the horizontal thickness of a pin at different points in the image Record all images for archiving 4 Scan the horizontal pins in zoom or at different depth scale factors 5 Press Freeze to stop image acquisition repeat the horizontal thickness measurements of the pins and record the images for archiving 6 Document the measurements for reference and future comparison Pin width should remain
17. Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Trace Sensitivity Description Adjust the trace to follow the waveform for signal strength Adjusting Press the left or right arrow key to select value Values From 10 to 10 Benefits If the signal is very faint changing the Trace Sensitivity will allow the system to lock onto that signal strength 5 56 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Trace Direction Description Adjusting Values Benefits Full Timeline Description Adjusting Values Benefits Display Format Description Adjusting Values Benefits Time Resolution Description Adjusting Values Benefits LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Optimizing Spectral Doppler Specifies trace direction Press Trace Direction Above Below or Both You can select where on the waveform to perform the trace above below or both Expands display to full timeline display Press Full Timeline On Off Allows you to view just the timeline to see more detail Changes the horizontal vertical layout between B Mode and M Mode or timeline only Press Display Format Vertical 1 3 1 2 or 2 3 B Mode Horizontal 1 4 or 1 2 B Mode or Timeline Only You can select how to have your Doppler timeline and anatomy displayed Adjusts image appearance so that if you select a lower setting the image appears smoother if you select a higher setting the image appears sharper Pr
18. NOTE Figure 3 24 Brightness 1 Brightness 2 Volume 3 LOGIQ Book Watermark After readjusting the LCD monitor s Brightness readjust all preset and peripheral settings The brightness of the LCD monitor s Brightness should be set first as it affects the Gain and Dynamic Range settings of your image Once set this should not be changed unless the brightness of your scanning environment changes Audio is provided by speakers located on the sides of the display monitor LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 31 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Probes Introduction Only use approved probes All imaging probes can be connected into the probe port of the LOGIQ Book Refer to the Probes chapter Selecting a probe e Always start out with a probe that provides optimum focal depths and penetration for the patient size and exam e Begin the scanning session by choosing the correct application and preset for the examination by selecting Preset e Begin the scan session using the default Power Output setting for the probe and exam NOTE Selecting a new probe unfreezes the image 3 32 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Connecting the Probe Probes Probes can be connected at any time regardless of whether the console is powered on or off To ensure that the ports are not active place the system in the image freeze condition To connect a probe 1 Place t
19. Select whether to mark measurements with numbers or symbols Cursor Line Display If selected after you press Set to complete a measurement the cursor line is displayed If not selected after you press Set to complete a measurement only the cursor number or symbol is displayed Cursor Ellipse Cross Line Display Check box to select Cursor Position Select 1st Cursor 2nd Cursor or Image Center Color When Set Select white yellow bright red or orange LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 16 19 Customizing Your System 16 20 Table 16 12 Results Window Preset Parameter Description Result Window Select the Result Window location on the Monitor Location 2D Display Left Bottom Left Top Right Bottom or Right Top Result Window Select the Result Window location Left Bottom Location Timeline Left Top Right Bottom or Right Top Result Window Select Wide or Narrow Format Font Color Select White Off White Yellow Bright Red or Orange reboots the system Font Size Select small medium or large reboots the system LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Presets System Backup and Restore Preset Menu The backup and restore procedures described in this section are divided into two parts The first part describes procedures to backup and restore patient data The second part describes
20. The operator s user ID Password The operator s password Full Name The operator s name Member of Group s Select any of the following Operator sonographers doctors or any person using the ultrasound system Ref Doc referring physician can be associated to the patient examination in the extended Patient information window Has no user rights Diag Phys diagnostic physician can be associated to the patient examination in the extended Patient information window Has no user rights Operator Rights Admin If selected the operator has extended rights with access to the Admin setup functionality The operator can also perform advanced operations such as patient record deletion import and export LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 16 111 Customizing Your System Creating a user Ooh ON gt Select New Type the user ID and password Type the user s full name Select the user s group or groups If the user needs full configuration and advanced operations access select Admin Changing a user configuration Deleting a user 16 112 Move the Trackball to a user ID in the User List Press Set Make the desired changes Move the Trackball to a user ID in the User List Press Set Select Delete The user is removed from the User List LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Logon System Administrati
21. Body pattern background Select whether you want the body pattern background to be Transparent or Opaque After you change body pattern options select Save to save the changes LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 16 49 Customizing Your System Body Pattern Libraries Applications Preset Menu The Body Patterns Library Applications tab is a link to the Applications preset menu The Body Patterns Applications tab allows you to select body pattern application libraries You also specify which is the default library that displays when you use body patterns Libraries Body Patterns Applications Applications Body Patterns Figure Applications Body atterns Link Settings Annotations Body Patterns Preset Abdomen ba Body Pattern Menu Select Library ABD Body Patterns Libraries Figure 16 29 Body Patterns Applications Preset Menu Table 16 32 Applications Preset Parameter Description Application Defines the Body Pattern option 16 50 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Using body pattern application libraries See the following Body Patterns Small Parts Selection Menu Bodymark 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 20 Tis 0 0 E8C RS JO 09103103 5 42 03 PM adm ann weleetee OB 2 3 Menu Delete Active Probe Type VAN ee MovePattern AVA Figure 16 30 Body Patterns OB 2 3 Menu To select a body pattern libr
22. Image Area Image Area example Figure 16 55 Image Area Capture Area LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 87 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Capture Area Definitions continued Whole Screen Whole Screen example SE Medical Sywterre A 6 00 Th 14 10L bite 11 PH adm 5 Abdomen iT AnA AANT Janm IL Wor hehe el 4 40 le 4 lon Ehle a Sui Alem Man Halis Figure 16 56 Whole Screen Capture Area Configuring Connectivity Adding a service to a Print key NOTE NOTE Only output services that have been configured can be associated to a dataflow To configure a service See Services Destinations on page 16 62 for more information 1 2 In the Button field select one of the Print keys In the Destinations section select a service from the Select destination s list see Figure 16 53 In the Destinations section select Add The new service is displayed in the destinations list The destinations list displays the following information e Name user defined during service configuration e Type the type of service e Destination Device the device for which the service was configured e Dir direction output input or both 1 0 Only output services can be associated to the print keys In the Service Parameters section set the parameters related to the service The data in this section varies depending on the type of service For a description of service parameters See Servi
23. M amp A system presets 16 18 MandA Utility screen 16 3 Mean PG 7 75 Measurement calipers 7 6 how to add 7 28 how to delete 7 35 to select in different category 7 17 Measurement amp Analysis screen accessing 7 15 7 36 7 38 selecting a study or measurement 7 19 Measurement controls location of 7 5 Measurement information OB worksheet 9 42 Measurement summary window display location 3 46 Measurements 7 24 9 35 Stenosis 9 30 Stenosis M Mode 9 34 AJB ratio 9 27 Index 4 abdominal circumference 9 10 amniotic fluid index AFI 9 19 antero postero trunk diameter and transverse trunk diameter APTD TTD 9 27 AxT 9 22 biparietal diameter 9 13 B Mode Circumference Area 7 44 cardio thoracic area ratio 9 23 changing 7 26 crown rump length 9 13 Doppler TAMAX TAMEAN 7 46 erasing 7 13 estimated fetal weight 9 24 femur length 9 14 fetal trunk area 9 25 foot length 9 28 general 7 7 general instructions 7 8 7 12 generic 7 57 gestational sac 9 15 head circumference 9 16 how to automatically start 7 25 humerus length 9 29 M Mode 7 51 OB 9 8 AFI 9 19 9 21 occipitofrontal diameter 9 30 spinal length 9 29 thorax transverse diameter 9 32 tibia length 9 33 transverse abdominal diameter 9 37 transverse cerebellar diameter 9 37 ulna length 9 33 Method OB worksheet 9 42 Minimum diastole MD OB GYN vessel measurem
24. TGC amplifies returning signals to correct for the attenuation caused by tissues at increasing depths TGC slide pots are spaced proportionately to the depth The area each pot amplifies varies as well A TGC curve may appear on the display if preset matching the controls that you have set except during zoom You can choose to deactivate the TGC curve on the image To decrease increase TGC move slide pot to the left right On some systems active slide pots backlight TGC adjusts automatically when using zoom The TGC curve does not change while in CINE When you change the depth TGC is rescaled across the new depth range Each pot is proportionately scaled across the depth TGC balances the image so that the density of echoes is the same throughout the image LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 11 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Scan Area Description Adjusting Values Benefits Affect on other controls Bioeffects Reverse Description Adjusting Values Benefits CAUTION 5 12 You can widen or narrow the size of the sector angle to maximize the image s region of interest ROI To narrow widen the angle press Scan Area until Width is highlighted and move the Trackball left right to decrease increase the angle size Then press Scan Area to set the ROI Varies depending upon the probe not applicable to linear probes and application Increase the sector angle to see a wide
25. j To position the second caliper at the most posterior point you want to measure o move the Trackball Set To complete the measurement press Set P The system displays the vertical distance between the two points in the Results Window y pe P LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 51 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Time interval To measure a horizontal time interval e Press Measure twice an active caliper with a vertical dotted line displays To position the caliper at the start point move the Trackball Ob Set To fix the first caliper press Set The system fixes the first caliper and P displays a second active caliper To position the second caliper at the end point move the Trackball Set To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the time interval between the two calipers in the Results Window 7 52 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Mode Measurements Time and slope To measure time and slope between two points Press Measure three times an active caliper with a vertical and horizontal dotted line displays To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball Ob Set To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second caliper at the end point move the Trackball TA i SS Set To complete the measuremen
26. B Renal Measure i Cursor Select Modom Stenosis lt start e Place the first point M amp A Figure 7 24 M Mode Generic Study Stenosis See Stenosis on page 7 59 for more information AIB Ratio Generic Measurements In M Mode you can measure A B ratio by diameter time or velocity Diameter See Diameter on page 7 65 for more information Time To calculate A B ratio by time 1 2 Select A B Select ratio Time The system displays an active caliper To position the caliper at the A point move the Trackball To fix the measure point press Set The system displays a second active caliper To position the second caliper at the B point move the Trackball To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the two time measurements and A B ratio in the Results Window Velocity To calculate AB ratio by velocity 1 Select A B 2 Select ratio Velocity The system displays an active caliper with vertical and horizontal dotted lines 3 To position the caliper at the A velocity move the Trackball 4 To fix the measure point press Set The system displays a second active caliper 5 To position the second caliper at the B velocity move the Trackball 6 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the two velocity measurements and the AIB ratio in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 67 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Genera
27. Formulas and databases used within the system software that are associated with specific investigators are so noted Be sure to refer to the original article describing the investigator s recommended clinical procedures 9 8 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Measurements and Calculations Introduction continued When you make measurements you can select the calculation before you make the measurement or after you make it If you select the calculation before you make the measurement the Results Window shows the estimated fetal age as you make the measurement If you select the calculation after you make the measurement the estimated fetal age is displayed after you complete the measurement The measurements steps in this section tell you to select the calculation before you make the measurement The following pages describe how to make OB measurements and calculations The measurements are organized by mode and within mode are listed in alphabetical order Out of Range If the system indicates that a measurement is out of range OOR it means one of the following The measurement is out of the normal range based on the gestational age that is calculated from the LMP The system determines OOR from the ultrasound age compared to the gestational age The gestational age is calculated from the last menstrual period or the estimated delivery date e The measurement is outside of the range for the d
28. If any damage is found do not use the probe until it has been inspected and repaired replaced by a GE Service Representative Keep a log of all probe maintenance along with a picture of any probe malfunction Environmental Requirements Probes should be operated stored or transported within the parameters outlined below CAUTION Ensure that the probe face temperature does not exceed the normal operation temperature range Table 17 4 Probe Environmental Requirements Operational Storage Transport Temperature 10 40 C 5 50 C 5 50 C 50 104 F 14 140 F 40 140 F Humidity 30 75 10 90 10 90 non condensing non condensing non condensing Pressure 700 1060hPa 700 1060hPa 700 1060hPa 17 8 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probe Overview Probe Safety Handling precautions WARNING Ultrasound probes are highly sensitive medical instruments that can easily be damaged by improper handling Use care when handling and protect from damage when not in use DO NOT use a damaged or defective probe Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage Electrical shock hazard e Electical The probe is driven with electrical energy that can injure the patient or user if EN Hazard live internal parts are contacted by conductive solution A DO NOT immerse the probe into any liquid beyond the level indica
29. Language requires reboot Rus al Units metric z Regional Options Figure 16 2 Changing the System Language to Russian Greek 16 8 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Presets Keyboard Setup Procedure for Russian and Greek continued 2 Onthe same Utility screen select Regional Options The Regional Options menu appears Select Input Locales The following menu appears Regional Options English United Sta ch to English United States US Figure 16 3 Input Locales Menu LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 9 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Keyboard Setup Procedure for Russian and Greek continued 3 Press Add The Add Input Locale menu appears On the pull down menu move the Trackball until you see Russian or Greek Press Set to select Press Ok You are returned to the Input Locales menu Add Input Locale Input locale Russian Keyboard layout IME Russian v 16 10 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Presets Keyboard Setup Procedure for Russian and Greek continued 4 Specify Russian or Greek as the default language by selecting Russian or Greek and pressing Set as Default Regional Options lag English United States v RUI Russian E Switch between input locales Switch to Engli LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 11 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizi
30. compliant See Assistance on page 18 31 for more information The LOGIQ Book has also been verified for compatibility and compliance for connection to a Cd Writer via the system USB port provided the CD Writer is IEC EN 60950 compliant General precautions for installing an alternate on board device would include 1 The added device s must have appropriate safety standard conformance and CE Marking 2 The added device s must be used for their intended purpose having a compatible interface CAUTION Please make sure to disconnect the CD Writer when scanning the patient LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 2 19 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Declaration of Emissions This system is suitable for use in the following environment The user must assure that it is used only in the electromagnetic environment as specified Table 2 5 Declaration of Emissions Emission Type Compliance Electromagnetic Environment CISPR 11 Group 1 This system uses RF energy only for its internal function RF Emissions Class A Therefore RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment It is suitable for use in all establishments other than domestic establishments and those directly connected to the public low voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes 2 20 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Declarati
31. leads to a transparent appearance of the rendered image Colorize Contrast Colorizes the 3D render or adds contrast to the 3D rendered image 5 66 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Chapter 6 Scanning Display Functions Describes additional ways in which to adjust the image In addition describes additional ways to get useful information electronically LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 6 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Scanning Display Functions Introduction Zoom Bioeffect Acoustic Output Hazard 6 2 Zooming an Image Zoom is used to magnify a zoom region of interest ROI The system adjusts all imaging parameters accordingly You can also zoom frozen images Zooming an image changes the frame rate which tends to change thermal indices The position of the focal zones may also change which may cause the peak intensity to occur at a different location in the acoustic field As a result the MI may change Observe the output display for possible effects To zoom an image adjust Zoom A reference image appears in the upper left hand section of the display To exit zoom press the right Clr key Zoom Clear LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Introduction NOTE NOTE Freezing an image Freezing an Image Freezing an Image Freezing a real time image stops all movement and allows you to measure and print the image While
32. measurements Figure 7 7 shows the highest level of the Obstetrics exam category with the OB studies listed a 9 GE Medical Systems MI 0 18 Tis 0 0 E8C RS 08 28 03 4 41 53 PM Jo x 08 28 03 4 31 46 PM adm aelesie Gyn Obstetrics Connectivity Measure About Admin Stenosis erreurs AB Ratio MEASUREMENT amp ANALYSIS Caliper M amp A Advancea Doppler OB Table Ellipse Measurement menu 20 Area trace Add measurement Add folder 2 Volume 4 x Delete measure and folder C MM a Angle Factory Edit Calc C Dop ME oB 1 ME oB 2 3 Folder Ml OB General Name Generic W Fetal Heart Available folders and measureme Ma Stenosis MIDAS Ratio Caliper Ellipse Area trace Volume Angle MI OB GYH Vessel HES CAPS start e Figure 7 7 Selection Menu Exam Studies LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 19 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Selecting a study or measurement continued After you select a study the Selection menu shows all folders and measurements in the study The Folder section of the Measurement amp Analysis screen changes and lists the measurements See Figure 7 8 The Selection menu shows all measurements for the OB 1 exam category 9 GE Medical Systems MI 0 18 Tis 0 0 E8C RS F6 98128103 4 31 46 PM adm 1 1 Gyn 08 28 03 4 43 04 PM Obstetrics MI Generic Connectivity Measure About Admin 0B 1 GS
33. press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper 4 To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points 5 To complete the measurement press Set Crown Rump Length The system displays the biparietal diameter in the Results Window SSASS To measure crown rump length make one distance ecoeoee measurement 1 Select CRL an active caliper displays 2 To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball 3 To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper 4 To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points 5 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the crown rump length in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 13 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Femur Length SESS To measure femur length make one distance measurement 0000o 1 Select FL an active caliper displays 2 To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball 3 To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper 4 To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points 5 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the fe
34. proper medical protocols by the user When appropriate be sure to note any protocols associated with a particular measurement or calculation Formulas and databases used within the system software that are associated with specific investigators are so noted Be sure to refer to the original article describing the investigator s recommended clinical procedures General Guidelines 13 2 New Patient information must be entered before beginning an exam See Beginning an Exam on page 4 2 for more information Any measurement can be repeated by selecting that measurement again from the Selection Menu The system retains as many as eight measurements but the worksheet retains only the last six measurements of each type The six worksheet measurements can be averaged and the average used in other calculations LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Pediatrics Calculations Pediatrics Calculations Overview Pediatrics measurements offer two different types of measurement studies e Generic The Generic Calculations study is common to all applications See Generic Measurements on page 7 57 for more information e Pediatric Hip PedHip e This chapter describes Pediatrics B Mode measurements e The Pediatrics M Mode measurements are common to other applications See M Mode Measurements on page 7 66 for more information e The Pediatrics Doppler measurements are common to other applica
35. right portion Figure 3 15 Figure 3 15 Color Printer Connection NOTE Please refer to the operation manual of each peripheral for information needed by the user to operate the system safely For detailed installation information please refer to the LOGIQ Book Peripheral Installation Instruction manual LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 17 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use system Positioning Transporting Moving the System When moving or transporting the system follow the precautions below to ensure the maximum safety for personnel the system and other equipment Before moving the system 1 Shut down the system See Power Off on page 3 29 for more information 2 Unplug the power cord if the system is plugged in 3 Disconnect all cables from off board peripheral devices external printer etc from the console To prevent damage to the Power Cord DO NOT pull excessively on the cord or make sharp bends while wrapping 4 Store all probes in their original cases or in soft cloth or foam to prevent damage 5 Store sufficient gel and other essential accessories in the special storage case 3 18 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Positioning Transporting When moving the system 1 Always use the handle to move the system CAUTION The system weighs approximately 5 kg To avoid possible injury and equipment damage Do not let the system strike wall
36. system biopsy guidezone and try guidezone angles A1 to A3 to decide the best angle setting for needle path Identify the appropriate biopsy guide bracket by matching the label on the bracket with the probe to be used Figure 17 13 3C Multi Angle Biopsy Guide Bracket Orient the bracket so that the needle clip attachment will be on the same side as the probe orientation mark ridge 2 Figure 17 14 Probe Bracket Alignment 1 Probe Orientation Mark 2 Bracket Attach the biopsy bracket to the probe by sliding the bracket over the end of the probe until it clicks or locks in place 17 30 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing for a Biopsy Multi Angle Biopsy Guide Assembly continued CAUTION Pull up on the knob to freely move the needle guide attachment Align the knob with the selected position of the needle guide attachment from MBX1 MBX2 and MBX3 to match the guidezone display on the ultrasound system 1 Figure 17 15 Select the angle position 1 Pull up Push the knob down into the desired slot to secure the angle position of the needle guide attachment 1 Figure 17 16 Fix the angle position 1 Push Hold the bracket in place on the probe when pushing the knob to secure the angle position of the needle guide attachment Excessive force may cause the bracket to release from the probe LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 17 31 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes an
37. the CD R CD ROM MUST support 16x writing speed or greater Media Handling Tips To eject the CD ROM always press Ctrl E DO NOT press the eject button on the CD Drive Always finalize the CD R DVD R DVD RAM This allows you to read the them on any other PC DO NOT finalize the CD R DVD R DVD RAM if you want to add more images LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 15 11 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Recording Images Save As Saving Images to CD ROM to View on Any PC To save images to the CD ROM 1 Insert the CD 2 Go to Utility gt Connectivity gt Tools Select the Media as CD Rewritable 3 Label the CD 4 Press Format to format the CD ROM 5 Select the image s to be saved to CD ROM press Menu and select Save As The SAVE AS menu appears SAVE AS Save in archive co ROM G File name i Image01 Store image only C Secondary capture Compression Jpeg p Quality 100 Save astyve ECE cancet_ Figure 15 2 Save As Menu 6 Specify Compression and Save As Type and press Save The image is saved to the CD ROM 7 When you have put all the images you want on the CD press Ctrl E to eject the CD ROM 8 Finalize the CD ROM by selecting Finalize and Eject CD NOTE If you want to add more images to the CD ROM select Eject CD 15 12 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Storing Images with More Resolution Image Data Management To store im
38. timeline mode When selected and you select the F8 key to hide or show annotations if you are in multiple image the system hides the text in both images When cleared the system only hides the text for the active image Erase When the image is unfrozen Deletes annotations when you unfreeze the image After you change annotation options select Save to save the changes LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Annotations Libraries Presets Annotations Libraries Applications Preset Menu The Annotations Libraries Applications tab is a link to the Applications preset menu The Applications preset screen allows you to specify which libraries belong to an application You also specify which is the default library that displays when you use annotations Libraries Annotations Applications Applications Annotations Figure 16 24 Applications Annotations Link LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 43 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Annotations Libraries Applications Preset Menu continued Settings Body Patterns Preset Abdomen Annotation Menu Select Library Abdomen v Annotations Libraries Figure 16 25 Applications Annotations Preset Menu Table 16 29 Applications Preset Parameter Description Preset The name of the application preset 16 44 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Annotations
39. 0 ODBC Name l Enable Placement of Patient Files a Database Name A 127 0 0 1 PatientArchive EchoServerDB OoOo O C HardDrive C Both eras of Report Files Se od 127 0 01ImageArchve Ss Removable Media l Figure 16 49 EchoDatabase v3 0 ODBC Service Type p ooo 6s S 06 e aeea Table 16 56 EchoDatabase ODBC Preset Parameter Description Placement of Patient Enter the path to the patient archive If the patient Files archive is on a removable disk select Removable Media Placement of Image Enter the path to the image archive If the image Files archive is on a removable disk select Removable Media Placement of Report Enter the path to the report archive If the report Files archive is on a removable disk select Removable Media Database Name The name of the database Store into Select HardDrive Removable Media or Both Removable Media Select media LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 81 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System EchoPac Media Figure 16 50 EchoPac Media ervice Type Table 16 57 EchoPac Media Preset Parameter Description Location Type the location of the media storage Type Select the type of media storage R or R W Image to Buffer i F Figure 16 51 Image to Buffer Service Type 16 82 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Conf
40. 09 03 03 2 50 31 PM adm b 1 1 Adult B Fra 4 0 MHz Gn 50 E A H 4 6 Ratio Map 0 D Stenosis DR HR FA ETN Medical Systems MI 0 4 Tis 0 0 3C RS wah Vascular 1 d 5 65 cm Generic L 0 00 cm Worksheet Display B carotid B LEA Mi Ev Mitco Bi vea Mi uev Renal Menu Delete Active p s gjini we Measure Cursor Select AN mocomm Stenosis HR lt V start e Place the first point M amp A Figure 11 3 M Mode Selection Menu NOTE The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze Stenosis See Stenosis on page 7 59 for more information AIB Ratio See A B Ratio on page 7 67 for more information Doppler Mode Measurements 8 GE Medical Systems MI0 6 Tis 0 0 3C RS 09 03 03 2 53 47 PM I 9103 03 2 53 47 PM adm b 1 1 Carotid Vascular B d Fra 4 0 MHz EA 1 2 B sy Map G 0 z z D 17 0 cm E DR 81 PI FR 29 Hz AO 100 RI MaxPG MeanPG SM Ratio D S Ratio HR Modify Auto Calcs Worksheet Display PW z Fra 2 5 MHz E Gn 0 Mies AO 100 m PRF 2 6 kHz LEV WF 104 Hz i tco SY 3 DR 36 B EA SVD 5 3 cm Mi uev Menu Delete Active Renal ess hae q Measure Cycle Select Angle Correct Cursor Select Madem PI RI MeanPG SM Ratio M amp A Figure 11 4 D Mode Selection Menu Example Control Assignment Cancel Transfer After the Auto Vascular calculation results are assigned to a particular vessel the u
41. 1 1 3 s Menu Delete Active Cine LoopSpeed Cy t Start Frame End Frame Framebyframe lt A gt v Mod wa Run Stop u First Last start x ws Scroll Figure 6 1 CINE Display Using CINE Adjusting CINE Loop Speed Adjust the Loop Speed control at the bottom of the Selection Menu Scanning Display Functions Introduction 6 8 Annotating an Image The annotation function provides the capability to type the comments of free text and or insert the pre defined comments from the comment library It also provides the user with arrow markers to point to parts of the image Pressing the Comment key or any keys on the alphanumeric keyboard initiates the annotation mode This assigns the trackball function to controlling the cursor and displays the annotation library on the Selection Menu menu Figure 6 2 Comment Key on the Front Panel 1 Comment Key LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Annotating an Image Introduction continued NOTE NOTE In annotation mode text can be added by using the Selection Menu Menu library or by typing from the alphanumeric keyboard Annotations can be erased by changing modes powering down or when Clear or New Patient are pressed In addition the display s home position can be changed preferred annotation area for each display so that all subsequent annotations begin in the same spot Annotation Mode is activated by pressing the Comme
42. 100 122 122 9 8 9 8 s menu delete browse B ff Frequency 2 Grey Map 3Dynamic Range E Rejection EFocus Position A Mod lt gt PEE VirtualConvex Colorize Edge Enhance Updowninvert Focus Number v Figure 17 7 Biopsy Guidezones for the 3C Probe The biopsy guidezone represents a path of the needle The dots which make up the guidezones is the depth readout where e Yellow represent 1 cm increments e Red represents 5 cm increments The display should be carefully monitored during a biopsy for any needle deviation from the center line or guidezone NOTE To set up biopsy guidezones refer to Table 16 8 for more details Preparing for a Biopsy Displaying the Guidezone continued The needle may vary from the center line or guidezone for various reasons e Needle barrel to needle clearance or strength e Bracket manufacturing tolerance e Needle deflection due to tissue resistance e Needle size chosen Thinner needles may deflect more Table 17 9 LOGIQ Book Biopsy Guide Availability Probe Fixed Angle Multi Angle MBX1 MBX2 MBX3 3C RS 4 0 6 0 8 0 E8C RS 14 0 10LB RS 2 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 DANGER LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual NOTE Failure to match the guidezone displayed to the guide may cause the needle to track a path outside the zone It is extremely important that when using the adjustable angle biopsy guides the angle displayed on
43. 18 32 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Gel Table 18 13 Gel Assistance Accessory Units Thermasonic Gel Warmer Holds three plastic bottles 250ml or 8 oz Aquasonic 100 Scan Gel 5 liter jug Scan Ultrasound Gel 250 ml plastic bottles 12 case 8 oz plastic bottles 12 case 1 gallon plastic jug Four 1 gallon plastic jugs Table 18 14 Gel Accessory Units Aquasonic 100 Scan Gel 5 liter jug 250 ml plastic bottles 12 case Scan Ultrasound Gel 8 oz plastic bottles 12 case 1 gallon plastic jug Four 1 gallon plastic jugs Disinfectant Table 18 15 Disinfectant Accessory Units Cidex Activated Dialdehyde 16 1 quart bottles 4 1 gallon bottles 2 2 5 gallon bottles LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 18 33 User Maintenance Ultrasound Probe and Cord Sheath Sets Table 18 16 Probe and Cord Sheath Sets Accessory Units Sterile Ultrasound Probe Sheath Set 20 Per Set Sterile Ultrasound Cord Sheath Set 20 Per Set Sanitary Rectal Vaginal Probe Cover 20 Per Set Sterile Combination Probe and Cord Cover Set 12 Per Set Sterile Ultrasound Probe Sheath Set for Wide 20 Per Set 2 5 and 3 5 Aperture Sector Probes 18 34 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Symbols Stenosis 9 30 B Mod
44. 30 specifying default types 16 18 spinal length 9 29 thorax transverse diameter 9 32 tibia length 9 33 transverse abdominal diameter 9 31 transverse cerebellar diameter 9 31 OB mulitgestational 9 59 OB worksheet 9 40 AUA 9 41 calculations 9 43 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 CUA 9 41 EFW growth percentile 9 43 measurement information 9 42 method 9 42 multiple fetuses 9 63 patient data 9 47 selecting ultrasound age 9 41 OB GYN vessel measurements 8 17 9 37 acceleration 8 11 9 37 acceleration time 8 11 9 37 end diastole 8 72 9 38 end diastole peak systole ratio D S 8 13 9 38 heart rate 9 37 minimum diastole 8 72 9 38 peak systole 8 12 9 38 peak systole end diastole ratio S D 8 13 9 38 selecting 8 8 9 36 OB GYN vessel study 9 35 Occipitofrontal diameter OFD 9 30 Operator controls 18 11 options system 16 114 Ovaries measurement 9 72 P Past Exam how to enter patient data 9 52 Patient 4 7 Patient data OB 9 4 OB graphs 9 54 OB worksheet 9 41 Patient safety 2 5 Peak systole PS OB GYN vessel measurement 8 12 9 38 vascular measurement 17 27 Peak systole end diastole ratio 7 72 Peak systole end diastole ratio S D OB GYN vessel measurement 8 13 9 38 Vascular measurement 11 21 Peripherals connector panel 3 11 Phantoms 18 16 ping verifying service connectivity 16
45. 4 Disconnect the probes Clean or disinfect all probes as necessary Store them in their shipping cases to avoid damage 5 Disconnect AC adapter mains plug from the power outlet NOTE Disconnect the AC adapter mains plug from the outlet to ensure the system is disconnected from the power source LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 29 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Adjusting the Display Monitor Rotate the LCD monitor awe 3 30 The LCD monitor position can be adjusted for easy viewing e Tilt the LCD monitor for the optimum viewing angle The maximum angle is 175 wal hu e a ym Figure 3 23 LCD Monitor CRITTTZ To avoid damage DO NOT push the LCD monitor too much when the viewing angle is at maximum LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Brightness Adjusting the Display Monitor Adjusting the LCD monitor s brightness is one of the most important factors for proper image quality The proper setup displays a complete gray scale The lowest level of black should just disappear into the background and the highest white should be bright but not saturated You can obtain the optimum screen angle if you can see the LOGIQ Book watermark in the lower left portion of the screen LOGIQ Book To adjust the brightness 1 Adjust the Brightness toggle located beside the Selection Menu on the right side of the LCD monitor Speakers NOTE
46. 68 Plot Both fetal trending 9 57 Power 3 22 connection USA 3 22 Cord 3 18 On Off Standby 3 25 shut down 3 29 standby mode 3 28 Index 5 Index switch location 3 25 up sequence 3 27 Power Doppler Imaging imaging changing presets 16 34 Prescription Device 1 6 Preset Program menu Acoustic Output Fetal Exposure 9 3 General Warning 9 3 Prudent Use 9 3 Presets organizing folders and measurements 7 24 presets annotations 16 39 connectivity 16 57 measurements 16 18 system 16 4 Previous exam data to enter manually 9 52 print keys assigning to a device or dataflow 16 84 viewing structure of configuration 16 106 Probe cleaning 17 13 Probe handling and infection control 17 12 Probe identifier display location 3 46 Probes 17 15 cable handling 3 34 17 2 care and maintenance 17 8 connecting 3 33 convex active matrix array 17 21 curved array 17 21 coupling gels Coupling gels 17 18 deactivating 3 35 disconnecting 3 36 disinfecting 17 15 environmental requirements 17 8 ergonomics 17 2 linear array 17 21 naming conventions 17 20 planned maintenance 17 18 probe orientation 17 3 safety 17 9 using protective sheaths 17 10 selecting 3 32 storing 3 37 transporting 3 37 properties displaying for a device or service 16 107 Prudent use icon 2 2 Pulsatility index 7 70 Pulse Wave Mode imaging changing presets 16 34 Index 6
47. 8L RS ca Render Mode Grey Surf Opacity 56 Threshold Scan dist 6 0 cm Scalpel Undo Reset Reset Color i i i i 3D Threhold Gray Threhold Txtr GraySurface Colorize Contrast lt gt Mod Ta Opacity Gray Opacity Txtr Scan Distance Auto Movie Render y start e Figure 5 15 Easy 3D Descriptions and instructions for using Easy 3D follow Table 5 3 Easy 3D Description and Instructions for Use 3D Parameter Description Reset Resets the 3D volume of interest back to its original orientation Utilities Select Average Off Average Light Average Medium or Average Strong Undo Undoes any manipulation you have done to your 3D dataset Auto Movie Initializes the calculation and display of a 3D movie A rotation of 30 degrees left and right around the actual image position either the default position after acquisition or the position that was manually defined by manipulating the 3D volume of interest is shown For this 60 degree rotation eleven images in steps of 6 degrees are calculated Optimizing the Image Table 5 3 Easy 3D Description and Instructions for Use 3D Parameter Description Scalpel Structures for example a part of the placenta hiding the view to a fetal face can be cut out in a rendered image All visible structures can be cut out The option of erase inside deletes all structures inside the marked region The option of erase outside delet
48. 90 non condensing 10 90 non condensing Pressure 700 1060hPa 700 1060hPa 700 1060hPa 3 4 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Console Overview Console Overview Console graphics The following are illustrations of the console Figure 3 1 LOGIQ Book System closed and opened views 1 2 3 4 5 Handle Soft Menu use same as menu key LCD Alphanumeric keys Control Panel LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 5 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Console graphics continued Figure 3 2 LOGIQ Book System side views CAUTION Do not push objects into air vents and openings of LOGIQ Book Doing so can cause fire or electric shock by shorting out interior components 3 6 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Console Overview Battery The lithium ion battery provides power when an AC power source is not available A battery in the battery bay is standard with the LOGIQ Book Lithium ion batteries last longer than conventional batteries and do not require replacement as often You can expect one hour of battery life with a single fully charged battery The lithium ion technology used in your LOGIQ Book s battery is significantly less hazardous to the environment than the lithium metal technology used in some other batteries such as watch batteries Used batteries should not be placed with common household waste products Conta
49. Age Calculation e Multi Gestational Calculation EFW Calculation Summary Worksheet Summary Report e Fetal Trend Graph Gynecology Measurements Calculations Summary Worksheet Summary Report Urology Measurements Calculation Summary Worksheet Summary Report Cardiac Measurements Calculations Summary Worksheet Summary Report 3C RS Convex Probe Applications Abdomen OB GYN Urology Small Parts 8C RS Micro Convex Probe Applications Neonatal Abdominal Neonatal Head Pediatric Abdominal Pediatric Hip e i12L RS Linear Probe Applications Intraoperative Small Parts Vascular Pediatrics Table 18 6 Inputs and Outputs Signal 10Lb RS Linear Probe Applications Small Parts Vascular Pediatric Neonatal Obstetrics Gynecology E8C RS Micro Convex Endocavity Probe Applications Obstetrics Gynecology Urology Video Out VGA Connectors USB port 1 2 PCMCIA interface LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 18 5 User Maintenance Clinical Measurement Accuracy Basic Measurements 18 6 The following information is intended to provide guidance to the user in determining the amount of variation or measurement error that should be considered when performing clinical measurements with this equipment Error can be contributed by equipment limitations and improper user technique Be sure to follow all measurement instructions and deve
50. Available fetus9 fetus10 fetus11 fetus12 fetus13 fetus14 fetus15 fetus16 hand1 hand2 head1 head2 head3 head4 head5 heart1 heart2 heart3 heart4 heart5 heart6 heart7 heart8 leg1 leg2 leg3 leg4 leg5 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 TT 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 leg6 leg7 leg8 liver neck1 neck2 neck3 neck4 ob1 ob2 ob3 ob4 ob5 ob6 organ1 organ2 organ3 organ4 organ5 pelvis1 pelvis2 thyroid twin twin2 twin3 twin4 twind twin6 Annotating an Image 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 twin7 twin8 uro1 uro2 uro3 uro4 uro5 uro6 uro7 uro8 uterus uterus2 uterus3 vet cat1 vet cat2 100 vet cat3 101 vet cow1 102 vet cow2 103 vet cow3 104 vet dog1 105 vet dog2 106 vet dog3 107 vet horse1 108 vet horse2 109 vet horse3 110 111 vet horse4 vet horse5 6 17 Scanning Display Functions Start Menu The Start Menu activates the Service Browser or the Training CD Select Service Browser to open the service interface select Training CD to view the training please insert appropriate CD in the CD drive NOTE The Training CD can also be accessed by selecting Ctrl T Start Menu Training CD Cancel Figure 6 6 Start Menu NOTE Only the Field Engineer
51. Doppler When you view the PW Doppler spectrum and a B Mode image with a 3 5 MHz probe this means that you are viewing the image at 3 5 MHz and Dopplering at 2 5 MHz LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 43 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Doppler Mode Display 09 02 03 9 19 24 AM 203 700 24 1 65 6 s Doppler Display 09 02 03 9 19 24 AM 1 1 Carotid GF B Fra 8 0 MHz eT 66 EA 2 2 Map J0 D ENI Medical Systems MI 0 9 Tis 0 1 10Lb RS S 36 1 5 cm Menu Delete Active A lt gt SV Length Colorize Angle Correct SweepSpeed Wall Filter Yv Pos Figure 5 9 Doppler Mode Display Table 5 2 Doppler Mode Display Explanations Description Format Values PRF Pulse repetition frequency displayed as PRF in kHz Wall Filter Wall filter size displayed as WF in Hz Doppler Gain Displays asGN in decibels db Sample Volume Depth Displays in Cm when Doppler cursor is present Doppler Angle AC Indicates angle in degrees between the Doppler mode cursor and the angle correction indicator Displays when Doppler cursor is present The Doppler Angledisplays in red when the angle exceeds 60 Velocities obtained when the angle is greater than 80 are displayed as asterisks Spectral Invert INVERT appears when the spectral trace is inverted and the plus minus signs are reversed Optimizing Spectral Doppler Table 5 2 Doppler Mode Display Explanat
52. Down Invert Rejection Gain Colorize You can use the following controls to process a frozen Color Flow image Angle Correct Threshold Color Map Color Invert Baseline Transparency map Capture Auto Optimize Optimizes the B Mode image or Doppler Spectrum LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 6 5 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Scanning Display Functions Using CINE Introduction CINE images are constantly being stored by the system and are available for playback or manual review via CINE You can view CINE as a continuous loop via CINE Loop or manually review CINE images frame by frame via the Trackball Data in CINE is available until new data is acquired CINE is stored on the system s memory and can be archived as well CINE is useful for focusing on images during a specific part of the heart cycle or to view short segments of a scan session Activating CINE To activate CINE 1 Press Freeze 2 Move the Trackball 6 6 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 CINE and Monitor Display The CINE display located on the left hand side of the monitor indicates which frame you are viewing of the whole loop 62 123 as well as the time at which this frame occurs within the loop 1 6 3 2 s 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 33 Tis 0 1 3C RS F6 99102103 9 27 40 AM i 1 Abdomen GE 09 02 03 9 27 45 AM B Fra 4 0 MHz Gn EA 3 2 Map G0 17 0 cm 81 14 Hz 100 207 207 14 3
53. Figure 3 29 Control Panel Controls are grouped together by function for ease of use See the callouts for this figure on the following page 3 38 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Operator Controls Control Panel Map continued PON an 9 10 11 Time Gain Compensation TGC New Patient End Exam Mode Gain Auto keys M Mode Pulsed Wave Doppler PW Modes Color Flow CF Mode and B Mode Preset Key Imaging Measurement Keys Clear Comment Body Pattern Ellipse Measure Zoom M D Cursor Scan Area Set B Pause Depth Reverse Imaging Keys Multi Image and 3D Left Right Select Programmable Print Keys Freeze 12 Alphanumeric Keyboard Use the keyboard to enter patient information and annotations LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 39 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Keyboard The standard alphanumeric keyboard has some special functions Esc Exit current display screen Help F1 Key Enter Online help user manual PDI F2 Key Power Doppler Image 3D F3 Key Three dimensional Steer F4 Key PWD CFM Steer User Define The following functions are available for the F5 and F6 keys Function F5 and Veterinary Worksheet Spooler Eject Report Arrow and Utility F6 Keys 3 40 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Operator Controls Selection Menu The Selection Menu contains exam function and mode function speci
54. Growth Curve Graph Quad View The measurement values are displayed at the bottom of the graph LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 9 49 OB GYN Fetal Growth Curve Graph continued To change When you view four graphs simultaneously you can select measurements in which four you want to see To change each graph in quad view guad view 1 On the graph display use the Trackball to move the cursor to the small box that is upper left of each graph then press Set The system displays a list of measurements 2 Move the Trackball to select the desired measurement and press Set The system displays the Fetal Growth Curve Graph for the selected measurement To scroll through all Fetal Growth Curve Graphs adjust the Graph Change knob The order of a quad graph view can be saved by selecting Save 9 50 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Graphs Fetal Trending When you have ultrasound data for more than one exam for a patient you can use the data to look at fetal trending on the Fetal Growth Curve Graphs 1 Select Graph Display and select the desired Fetal Growth Curve Graph 2 Select Plot Both The system automatically finds the data from previous ultrasound exams and displays it on the graph with the present data Origin LMP LMP 02 02 2001 BBT 02 02 0020 GA 22w5d EDD LMP 11 09 2001 FetusNo A 1 FetusPos PLAC lt Measurement Type gt cm FL Hadlock FL Hadl
55. Harsha Malagi MI 0 10 Tis 0 0 3C 08 18 03 11 27 32 AM J9 08 18103 11 27 32 AM adm 41543592 1 1 Prostate B Fra 4 0 MHz Gn 38 A a F Map A0 D 14 0 cm DR 75 Blipse Urology t AB Ratio Area trace Volume Angle Worksheet Display fa Urology d 6 69 cm L 0 00 cm J Menu Delete Active Measure 1 2 3 4 5 Cursor Select lt gt Mode 2D ouelen Caliper Ellipse Area trace Volume Angle I Place the first point M amp A Figure 12 1 Urology Exam Calcs B Mode Touch Panel Bladder Volume This calculation uses a standard distance measurement Length is typically measured in the sagittal plane Width and height are measured in the axial plane a ASE Medical Systems Harsha Malagi MI 0 10 Tis 0 0 3C 08 18 03 11 29 22 AM J9 08 18 03 11 28 01 AM adm 41543592 1 1 Prostate Urology 4 Frq 4 0 MHz ac x J Gn 38 Generic EBA 18 amp urology m Map A O D 14 0 cm Bladder DR 75 t FR 18 Hz Bladder L AO 100 Bladder H Bladder W Worksheet Display Menu Delete Active Measure 1 MG 3 4 5 Cursor Select lt gt Mode 2D ode airaddens Bladder H Bladder W M amp A Figure 12 2 Bladder Volume Touch Panel To measure Bladder Volume 1 Scan the patient in the appropriate scan plane 2 Select the Bladder folder an active caliper displays 3 Perform a standard distance measurement The system displays the distance value in the Results Window 4 To make the second and
56. Hellman MEASUREMENT amp ANALYSIS CRL Hadlock M amp A Advanced Doppler OB Table BPD Hadlock Measurement menu 20 FL Hadlock Add measurement Add folder 2 AC JSUM x Delete measure and folder cium AC Merz Factory Edit Calc C Dop BPD Merz amp C ASUM Folder BPD Merz Name GS Hellman CRL Hadlock BPD Hadlock FL Hadlock AC JSUM amp C Merz BPD Merz AC ASUM BPD Merz Ft Mercer OBER CAPS start e Figure 7 8 Selection Menu OB 1 Exam Category 7 20 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Measurement and Calculation Setup Selecting a study or measurement continued Figure 7 9 shows the Selection menu after the BPD measurement is selected The Measurement section is now displayed with information about the BPD measurement ENI Medical Systems MI 0 18 Tis 0 0 E8C RS 08 28 03 4 44 50 PM 08 28 03 4 31 46 PM adm 1 1 Gyn Obstetrics MI Generic Connectivity Il Measure About Admin amp oB i GS Hellman MEASUREMENT amp ANALYSIS CRL Hadlock M amp A Advanced l Doppler OB Table BPD Hadlock Measurement menu 20 FL Hadlock Add measurement Add folder AC JSUM x Delete measure and folder LMM AC Merz Ea remote BPD Merz AC ASUM Measurement BPD Merz Name BPD Hadlock Tool 2D caliper z Parameter Tootresutt Unit Precision Method _ 2 Distance Calculated Calculated
57. Insert a formatted MOD Magneto Optical Disk into the MOD drive NOTE For information about formatting an MOD See Formatting removable media for more information On the Touch Panel press Utility On the Utility Touch Panel press System On the monitor display select Backup Restore The Backup Restore screen is displayed See Figure 16 16 NOTE If you are not logged in with administrator privileges the Operator Login window is displayed Log on with administrator privileges Inthe Backup list select Patient Archive and Report Archive Inthe Media field select MO Select Backup The system performs the backup As it proceeds status information is displayed on the Backup Restore screen Figure 6 8 Sample Help Topic The blue underlined text links you to related topics Click on the link to move to the new topic LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 6 21 Scanning Display Functions Links After you click on a blue underlined portion of text the screen updates with this link s content To go back to the previous screen press Back To return to the link press Forward E HTML Help Formatting removable media 2 System System Imaging Preset Menu System System Measure Preset Menu 1 Select the removable media from the Media list E Q System Backup and Restore Preset Menu 2 Type a name for the removable media in the Label field Backup and restore strategy patient a
58. MI0 4 Tis 0 0 3C RS I o 09 10 03 9 15 13 AM 09 10 03 9 12 49 AM adm OB 2 3 Gynecology MI Generic Connectivity Measure About Admin General Gynecology Ao MEASUREMENT amp AHALYSIS Umbilical M amp A Advancea Doppler OB Table PS Measurement menu Add measurement Add folder C 2p Picena x Delete measure and folder C MM Desc Aorta Factory Edit Calc Dop Uterine MCA Folder Ovarian Hame Umbilical JV Auto sequence vailable folders and measureme o o o o o m gt Figure 7 12 Measurement amp Analysis screen Auto sequence LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 25 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Changing Measurements 7 26 NOTE NOTE You can make changes to some of the measurements For example Head Circumference can be measured with an ellipse a trace or two distances You can specify which measurement type you want the system to use as the default You specify the measurement type by selecting the tool to use to make the measurement e To change the tool used to make a measurement In the Measurement section of the Measurement amp Analysis screen select the desired tool from the Tool list See Figure 7 13 Select the arrow to display the drop down list If the Tool field is gray it cannot be changed After you choose the tool this is what the system expects when you scan and choose this measurement The
59. Manual 7 35 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations M amp A Advanced Preset The system allows you to specify application specific values for certain parameters You specify the parameter values on the Advanced tab of the Measurement amp Analysis screen 1 Press Utility The system displays the Utility screen on the monitor display 2 Select Advanced 3 Select Measure 4 On the monitor display select the Advanced tab EN Medical Systems MI0 4 Tis 0 1 10Lb RS ay weleetne 09 12 03 9 25 09 AM 09 12 03 9 24 15 AM adm Carotid Obstetrics Mi Generic Connectivity Il Measure About Admin amp 0B 2 3 MEASUREMENT amp ANALYSIS Bi aFiMmoore AC Hadlock M amp A Advanced Doppier OB Table HC Hadlock BPD Hadlock Application specific parameters FL Hadlock M amp A category Obstetrics Doppler Default Method DopplerTraceCycles Heart Rate Cycle Start M amp A on freeze B Start M amp A on freeze M Start M amp A on freeze D RI Calc Bidirectional Flow RI Calc Method Keep Result Window Trace Auto Vol Flow Method TAMEAN Figure 7 19 M amp A Advanced Preset Menu M amp A Category Display and select current exam category Parameter Lists application specific parameters Value Select the value for a parameter 7 36 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Measurement and Calculation Setup M amp A Advanced Preset continued 5 To
60. Mode cursor press M D Cursor Trackball to position M D Mode cursor Values On Off Benefits Lets you position the cursor before you go into M Mode or Doppler Mode so that you can make optimum use of the larger B Mode image LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 9 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Frequency Description Adjusting NOTE NOTE Values Benefits Bioeffects 5 10 Multi Frequency mode lets you downshift to the probe s next lower frequency or shift up to a higher frequency To select a new frequency 1 Select Frequency 2 Select the desired frequency Frequency change is not active when the image is frozen The selected frequency appears in the upper right hand portion of the monitor display Changing frequency resets those parameters which are presettable by frequency to their preset values for the current frequency Vary depending on the probe and application Frequency values are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient This optimizes the probe s wide band imaging capabilities at multiple frequencies to image at greater depths Activating multi frequency mode may change the TI and or MI Observe the output display for possible effects LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 TGC Description Adjusting NOTE NOTE Values Benefits Optimizing B Mode
61. Optimizing Spectral Doppler Doppler Mode Selection Menu Frequency Baseline Quick Angle Spectral Invert PRF SV Length Colorize Angle Correct SweepSpeed Wall Filter Figure 5 10 PW Mode Selection Menu Rejection Auto Calculations Dynamic Range Modify Calcs Display Format 2 Time Resolution 2 Full Timeline OFF Power Output 100 Trace Method OFF Spectral Average Med Trace Sensitivity 0 Trace Direction Both LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 47 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image B Pause Description Toggles between simultaneous and update presentation while viewing the timeline Adjusting To activate press B Pause to toggle between simultaneous and update The M Mode trace does not restart each time the image is updated however a black bar may appear Values On Off Benefits Update increases the Spectral Doppler display quality Bioeffects Activating Update may change the TI and or MI Observe the output display for possible effects 5 48 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing Spectral Doppler Doppler sample volume gate position Trackball Description Moves the sample volume gate on the B Mode s Doppler Mode cursor The gate is positioned over a specific position within the vessel Adjusting To move Doppler Mode cursor position move Trackball left or right until positioned over the vessel To move sample volume gate position move Trackball up or dow
62. Patient Menu Figure 15 6 Select All Copy Patient Menu NOTE You need to use your best judgment when moving patients images If there are lots of images or loops then only move a few patients at a time 5 Once you have selected all of the patients to export press Copy Patient from the Select All Copy Patient Menu LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 15 17 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Recording Images Exporting Data continued 6 Informational status messages appear as the copy is taking place A final status report pop up message appears Press OK G Information Some or all patients has failed during copy 5 of 6 successfully copied 1 of 6 not properly copied Figure 15 7 Export Completion Status Message 7 Press Ctrl E to eject the media Specify that you want to finalize the CD ROM However if you want to import this data to another system do not finalize the CD 15 18 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Image Data Management Importing Data To import an exam s to another Ultrasound system 1 At the other Ultrasound system insert the MOD or CD ROM 2 Press Patient press More then Import The Import from pop up message appears Press OK IMPORT FROM Service Removeable Archive Cancel Figure 15 8 Import Pop up Message 3 The Patient menu just shows the patients available for import from the removable media you just loaded onto the s
63. Permanent Doppler Permanent Easy3D Permanent Figure 16 67 Administrative System Admin Preset Menu Table 16 68 System Administration Preset Parameter Description Product The name of the product HW Number The hardware number of the product System Serial The serial number of the system Number SW Option Key The software option key New To enter a new software option key select New and then enter the software option key Delete To remove a software option key select the key in the SW Option Key list and then select Delete Options A list of the option name and status 16 114 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Key Configuration System Administration The Key Configuration screen allows you to program function keys to your preference ADMIN Users Logon System Admin KeyConfig startmenu r Function Key Config F1 Key HELP F2 Key pp F3 Key 3D F4 Key STEER F5 Key F6Key worksheetBi gt Figure 16 68 Administrative Key Configuration Preset Menu Table 16 69 Key Configuration Preset Parameter Description F1Key Help non programmable F2 Key PDI non programmable F3 Key 3D non programmable F4 Key Steer non programmable F5 Key The following functions are programmable Arrows Eject Report Spooler Utility Veterinary or Worksheet F6 Key The following functions a
64. Printers Press this key to add an additional standard printer via the USB serial port and to configure digital printers This activates the Windows Add Printer wizard NOTE Most printer drivers are available via Windows however newer printers may require you to load the manufacturer supplied print driver must be on CD ROM Refer to the Basic Service Manual for more information Default Printer If you have an additional standard printer set up via the USB serial port select it here Print Full Screen Select this if you want the standard printer to print the full screen Enable Video Invert Enable Print Screen Key Select this is you want the standard printer to print black on white rather than white on black If you have a standard printer connected to the USB port on the system you can use the print screen key to print to this printer Table 16 21 Standard Printer Preset Parameter Description Print Full Screen Select this if you want the standard printer to print the full screen LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 16 31 Customizing Your System 16 32 Table 16 21 Standard Printer Preset Parameter Description Enable Video Invert Enable Print Screen Key Select this is you want the standard printer to print black on white rather than white on black If you have a standard printer connected to the USB port on
65. Threshold 70 AutoLineDensity IV PWICF Ratio 2 Figure 16 17 Color Flow parameters 16 36 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Imaging Presets Power Doppler Imaging PDI General Preset Probe Carotid 8L RS Carotid All Probes PDI Carotid 8L RS PDI Gain Default Map P5 PW 7 CF PDI Angle Steer Wall Filter Packet Size Carotid 8L RS PDI AutoLineDensity Line Density Transparent Select o Line Density Zoom Frame Average Velocity cm s Threshold Spatial Filter Figure 16 18 PDI parameters M Mode General Preset Probe Carotid ind 8L RS Carotid All Probes M Carotid 8L RS M Sweep Speed 5 z Rejection a hd M Color Tint MapD Dynamic Range 66 v M s PW Display Format vert 125 Edge Enhance 3 x Gray Scale Map BC_GRAYA M Gain delta from B 0 Figure 16 19 M Mode parameters LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 37 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Pulse Wave General Preset Probe Carotid v 8LRS Carotid All Probes PW Carotid 8L RS PW Gray Scale Map DC_GRAYA Rejection oy Dynamic Range 36 7 Gain 16 Baseline 50 z wall Filter Hz 200 SY Gate mm 3 z PW Frequency MHz f z Angle Correct 60 PW CF PDI Angle Steer 20 v Spectral Color Tint Map A Y Velocity cm s 30 Pv CW Sweep Speed 4 z Sample Volume Depth cm 2 04 v Invert
66. To increase decrease press Dynamic Range The settings cycle in 4 dB increments The current value displays on the Selection Menu Dynamic Range values vary by probe and application and are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Optimizes the image s texture and smoothness by increasing the amount of gray scale You decrease the dynamic range to clean out the spectrum to determine if the broadening is actual or not You increase the dynamic range to fill in the spectrum according to your personal preference Dynamic range operates only in realtime not in freeze CINE CINE Timeline or VCR playback and affects Doppler gain Spectral Trace Trace Method Description Adjusting Selecting Trace Traces the average mean and peak velocities in realtime images and spectral broadening in frozen images Select the spectral trace method from Trace Method To activate the Spectral Trace Selection Menu press To get a peak trace click MAX TRACE A green trace displays on the spectrum To get a mean trace click MEAN TRACE A blue trace displays on the spectrum SELECT TRACE lets you indicate whether cardiac cycle Position detection and therefore cardiac cycle identification should use peak timeline data above below or above and below composite the baseline Benefits Broadening may indicate turbulence LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 55
67. User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Contact Information Contact Information Contacting GE Medical Systems Ultrasound INTERNET USA Clinical Questions Service Questions Accessories Catalog Requests Placing an Order For additional information or assistance please contact your local distributor or the appropriate support resource listed on the following pages http www geultrasound com http www gemedicalsystems com rad us probe_care html GE Medical Systems TEL 1 800 437 1171 Ultrasound Service Engineering FAX 1 414 647 4090 4855 W Electric Avenue Milwaukee WI 53219 For information in the United States Canada Mexico and parts of the Caribbean call the Customer Answer Center TEL 1 800 682 5327 or 1 262 524 5698 In other locations contact your local Applications Sales or Service Representative For service in the United States call GE CARES TEL 1 800 437 1171 In other locations contact your local Service Representative To request the latest GE Accessories catalog or equipment brochures in the United States call the Response Center TEL 1 800 643 6439 In other locations contact your local Applications Sales or Service Representative To place an order order supplies or ask an accesory related question in the United States call the GE Access Center TEL 1 800 472 3666 In other locations contact your local Applications Sales or Service Representative LOGIQ
68. Volume Angle lt start e Place the first point M amp A Figure 8 1 Generic Calculations B Mode Selection Menu See B Mode Measurements on page 7 58 for more information Aorta Diameter Abdomen This measurement is found in the Abdomen Exam Calcs tab To measure aorta diameter make one distance measurement 1 2 Renal Length Select Aorta Diameter an active caliper displays To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the aorta diameter in the Results Window This measurement is found in the Renal Exam Calcs tab To measure renal length make one distance measurement 1 Select the appropriate orientation side Right or Left 2 Select Renal Length an active caliper displays 3 To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball 4 To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper 5 To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points if preset accordingly 6 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the ren
69. Yes No Date Resolved Vertical Measurement Accuracy Horizontal Measurement Accuracy Axial Resolution Lateral Resolution Penetration Functional Resolution Contrast Resolution Gray Scale Photography 18 30 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Assistance Assistance Supplies Accessories CAUTION DO NOT connect any probes or accessories without approval by GE The following supplies accessories have been verified to be compatible with the system Peripherals Table 18 10 Peripherals and Accessories Accessory Units Sony B W Printer Model UP D895 Each Sony Digital Color Printer UP D21MD Each IOMEGA USB CD RW Each AVAYA 016064 B Wireless Card Each USB Lamp FlyLight Each Sony VCR Model SVO 9500MD MDP Each Video Adapter Tview Micro Each USB Memory Sony Micro Vault 64MB 256MB Each Mini USB driver 128MB 256MB Network Card FA411 Each Bluetooth PC Card 3CREB96 Each Toshiba MK5002MPL Micro Disk Each LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 18 31 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 User Maintenance Console Table 18 11 Console Accessories Accessory Units Footswitch model FSU2001 Each Battery Pack model SH 250 Each LOGIQ Book Probes Table 18 12 Probes and Accessories Accessory Units 3C RS Each 8C RS Each E8C RS Each 10Lb RS Each i12L RS Each
70. about how to change studies refer to Measurement and Analysis M amp A System Presets on page 16 10 09 03 03 1 10 42 PM 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 33 Tls 0 1 3C RS F6 99 03103 1 08 37 PM adm b 2 OB 273 Obstetrics i Tokyo Shinozuka GE xi 4 0 MHz B Generi Gn 58 Generic Sn Be Osaka M Fetal Heart Map GA A B c D OB GYH Vessel Le a cm Bi EFW Osaka ME Hadiock FR 14 Hz AO 100 Bi ari Return GS Tokyo CRL Osaka BPD Osaka FTA Osaka FL Osaka HL Osaka CTAR BPD Shinozuka AC Shinozuka CRL Shinozuka FL Shinozuka Worksheet Display Menu Delete Active Measure Fetus Cursor Select Mode 20 GS Tokyo CRL Osaka BPD Osaka FTA Osaka FL Osaka lt gt start w Figure 9 11 OB Selection Menu Tokyo and Osaka studies NOTE Tokyo and Osaka studies have a folder for JSUM measurements JSUM measurements include AC BPD CRL and FL Using other OB studies continued 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 33 Tis 0 1 3C RS I o9103103 1 08 37 PM adm b aeleele OB 2 3 Obstetrics GE B Fra 4 0 MHz Bi Generic Gn 58 E A 2 2 amp sum Map G 0 A B c D 17 0 cm DR 81 fei EFW JSUM FR 14 Hz AO 100 B ari 09 03 03 1 12 47 PM CRL JSUM BPD JSUM AC JSUM FL JSUM Worksheet Display d 6 13 cm L 0 00 cm Measure Fetus Cursor Select Mode 2D CRL JSUM BPD JSUM AC JSUM FL JSUM lt start e Place the first point M amp A Figure 9 12 OB Selection Menu ASUM studies NOTE ASUM st
71. action to be performed on this job Troubleshooting To troubleshoot connectivity on this system see Chapter 16 To verify that a service is connected to the network see Chapter 16 15 4 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Image Data Management Image Data Management Clipboard The clipboard displays thumbnail images of the acquired data for the current exam Images from other exams are not displayed on the current patient s clipboard The active image is stored and placed on the clipboard when you press the print key this assumes that you have already set up a print key to do this The clipboard contains preview images with enough resolution to clearly indicate the contents of the image If an image has a triangle indicator on the lower left hand corner then something has been done to the image printed sent to DICOM etc Single images are indicated by a 1 CINE Loops have no special identifier The clipboard fills from left to right starting in the upper left hand corner Once the top row is full the second row starts to fill Once both rows are full the next image stored starts to fill a third row the first row disappears from the clipboard display with the second row now becoming the first row and the third row now becoming the second row LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 15 5 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Recording Images Clipboard continued All of the images ca
72. and or MI Observe the output display for possible effects 5 14 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing B Mode Map Description The system supplies B M and Doppler Mode system maps Adjusting To select a map press Gray Map A map window displays The image reflects the map as you go through the selections Values Gray maps gradually change from least contrasty or softest to most contrasty Map values vary by probe application and multi frequency setting Map values are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs New Patient or Frequency Map Description A Assigns a greater amount of gray scale pixel values to bright reflectors in the image Useful when imaging abdomen liver kidney OB pelvic etc B Assigns a greater amount of gray scale pixel values to bright reflectors in the image Useful when the abdomen liver kidney OB pelvic etc C Assigns a greater amount of gray scale pixel values to bright reflectors in the image Useful when imaging the abdomen liver kidney OB pelvic etc D Assigns a lesser amount of gray scale pixel values to bright reflectors in the image compared to Maps B and C Useful when imaging bright carotid plaque reflectors E Assigns a equal amounts of gray scale pixel values to all reflectors in the image Useful when imaging tissue with bright reflec
73. as Dicom Only j Store Multiframe for Sec Capture Loops E Review Screen View Images as Raw Data Iv Peripherals Setup Printers Default Printer Sony UP D895 BE Print Full Screen L Enable Video Invert Iv Enable Print Screen Key Figure 16 14 System Peripherals Preset Menu Table 16 17 Video Settings Preset Parameter Description Format Select the video format PAL or NTSC Mixed Mode Allows you to select the PAL format but still operate the color printer in NTSC mode This setting has no effect on NTSC mode Table 16 18 VCR Preset Parameter Description VCR No VCR LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Presets System Peripherals Preset Menu continued Table 16 19 Print and Store Options Preset Parameter Description Set Preview Size to Video Area Select to set capture image area as the entire video area desired format for DICOM prints Dicom Store with Title Bar Check box to select Store Dual as Dicom Only Select to always store dual images as a DICOM secondary capture store rather than Raw DICOM Store Multiframe for Sec Capture Loops Select this if you want the CINE loop stored as secondary capture Review Screen View Images as Raw Data Enable Smart Capture Area Check box to select Check box to select Table 16 20 Setup Preset Parameter Description
74. at the start point move the Trackball To fix the first caliper press Set The system displays a second active caliper To position the caliper at the end point move the Trackball To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the acceleration time in the Results Window See Heart Rate on page 7 68 for more information 11 20 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Vascular Measurements Peak Systole PS End Diastole ED or Minimum Diastole MD To calculate the peak systole end diastole or minimum diastole 1 Select PS ED or MD The system displays an active caliper with vertical and horizontal dotted lines To position the caliper at the measurement point move the Trackball To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the peak systole end diastole or minimum diastole in the Results Window ED PS or PS ED To calculate the End Diastole Peak Systole ratio or Peak Ratio Systole End Diastole ratio 1 Select ED PS or PS ED The system displays an active caliper with vertical and horizontal dotted lines 2 To position the caliper at end diastole ED or peak systole PS move the Trackball 3 To fix the measure point press Set The system displays a second active caliper 4 To position the second caliper at peak systole PS or end diastole ED move the Trackball 5 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the
75. available from GE Medical Systems if needed The equipment user is obligated to be familiar with these concerns and avoid conditions that could result in injury LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Precautions Patient Safety Related Hazards WARNING The concerns listed can seriously affect the safety of patients undergoing a diagnostic ultrasound examination Patient Always include proper identification with all patient data and identification verify the accuracy of the patient s name and ID numbers when entering such data Make sure correct patient ID is provided on all recorded data and hard copy prints Identification errors could result in an incorrect diagnosis Diagnostic Equipment malfunction or incorrect settings can result in information measurement errors or failure to detect details within the image The equipment user must become thoroughly familiar with the equipment operation in order to optimize its performance and recognize possible malfunctions Applications training is available through the local GE representative Added confidence in the equipment operation can be gained by establishing a quality assurance program LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 2 5 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Related Hazards continued Mechanical hazards _ 2 ectical E A Hazard CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION 2 6 The use of damaged probes can result in injury or increased risk of infec
76. causing radio frequency interference in violation of the FCC regulations All types of electronic equipment may characteristically cause electromagnetic interference with other equipment either transmitted through air or connecting cables The term EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility indicates the capability of equipment to curb electromagnetic influence from other equipment and at the same time not affect other equipment with similar electromagnetic radiation from itself LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 2 13 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety EMC Performance continued CAUTION 2 14 Proper installation following the service manual is required in order to achieve the full EMC performance of the product The product must be installed as stipulated in 4 2 Notice upon Installation of Product In case of issues related to EMC please call your service personnel The manufacturer is not responsible for any interference caused by using other than recommended interconnect cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment Do not use devices which intentionally transmit RF signals cellular phones transceivers or radio controlled products other than those supplied by GE wireless microphone for example unless intended for use with this system in the vicinity of this equipment as it may cause performance outsid
77. circumference in the Results Window HINTS Before you complete the ellipse measurement To erase the line bit by bit back from its current point move the Trackball or adjust the Ellipse control downward To erase the dotted line but not the trace caliper press Clear once To clear the trace caliper and the current data measured press Clear twice LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 17 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Head Circumference HC continued Two distances HINTS 9 18 1 Select HC an active caliper displays If necessary select HC until Trace is displayed above the key To make the first distance measurement a To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball b To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper c To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points if preset accordingly d To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the distance value in the Results Window After the first measurement the system displays an active caliper To make the second distance measurement repeat steps a d above The system displays the abdominal circumference in the Results Window Before you complete a measurement press Set e To toggle between active calipers press Measure To erase the second caliper and the current d
78. cm Meas Transf Measure Moue Fetus Compare Exit start e Figure 9 17 Worksheet Display with Fetus Compare OB GYN To Show Fetal Trending for Multiple Fetuses When you have data for more than one exam you can show fetal trending and compare fetuses on one graph To view fetal trending for multiple fetuses 1 Select Graph Display 2 Select Fetus Compare 3 Select Plot Both NOTE graph display LMP 91 23 2003 BBT Origin LMP Fetus All FetusPos lt Measurement Type gt cm BPD Hadlock 2SD 28D 31w6d 15 PRESENT A You can only view fetal trending for multiple fetuses in single GA 31w6d EDD LMP 10 30 2003 PLAC BPD Hadlock Figure 9 18 Multigestation Fetal Growth Curve Graph The symbol key for fetal trending and multiple fetuses is shown at the bottom of the graph 9 64 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 GYN Measurements GYN Measurements Introduction The Gynecology exam category includes the following three studies e Generic This study is common to all exam categories See Generic Measurements on page 7 57 for more information e General Gynecology This study includes uterine ovarian ovarian follicle and endometrium measurements e OB GYN Vessel This study includes the following vessels uterine ovarian umbilical middle cerebral artery aorta placenta and descending aorta NOTE The calculation formulas are listed
79. describing the investigator s recommended clinical procedures This section provides information about taking measurements and describes calculations available in each mode It includes the following topics Exam workflow e Location of measurement controls e Description of calipers e List of generic measurements e General information about taking measurements e Mode Measurements Step by step instructions for taking specific measurements organized by mode e Basic steps to view and edit worksheets LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Exam workflow Introduction For each patient the system organizes information by exam category study and measurement The definitions of these terms are as follows e Exam Category the highest level of an ultrasound exam Categories include the following e Abdomen e Obstetrics e Gynecology e Cardiology e Vascular e Urology e Small Parts e Pediatrics e Study Preset a logical grouping of measurements After you choose an exam category the system allows you to select a study For example when you choose the Obstetrics exam category you can choose one of the following studies e Generic e OB 1 OB 2 3 e OB General e Fetal Heart e OB GYN Vessel e Measurement the measurements and calculations needed to analyze an item of anatomy For example a femur length is a measurement A measurement can include several pieces of measureme
80. desired vessel name from the Selection Menu Selected vessel measurements are automatically assigned with the Auto Vascular calculation The results are then displayed in the Results Window 8 GE Medical Systems MI0 4 Tis 0 1 10Lb RS 09 03 03 3 02 59 PM I 99103103 3 01 19 PM adm b Carotid Veoculer as Rt Prox CCAPS 0 00 cm a MHz Generic Rt Prox CCAED 0 00 cm s 9 9 Carotid m Rt Prox CCA HR 78 20 BPM J 0 D 4 0 cm CCA DR 81 Prox Mid Dist FR 57 Hz AO 100 Rt Lt PS ED MD RI PW Fra 5 0 MHz Gn 16 AO 100 PRF 3 9 kHz WF 216 Hz SV 3 DR 36 VOLUME FLOW SVD 1 3 cm TAMEAN Menu tel Delete Z h jaina prena E n waxy Active en A Measure Cycle Select Angle Correct Side Rt Cursor Select ri lt P Mode PW PS ED MD PS ED start e M amp A Figure 11 6 Assigned Vessel NOTE When you want to cancel the assignment you can use the Cancel Transfer Selection Menu key See Cancel Transfer on page 11 7 for more information Vascular Measurements Auto Vascular Calculation continued During the course of an exam the cardiac cycle may be indicated between two yellow bars the peak trace and the mean trace may appear in green calculation indicators appear on the spectral trace as a caliper identifier these vary depending on the selected calculation in the Results Window The right most most complete cycle is typically chosen to be the selected cardiac cycle You can select a diffe
81. diagram to the right of the Tool list shows the measurement type In Figure 7 13 ellipse is selected and the diagram shows an ellipse LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Measurement and Calculation Setup Changing Measurements continued Connectivity Measure About Admin MEASUREMENT amp ANALYSIS M amp A Advanced Doppler OB Table Measurement menu Add measurement Add folder 2D x Delete measure and folder C MM ___ Factory Edit Calc Dop r Measurement AC Hadlock jap ellipse gt 2D ellipse Tool _ Parameter a peee ee eresien eoa AC Circumference cm Aver GA Calculated Week GP Calculated Figure 7 13 Measurement amp Analysis screen Change measurements 1 Tool field select the default tool used to make the measurement LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 27 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Adding Folders and Measurements Adding a folder 7 28 When you add a folder it can be a study or a measurement folder that includes related measurements 1 Inthe Selection menu select the study or folder where you want to add the folder 2 In the Measurement menu section select Add folder e Ifyou select Blank the system adds a folder with a name such as USERDEFS1 It is listed in the Selection menu See Figure 7 15 e Ifyou want to use an existing folder select Insert and t
82. e Soft click hard keys with mechanical and acoustic feedback Special function keys with additional perceptible marks Two programmable User Define keys e Back Lit keys Freeze only Electrical Power AC Adapter LBAC 66 Voltage 100 240 Vac Frequency 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 120W max e Current 1 2 Ampere max AC Adapter GE 90W Voltage 100 240 Vac e Frequency 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 108W max Current 1 08 Ampere max Console Design 1 Active Probe Port Probe cable management Monitor e High performance TFT LCD 10 4 display Opening angle adjustment 160 maximum Standby function with pre selectable timer for protection 18 2 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Data LOGIQ Book Features Specifications continued Table 18 2 System Overview Applications e Abdominal e Obstetrical e Gynecological Cardiac e Urological e Small parts thyroid and prostate e Pediatric e Vascular Standard Features e Standard CINE Memory Auto Spectrum Optimization and Auto Color Optimization e ACE e Built in patient archive with images patient information e Auto Doppler Calculation e Cardiac Calcs OB Calcs e Fetal Trending e Multi gestational Calcs Gynecological Calcs e Urological Calcs e Renal Calcs e Automatic Optimization Auto Tissue Optimization Transducer Types e Electr
83. end diastole peak systole and ED PS or PS ED ratio in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 11 21 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Vascular Pulsatility Index Pl See Pulsatility Index PIY on page 7 70 for more information S D or D S Ratio See PS ED or ED PS Ratio on page 7 72 for more information Resistive Index RI See Resistive Index RIY on page 7 71 for more information TAMAX See TAMAX and TAMEAN on page 7 46 for more information 11 22 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 The vascular worksheet is structured to automatically display vascular measurements made at specific anatomical sites The worksheet can also display an average last maximum or minimum value of the latest three measurements Calculated ratios are automatically summarized and displayed To view the Vascular Worksheet 1 Press Measure 2 Select Worksheet Display The system displays the worksheet 09 03 03 3 13 58 PM 8 GE Medical Systems MI0 6 Tis 0 0 3C RS 6 99103103 3 12 14 PM adm b tact Carotid Right Left 2 Method 2 Method Prox CCA PS HR Prox ICA PS ED Carotid MD LEA LEY AT TCD UEA UEY Meas Transf Measure Page Change Mode PW a Vessel Wksheet Vessel Summary Generic Intrav Ratio Delete Value Exit start e Figure 11 10 Vascular Worksheet Example Vascular To view the Vascular Worksheet continued 11 24 HINTS Only measured p
84. field of view decrease the sector angle when you need to have a faster frame rate as in fetal heart Changing the sector angle affects the frame rate The narrower the sector angle the faster the frame rate Changing the sector angle may change the TI and or MI Observe the output display for possible effects Flips the image 180 degrees left right To flip the image 180 degrees press Reverse Linear probes do not rotate The image rotates in 180 degrees left right Reverse settings vary by probe and application Reverse settings are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Used for anatomical correctness When reading a reverse image be careful to observe the probe orientation to avoid possible confusion over scan direction or left right image reversal LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing B Mode Dynamic Range Compression Description Adjusting Values Benefits Affect on other controls Dynamic Range controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast The Dynamic Range control name changes to Compression on frozen images To increase decrease adjust Dynamic Range The settings cycle in 3dB steps from 30 dB to 120 dB The current value displays Dynamic Range values vary by probe application and frequency setting
85. for the calculation then the system assumes you want to start the calculation The system then uses the calculation for the next measurement LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Introduction Selecting a calculation continued If there is a measurement listed in the Results Window that has not been assigned a calculation to assign the measurement 1 2 Press Measure To select the measurement in the Results Window move the Trackball to the measurement The measurement is highlighted Press Set The system displays a list of applicable calculations For example if it is a distance measurement the list includes all distance calculations for the current study To select an item in the list move the Trackball to highlight the item and press Set The system assigns the calculation to the measurement Selecting a measurement in a different application While scanning a patient you may find that you want to measure an item that is not in the current application To select a calculation from a different application 1 2 To display studies for the current category press Measure On the Selection Menu select the application The system lists exam categories Select the application that has the calculation you want to make The system displays the Selection Menu for the selected exam category Select the study and the desired measurement After you complete the measurement to retu
86. future reference and comparison Contact a Service Engineer if the echogenic characteristics or shapes of the targets appear distorted LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 18 27 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 User Maintenance Gray Scale photography 18 28 Description Benefit Procedure NOTE Poor photography will cause loss of low level echoes and the lack of contrast between large amplitude echoes See Figure 18 1 for more information When photographic controls and film processors are properly adjusted weak echoes as well as strong echoes are accurately recorded on film 1 Adjust the camera according to the manufacturer s instructions until the hard copy and video display are equal 2 Scan the phantom and it s echogenic contrast targets 3 Make a hard copy photograph of the display and compare it to the image on the video monitor for contrast and weak echo display 4 Document all results for future reference and comparison Contact a Service Engineer if camera cannot duplicate what is on the image monitor Optimization of brightness contrast controls on the display monitor is imperative in order to make sure that the hardcopy and monitor look alike The display monitor is adjusted first The hardcopy camera or printer is adjusted to match the display monitor LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Quality Assurance Setting up a Record Keeping System Preparation The following is
87. image when scanning the phantom exactly as before should be recorded and compared to the baseline When a matching image is obtained it can be assumed that the system performance has not degraded from the baseline If a significant difference between the baseline and periodic check is noted double check the system setup and repeat the test If the difference between the baseline and periodic check persists contact a local Service Representative Failing to reproduce the control settings as in the baselines will introduce errors in the data and potentially invalidate the results 18 18 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Quality Assurance Results Lack of standardization among test instruments the wide range of acceptance criteria and incomplete knowledge regarding the significance of certain performance parameters prohibit the establishment of absolute performance criteria for these tests Quality Assurance Evaluation results should be compared to previously recorded results Performance trends can then be detected Unacceptable performance or diminishing trends should be identified for maintenance or repair before a malfunction or inappropriate diagnosis occurs The user should determine the best method for recording and archiving the baseline and periodic checks In most cases the choice is hard copy It is important to maintain good consistent records for inspections that may arise as well as to
88. image quality Always optimize gain before increasing the Power Output LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 7 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Focus Description Adjusting NOTE NOTE Values Benefits Affect on other controls Bioeffects 5 8 Increases the number of focal zones or moves the focal zone s so that you can tighten up the beam for a specific area A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position s appears on the right edge of the image To increase decrease the number of focal zones adjust Focus Number Focus Position and Focus Number share the same control Press the control to toggle between Focus Position and Focus Number To move the focal zone to the near far field adjust Focus Position You can reverse how the Focus control functions on the Utility gt System gt General page Each adjustment cycles you to the next setting Eight focal zones over twelve focal positions In B Flow only one focus zone Focus zone number and position vary depending on the depth zoom probe application and frequency setting selected Focal zone number values are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calc or New Patient Focus optimizes the image by increasing the resolution for a specific area Changing the focal number affects the frame rate The greater number of focal zones the slower the frame rate Changi
89. is able to change the contents of the Start Menu via the Utility gt Admin gt Start Menu preset menu 6 18 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Electronic Documentation Electronic Documentation Documentation Distribution Documentation is being provided via Clinical Release Notes supplied on paper Quick Guide supplied on paper Online Help on the Ultrasound Scanner via F1 CD ROM You can view user documentation on a PC or on the Ultrasound Scanner via the Customer Documentation CD ROM which includes e Basic User Manual e Advanced Reference Manual e Quick Guide e Quick Card s e Release Notes and Workarounds e Basic Service Manual NOTE All user documentation is provided in multiple languages if translations were available at the time of CD publication LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 6 19 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Scanning Display Functions Using Online Help Via F1 Online Help is available via the F1 key After pressing F1 Help appears The Help screen is divided into three sections navigational tools on the top left portion of the screen Hide Back Forward help book navigational tools on the left portion of the screen Contents Index Search Favorites and the content portion on the right side of the screen where help topics are displayed NOTE If the cursor is lost while using Online Help press Alt F4 to exit or press F1 to activate the cursor Direction 2
90. it from the M amp A category list The system displays a hierarchical view of the exam category and the studies and folders in the category 6 In the hierarchical view select a study or folder 7 Inthe Modify Calcs column select the measurements that you want to the system to show for manual calcs for the selected study or folder 8 To save the changes select the Save button LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 39 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Mode Measurements B Mode Measurements Two basic measurements can be made in B Mode e Distance e Circumference and Area Ellipse or Trace Method NOTE The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze Distance measurement To make a distance measurement Press Measure once an active caliper displays Jutu To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball Set To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper oy Fd To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball O A dotted line connects the measurement points if preset accordingly Set To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the distance value in the Results Window oy P 7 40 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Mode Measurements Distance measurement conti
91. keyboard ole ae GE Medical Systems MI 0 4 Tis 0 1 3C RS 09 10 03 9 57 06 PM IE J09 10 03 9 56 41 PM adm 0x002 1 1 Gyn 96 GE Medical Systems GE Medical Systems 4 Images Report Female xam Date 10 09 2003 0 00 MIO4 Tad 1 SCRE PgUp Down i Changetemplate Retrieve Delete CAPS start W Figure 14 1 Report Menu To move the report page up down select the PgUp or PgyDown Selection Menu key Reports Storing the Report To store the report with the patient data select Store A pop up message appears stating Stored Successfully LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 14 3 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Retrieving the Report To retrieve the stored repot select Retrieve on the Selection Menu ee GE Medical Systems kala jane MI 0 08 Tis 0 0 3C F6 o8111103 10 09 52 AMadm 002 1 1 Neo Head z 96 GE Medical GE Medical Systems 4 Images Report Archived Reports 08 11 03 10 13 15 AM Female je EDD 0 SaveAs SignOff 5 ChangeTmpl Retrieve Print Figure 14 2 Report Retrieve A pop up menu appears Select the approrpiate archived report s and press Set To print the report select Print on the Selection Menu Report Template To change the template and image report select ChangeTmpl on the Selection Menu 98 GE Medical Systems MI 0 4 Tis 0 1 3C RS I J09 15 03 5 29 59 PM adm 999 1 1 Adult 96 GE Medical GE Medical Systems 4 Images Report Cardiology
92. mary Mina eee Perils fosa Vey Tee FF ja OCSI Figure 16 38 DICOM Verification Table 16 46 DICOM Verification Preset Parameter Description DICOM Verify Specify how often you want the system to ping the worklist server to update the database 16 68 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity DICOM Image Storage DICOM Image Storage allows the system to send or receive ultrasound images in a format that can be interpreted by PACS amin See Kamo Bien beng Sha inp a T imahe Keine es Mar ALTE thers a all Forks find dagen p ae wale tee 7 ja 7 7 Hegrishis iruge ores G Mie Faw Beta fF Baneri Een Pm am Figure 16 39 DICOM Image Storage Service Type Table 16 47 DICOM Image Storage Preset Parameter Description Reopen pr image Reopen per image Allow raw data Select to save data in both TruAccess raw data and DICOM format Clear to save in DICOM format only Color Support Select Mixed Gray or Color Max Framerate Select the maximum frame rate Full 25 or 30 Allow Multiframe Select to allow cine loop storage Compression Select the compression type None Rle or Jpeg Quality Set picture quality from 1 to 100 A low picture quality level allows high data compression while a high picture quality restrains the compression LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 69 Direction 2321062
93. must login with administrator privileges 1 2 TCPIP allows you to configure the Internet Protocol Services allows you to configure a service for example DICOM services such as printers worklist and other services such as video print and standard print from the list of supported services This means that the user can configure a device with the DICOM service s that particular device supports Buttons allows you to assign a pre configured output service or a set of output services to the Print keys on the control panel Dataflow allows you to adjust the settings of the selected dataflow and associated services Selecting a dataflow customizes the ultrasound system to work according to the services associated with the selected dataflow Screens enables the configuration of tools related to patient management Tools enables formatting DICOM database or blank formatting and DICOM verification of removable media Views displays an overview of the connectivity architecture of the ultrasound system including devices and associated services It also allows you to verify connectivity Configure these screens from right to left starting with the Tcpip tab first NOTE The ultrasound system is pre configured for many services with default settings selected You can change these services and settings as needed 16 58 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity TCPIP
94. no ECG Select the number of seconds of CINE Loop storage no ECG The default is 3 seconds approximately 77 B W frames 97 Color Frames store Preview loop before When selected allows you to review cine loops before storage LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Presets System System Imaging Preset Menu continued Table 16 7 Cardiac Preset Parameter Description Time before heart cycle ms Sets the total storage time span of the cine loop in ECG mode Time after heart cycle ms Sets the total storage time span of the cine loop in ECG mode Time span of systole ms The default systolic time to enable synchronization of cine loops Table 16 8 Biopsy Guides Preset Parameter Description Show Center Line Displays center biopsy guideline Show Outer Lines Displays outer biopsy guidelines Enable 0 5cm markers Activates biopsy depth markers every 0 5cm Table 16 9 Image Control and Display Preset Parameter Description Horizontal Scale Select to display width markers TGC Display Select to display TGC curve PW Velocity Units in cm s Select to change scale on timeline from centimeters per second to meters per second Split screen full height display of linear images When selected while in split screen and using a linear probe the system clips the side
95. on the display If Cursor Line Display is Off the system erases the dotted line after you press Set and only the measurement calipers with a number or symbol are displayed For information about how to turn Cursor Line Display On or Off see Table 16 11 7 6 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 List of general measurements Introduction The following table shows the types of general measurements available when you press Measure but do not choose a specific calculation The type of measurement depends on the current scan mode and the number of times Measure is pressed Table 7 1 General Measurements by Mode If you press MODE Measure while frozen B and CF Doppler M Once e Distance Velocity Tissue depth Circumference and area ellipse Twice Circumference and area TAMAX TAMIN and Time interval trace TAMEAN Three times Two velocities Depth difference slope slope and time interval and time interval Four times Time interval NOTE The type of measurement repeats as you press Measure For example in M Mode when you press Measure the fourth time the Tissue depth measurement is available and so on LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations General Instructions You can take measurements in all modes and image formats including real time frozen or CINE After you select an exam category the avai
96. one of the following e Adjust the Fetus knob e In the Patient Data section move the Trackball to highlight the FetusNo field In the list of fetuses move the Trackball to select the fetus you want and press Set e To display data for multiple fetuses on the same graph select Fetus Compare Origin LMP LMP 93 02 2001 BBT 03 02 0020 GA 18w5d EDD LMP 12 07 2001 FetusNo B 2 FetusPos PLAC Measurement Type gt GA LMP cm HC Hadiock HC Hadlock 40 2SDi 2SD 18w5d 35 30 25 10 PRESENT AB Figure 9 16 Fetal Growth Curve Graph Fetus Compare The legend at the bottom of the graph shows the symbols and colors that represent each fetus LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 To compare multiple fetus data on a worksheet With multiple fetuses you can list and compare measurements of the fetuses on the worksheet Select Worksheet Display then select Fetus Compare When you select Fetus Compare the system lists the measurement results for each fetus on the Worksheet EN GE Medical Systems MI 0 33 TIs 0 1 3C RS 09 03 03 1 21 24 PM JF6 os103103 1 20 15 PM adm b GA LMP 31w6d 1 1 OB 283 Origin LMP LMP 01 23 2003 BBT GA 31w6d EDD GA 10 30 2003 Fetus Compare A c D CGA EDD CGA EFW 798 82 g 1056 g GS Tokyo 12 48 cm CRL Hadlock 11 07 cm CRL Osaka 7 30 cm BPD Hadlock 7 32 cm BPD Osaka 9 24 cm HC Hadlock 18 75 cm AC Hadlock 23 34 cm FL Hadlock 9 86 cm FL Osaka 8 09
97. or select To easily see which fields you can change or select move the Trackball As the cursor moves over a field that you can change or select the field is highlighted LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Overview Generic Measurements Generic Measurements Each exam category has a Generic study The Generic studies provide you quick access to measurements such as volume angle A B ratio and stenosis The particular measurements available in each Generic study vary depending on the exam category and the mode This section describes generic measurements organized by mode To access Generic studies 1 On the Control Panel press Measure 2 On the Selection Menu select the Generic folder Calculation formulas are available in the Advanced Reference Manual LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 57 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 B Mode Measurements In B Mode the Generic study includes the following measurements Stenosis e Volume Angle e AIB Ratio EN GE Medical Systems MI 0 4 Tis 0 2 3C RS Jo 02 10 02 12 14 25 eae Renal aint l I l l lB Abdominal as U Frq 4 0 MHz ceneric Ea 12 Bi Stenosis a Map A0 D 17 0 cm DR 81 FR 15 Hz Volume AO 80 Angle lt _ Mt Angie i 5O O O oO d 10 25 cm d1 0 00 cm Menu Delete ECG B Mode PiP Zoom Colorize Edge Enhance Jpdown Invert Focus Number iti Place the first point M amp A Figure 7 22 B Mode Generic Stu
98. page 7 36 for more information Moving the You may want to change where the Results Window is Results Window positioned on the monitor display There are two ways to move the Results Window 1 Move the pointer over the Move Results Window Icon and press Set Position the window in the desired location and press Set again to fix that position ES PS ED Figure 7 3 Results Window Icons a Move Results Window Icon b Minimize Results Window Icon 2 Rotate the Top Menu control for Move Res Win clockwise or counterclockwise The display can be moved into the following locations e Left Top e Right Top e Right Bottom e Left Bottom Minimizing the To minimize the Results Window move the pointer over the Results Window Minimize Results Window Icon and press Set See Figure 7 3 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 9 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Selecting a calculation 7 10 NOTE When you take measurements you can select the calculation before you take the measurement or after you take it For example in Obstetrics if you select the calculation before you take the measurement the estimated fetal age is displayed as you take the measurement If you select the calculation after you take the measurement the estimated fetal age is displayed after you complete the measurement After you take a measurement if you select a calculation and the measurement is not applicable
99. results Auto Optimize Improves imaging performance while reducing optimization time Available in B Mode and Doppler Mode Frequency Changes system parameters to best optimize for a particular patient type Gray Map Affects the presentation of B Mode information Choose the closest gray map prior to making other adjustments There is an interdependency between gray maps gain and dynamic range If you change a map revisit gain and dynamic range settings Dynamic Range Affects the amount of gray scale information displayed If you increase the gain you may want to decrease the Dynamic Range Edge Enhance Affects the amount of border crispness Frame Average Smooths the image by averaging frames Affects the amount of speckle reduction B Softener Affects the amount of lateral smoothing TGC Adjust TGC and keep Gain at a lower setting Focus Number Position The best focusing is at the focal zone location Put focal zone s at the area of interest Be conscious of where the focal zones are Focal zones must be moved to track at the center of the anatomy of interest Scan Area Sizes region of interest Adjust the Scan Area to the smallest reasonable size to maximize frame rate LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 5 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Depth Description Adjusting Values Benefits Affect on other controls Bioeffects HINTS 5 6 Depth controls the distance over which t
100. return to the previous Selection Menu screen If you select PV all selected parameters are turned off When you deselect PV the system returns to the previously selected calculation 09 03 03 2 56 03 PM 8 GE Medical Systems MI0 6 Tis 0 0 3C RS ox J09 03 03 2 56 03 PM adm b i 1 Carotid Vascular B b 1 Fra Mi Generic JA Carotid Map A D Prox Mid Dist DR Rt Lt FR AO CCA ICA BULB ECA VERT SUBC VOLUME FLOW Modify Auto Calcs py Cancel Transfer Save As Default Worksheet Display TAMEAH DR SVD 5 3 cm Menu Delete Active ms wre Measure Cycle Select Angle Correct Side Rt Cursor Select Mode Pw i lt gt start e M amp A Figure 11 5 Modify Auto Calculation Menu Page1 Vascular Naming format for vessels 11 10 When you want to measure a vessel on the Selection Menu you select the folder for the vessel Many vessel folders are labeled with an abbreviation The following table lists abbreviations used for naming vascular vessels Table 11 1 Vascular Vessel Abbreviations Com Femoral Acronym Name ACA Anterior Cerebral Artery AComA Anterior Communicating Artery ATA Anterior Tibial Artery ATV Anterior Tibial Vein Axill Axillary Artery Axill V Axillary Vein BA Basilar Artery or Brachial Artery Ba V Basilic Vein Br V Brachial Vein CCA Common Carotid Artery Ceph V Cephalic Vein CFV Common Femoral Vein CHA Common Hepatic Artery Common Femoral Artery CIA
101. s magnification interpolation for the output Trim Specify whether you want a trim box to be printed around each image on the film Yes or No Film Orientation Specify whether to print the image Portrait vertically or Landscape horizontally Film Size Specify the dimensions of the film size 8INx10IN 10INx12IN 10INx14IN or 11INx14IN Configuration Enter vendor specific image quality settings Information LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 71 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System DICOM Print continued Dicom Print E ih Dicom Print_05 V Enbe PY m mA N Hame icom Print_ A o o M el lene Farena fo Timeout po s Settings Densities Job Max Border Empty Image Min BLACK x WHITE Figure 16 42 DICOM Print Service Type Densities Table 16 49 Densities Preset Parameter Description Min Enter a number indicating the minimum density level of the film Max Enter a number indicating the maximum density level of the film Border Select to have the border area surrounding and between the images of the film Black or White Empty Image Select to have a Black or White empty image 16 72 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity DICOM Print continued Dicom Print mE 7 F Di Print_05 I Enable ety e M Hame icom Printi mace fo eee os sl AE Title Port Ho fo Tica fo Is
102. screen lists properties of the selected media Formatting removable media 1 Select the removable media from the Media list 2 Type aname for the removable media in the Label field NOTE Do not use the following characters for labelling 3 lt gt 3 Select Format Verifying removable media 1 Select the removable media from the Media list 2 Select Verify 16 100 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity Views Views shows you an overview of the Ultrasound system s connectivity architecture e The currently selected dataflow e All configured dataflows e The network structure tree e The configured buttons dataflows Views also allows you to verify service connectivity SP My Computer using Local Archive Int Ep mous ES my computer 3 28 11 41 bin Local Archive Int HD BS My Computer 3 28 17 41 Local Archive Int HD Figure 16 60 Connectivity Views Preset Menu LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 101 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Views continued Table 16 64 Views Preset Parameter Description Current Select to show the current dataflow hierarchy Dataflow Select to show all dataflows Network Select to show network structure tree Buttons Select to show configured buttons dataflows Config Select to go to the Services tab and configure this ser
103. select a specific measurement a On the graph display move the Trackball to the Measurement Type field and press Set The system displays a list of measurements b Move the Trackball to select the desired measurement and press Set The system displays the Fetal Growth Curve Graph for the selected measurement To scroll through all Fetal Growth Curve Graphs adjust the Graph Change knob To select the age To plot the fetus age the system allows you to use the to use gestational age GA from the LMP or to use the composite ultrasound age CUA To select adjust the Select GA knob The information in the left column changes between CUA and GA EDD and the data may change 9 48 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Fetal Growth Curve Graph continued To view a single or four graphs Origin EDD LMP Fetus A 1 FetusPos mm GS Tokyo 0 DEVIATION Week 10 Week mm BPD Osaka 100 1 5SD 2 0SD 2 08D 1 5SD s 33w3d 85 7mm 20 25 33 3S 40 PRESENT Week OB Graphs You can view either a single Fetal Growth Curve Graph or you can view four graphs at the same time To select each view press Single or Quad GA 33w3d EDD OPE 10 26 2002 PLAC mm CRL Osaka 70 1 5SD 2 0SD 2 0SD 1 5SD lt 60 50 40 30 20 10 Week mm HL Osaka 60 1 5SD 2 0SD 2 0SD 1 5SD 50 40 30 20 0 A 33w3d 54 6mm 15 20 25 30 35 8640 PRESENT Week Figure 9 6 Fetal
104. system displays a second active caliper 4 To position the second caliper at second pressure gradient point move the Trackball 5 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the two Vmax measurements and the Max PG in the Results Window Set the first caliper on Vmax and the second on Vg Automatic When you select Max PG if you previously measured and Calculation of calculated velocity in Doppler Mode the system automatically Max PG calculates Max PG from the Vmax and Vy measurements taken for velocity 7 74 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Generic Measurements Mean Pressure Gradient PG To measure Mean PG Mean Pressure Gradient 1 From the Doppler Generic Selection Menu select Max PG The system displays a trace caliper 2 To position the caliper at the beginning of the waveform Vmax move the Trackball 3 To fix the start point press Set The system displays a second active caliper 4 To trace the waveform from Vmax to Va move the Trackball 5 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays TAMAX and Mean PG in the Results Window If Trace Auto is selected the waveform is automatically traced after the second caliper is fixed If Trace Auto is not selected manually trace the desired portion of the waveform Automatic If velocity was previously measured and calculated in Doppler Calculation of Mode Mean PG is calculated from the velocity value
105. the system reboots the system screens are in Russian or Greek Change Regional Options Q You must restart your computer before the new settings will take effect Do you want to restart your computer now Figure 16 10 Restart System Prompt To set up Russian or Greek follow the procedure above EACH TIME software is reloaded on your system NOTE To have the settings take effect you MUST turn off the system and turn it back on To toggle between the Russian or Greek and English keyboards press the CTRL SHIFT keys at the same time LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 15 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System System System Imaging Preset Menu 16 16 The System System Imaging screen allows you to specify parameters for cine loop storage and display patient information key usage and image control and display Cine Loop Store Time span no ECG s P Preview loop before store M Time before heart cycle ms fi 0 Timne ater heart cycle ms fis Tine span of systole jms fico Biopsy Guides Show Center Line v Show Outer Lines F Enable 0 5cm markers Figure 16 11 PW Velocity Units in cm s Split screen full height display of linear images V Auto Invert on Linear Steer Ato Freeze 15 minutes image Parameter Size reboot required Show Cepboard System System Imaging Preset Menu Table 16 6 Cine Loop Store Preset Parameter Description s Time span
106. the OB Graph keys on the Selection Menu The monitor display shows the Fetal Growth Curve Graph Origin LMP LMP 92 02 2001 BBT 02 02 0020 GA 22w5d EDD LMP 11 09 2001 FetusNo 4 1 FetusPos PLAC lt Measurement Type gt cm FL Hadlock FL Hadlock 2SD 2SD GA LMP 22w5d FL 3 88 cm GA 22w3d 29 9 Figure 9 5 Fetal Growth Curve Graph 9 46 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Graphs Fetal Growth Curve Graph The horizontal axis shows the fetal age in weeks The system determines this age from the data on the Patient Data Entry screen The vertical axis shows one of the following e For measurements mm or cm e For ratios percent e For fetal weight grams The Fetal Growth Curve Graph shows the following information for the selected measurement e The normal growth curve e The standard deviations or relevant percentiles e The gestational age of the fetus using patient data vertical dotted line Using the current ultrasound measurement data where the fetus is on the growth curve The legend at the bottom of the graph shows the symbols and colors that indicate data for fetal trending Past and Present and multiple gestation Fetus LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 47 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Fetal Growth Curve Graph continued To select the To select which measurement you want to display on the Fetal measurement Growth Curve Graph do one of the following To
107. the image is frozen all Power Output is suspended Selecting a new probe unfreezes the image To freeze an image 1 Press Freeze The key backlights If you are in a mixed mode both screen formats stop immediately Deactivating Freeze restarts both modes and places a black bar on the trace to indicate the time discontinuity To reactivate the image 1 Press Freeze again NOTE Deactivating Freeze erases all measurements and calculations from the display but not from the worksheet Use the Trackball to start CINE after pressing Freeze LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 6 3 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Scanning Display Functions Freezing an Image Footswitch Option 6 4 NOTE You can also freeze the image via the footswitch To freeze an image 1 Step on the footswitch the realtime icon is removed from the monitor If you are in a mixed mode both screen formats stop immediately Deactivating Freeze restarts both modes and places a black bar on the trace to indicate the time discontinuity To reactivate the image 1 Press Freeze Deactivating Freeze erases all measurements and calculations from the display but not from the worksheet Use the Trackball to start CINE after pressing Freeze LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Post processing Freezing an Image You can use the following controls to process a frozen B Mode image Map Zoom Rotation Reverse Up
108. the local archive when exporting data Exporting Data To export an exam s to a compatible Ultrasound system 1 Format the removable media MOD or CD ROM Label the removable media Answer Yes OK to the messages 2 Press Patient Deselect any selected patient s in the search portion of the Patient screen Press More located at the lower right hand corner of the Patient menu 3 Select Export Specify the type of removable media MOD or CD ROM on the Export pop up Press OK Then please wait until the Patient menu is visible EXPORT TO Service 7 cancer Figure 15 5 Export Pop up Message 15 16 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Image Data Management Exporting Data continued 4 Inthe patient list at the bottom of the Patient menu select the patient s you want to export You can use Windows commands to select more than one patient To select a consecutive list of patients click the cursor on the first name move the cursor to the last name then press and hold down the Shifttright Set key to select all the names To select a non consecutive list of patients click the cursor at the first name move the cursor to the next name then press and hold down the Ctrl right Set key move the cursor to the next name then press and hold down the Ctrl right Set key again etc You can also search for patients via the Search key and string Or Select All from the Select All Copy
109. the patient database local shared or via a worklist broker DO NOT use the internal hard drive for long term image storage Daily backup is recommended External media storage CD DVD MOD as appropriate is recommended for image archive DICOM images are stored to external media storage devices separately from patient data which also needs to be backed up to a dedicated database formatted external media storage You need to set up a protocol for locating images stored to external storage media for easy recall GE Medical Systems IS NOT responsible for lost data if you do not follow suggested back up procedures GE Medical systems WILL NOT aid in the recovery of lost data Refer to the Customizing Your System chapter for instructions on seting up your system s connectivity LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 15 3 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Recording Images Adding Devices To add a destination device printer worklist server etc to this system see Chapter 16 To verify a DICOM device see Chapter 16 Adding a Dataflow To add a new dataflow to this system see Chapter 16 Adding Devices to a Print Button To add devices dataflows to a print button see Chapter 16 Formatting Removable Media To format removable media see Chapter 16 Using the DICOM Spooler To monitor control DICOM jobs press F4 You can view resend redirect and delete images from the DICOM spooler by selecting a job then specifying the
110. the screen matches the angle set on the guide otherwise the needle will not follow the displayed guidezone which could result in repeated biopsies or patient injury Although the multi angle guides are compatible with the Civco Ultrapro and Ultrapro II it is recommended the multi angle guides only be used with the Ultrapro II 17 25 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes and Biopsy Preparing the Biopsy Guide Attachment Convex Sector and Linear probes have optional biopsy guide attachments for each probe The guide consists of a non disposable bracket to attach to the probe disposable needle clip to attach to the bracket sheath gel sterile gel if necessary and disposable needle barrels The disposable needle barrels are available for a variety of needle sizes CAUTION Please refer to the manufacturer s instructions included in the biopsy kit 17 26 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing for a Biopsy Fixed Needle Guide Assembly Identify the appropriate biopsy guide bracket by matching the label on the bracket with the probe to be used Orient the bracket so that the needle clip attachment will be on the same side as the probe orientation mark ridge Figure 17 8 Probe Bracket Alignment 1 Probe Orientation Mark 2 Bracket Attach the biopsy bracket to the probe by sliding the bracket over the end of the probe until it clicks or locks in place Place an adequate amount of cou
111. the system you can use the print screen key to print to this printer LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System About Preset Menu System Presets The System About screen lists information about the system software General System Imaging System Measure BackupRestore Peripherals Software System Image Copyright 2002 General Electric Company ad Part 2307061 14 Software Yersion umber Software Part Number 2307080 Image Date ee Build view Shadow 112 i Build Date Thu May 02 03 34 22 2002 Patents by one or more of the U S or international patents Features ofthis product are covered by one of more pending patent applications and 5 935 074 T Figure 16 15 System About Preset Menu Table 16 22 Software Preset Parameter Description Software Version The current software version on this system Software Part Number The software part number Build View The software build view Build Date The software build date Preset Parameter Table 16 23 System Image Description Image Part Number The image part number Image Date The image date Table 16 24 Patents Preset Parameter Description Patents Lists system patents LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 16 33 Customizing Your System Overview 16 34 Imaging Presets Imaging scree
112. the type of media storage R or R W Image Settings Specify image parameters in this section Allow raw data Select to save data in both TruAccess raw and DICOM format Clear to save in DICOM format only Allow Multiframe Select to allow cineloop storage Max Framerate Select the maximum frame rate Full 25 or 30 Compression Select the compression type None Rle Jpeg or Lossless_Jpeg Quality Set picture quality from 1 to 100 A low picture quality level allows high data compression while a high picture quality uses less compression LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity DICOM Storage Commitment DICOM Storage Commitment provides acknowledgement from PACS that the study has been accepted into archive Dicom Storage Commitment Hame om Storage Commitment_01 IV Enable p Retry Sioa Max 0 AE Tite Interval 1 s Port Ho 0 os Timeout 10 s Associated l Storage Figure 16 45 DICOM Storage Commitment Service Type Table 16 52 DICOM Storage Commitment Preset Parameter Description Associated Storage This selection is based on the services entered by the user LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 75 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System DICOM Worklist DICOM Worklist provides a list of patients sorted by query parameters acer Whe tet fame Ehen Word h fat iiti Em
113. view e High resolution Compound scan Probe Intended Uses Capabilities and Features Illustration 10Lb RS Small Parts e Wide field of view e Peripheral Vascular e Slant scan e Wideband for B Mode resolution amp homogenity CFM Doppler sensitivity e Biopsy capability i12L Intraoperative e Low height I shaped micro LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 17 21 Probes and Biopsy Biopsy Special Concerns Precautions Concerning the Use of Biopsy Procedures WARNING Do not freeze the image during a biopsy procedure The image must be live to avoid a positioning error Biopsy guidezones are intended to assist the user in determining optimal probe placement and approximate the needle path However actual needle movement is likely to deviate from the guideline Always monitor the relative positions of the biopsy needle and the subject mass during the procedure CAUTION The use of biopsy devices and accessories that have not been evaluated for use with this equipment may not be compatible and could result in injury CAUTION The invasive nature of biopsy procedures requires proper preparation and technique to control infection and disease transmission Equipment must be cleaned as appropriate for the procedure prior to use e Follow the probe cleaning and disinfection procedures and precautions to properly prepare the probe e Follow the manufacturer s instructions for the cleaning of bio
114. without moving the probe The angle steer function only applies to linear probes To slant the linear image to the left right adjust Angle Steer Linear probes can be steered left 20 degrees center or right 20 degrees Angle Steer values are returned to factory or user preset value when you change Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Fine Angle Steer steers the Doppler cursor left right 10 or 20 degrees Provides a Doppler cursor angle suitable for linear probe orientation Beneficial in Vascular applications Activating angle steer may change the TI and or MI Observe the output display for possible effects LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing Color Flow Color Flow Line Density Description Adjusting Values Benefits Affect on other Optimizes the Color Flow frame rate or spatial resolution for the best possible color image To adjust the line density press Line Density Selection Menu key The current frame rate is shown on the Selection Menu Frame Rate Resolution values vary by Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs New Patient and Frequency Settings are returned to factory or user preset value when you change any of the above Fetal heartbeat adult cardiac applications and clinical Radiology applications require significantly higher frame rates High resolution is useful in situations where very small vessels are being imaged e g thyroid testic
115. 062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image PDI Power Doppler Imaging Mode Selection Menu Frequency Frame Average Angle Steer Packet Size PRF Color Map Threshold Wall Filter Figure 5 8 PDI Mode Selection Menu lt lt PDI Mode gt gt lt lt PDI Mode gt gt Line Density 1 Baseline Dynamic Range ACE OH Transparancy Map 0 Focus Position Power Output Spatial Filter 5 32 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Gain Description Adjusting Values Benefits Bioeffects Optimizing Color Flow Gain amplifies the overall strength of echoes processed in the Color Flow window or spectral Doppler timeline Gain values change depending on the probe and application they are not associated with a particular position of the button To decrease increase Gain adjust the dial to the left right Values vary by probe application and multi frequency setting Gain displays as dB Gain values are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs New Patient or Multi Frequency Allows you to control the amount of color within a vessel or to fill in or clean out spectral information Gain has no affect on Power Output However with increased Gain the output level can usually be reduced to produce an equivalent image quality PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency Description Adjusting Values Benefits Affect on ot
116. 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System DICOM Performed Procedure DICOM Performed Procedure provides an acknowledgement that a study has been performed 5 Jom Performed Procedure J z Figure 16 40 DICOM Performed Procedure Service Type 16 70 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity DICOM Print DICOM Print provides the ability to send or receive ultrasound image data to DICOM printers Dicom Print ullu O Se Name Dicom Print_02 IV Enable Max H mo arai fro ts AE Title SCP Port Ho 104 Tinieout po s Settings Densities Job Format Magnification Type Smoothing Type STANDARD 2 3 a NONE v no X Film Orientation Film Size Configuration Information PORTRAIT amxion SCALE sHaRPn Figure 16 41 DICOM Print Service Type Settings Table 16 48 Settings Preset Parameter Description Format Indicates how many prints to print per page for example 1 1 1 2 1 3 up to 5 5 Partial prints are displayed as one print job Magnification Type Specify how the printer magnifies the image to fit it onto the film Replicate Interpolated pixel are copies of the adjacent pixelsBilinear Interpolated pixels are created by bilinear interpolations between the adjacent pixelsCubic Interpolated pixels are created by cubic interpolations between the adjacent pixelsNone No interpolation Smoothing Type Specify the printer
117. 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Foot Length O 000 1 2 3 4 5 9 28 To measure foot length make one distance measurement Select Ft an active caliper displays To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the foot length in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Humerus Length OB Measurements and Calculations y Ry amp x2 To measure humerus length make one distance measurement VSS OFS CeOoee 1 Select HL an active caliper displays 2 To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball 3 To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper 4 To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points 5 To complete the measurement press Set Spinal Length SL LRS PF wh MoS SF KFS O06000 1 The system displays the humerus length in the Results Window To measure spinal length make one distance measurement Select SL an active caliper displays 2 To position the active caliper at the start poin
118. 1062 100 Rev 5 User Maintenance Footswitch Printer NOTE To clean the footswitch 1 Moisten a soft non abrasive folded cloth with a mild general purpose non abrasive soap and water solution 2 Wipe the external surfaces of the unit then dry with a soft clean cloth To clean the printer 1 Turn off the power If possible disconnect the power cord 2 Wipe the external surfaces of the unit with a soft clean dry cloth 3 Remove stubborn stains with a cloth lightly dampened with a mild detergent solution Never use strong solvents such as thinner or benzine or abrasive cleansers because they will damage the cabinet No further maintenance such as lubrication is required To clean the surface of the print head 1 Run the cleaning sheet provided with the printer through the printer For more information see the Printer s Operator Manual Other Peripheral Maintenance 18 12 Refer to the peripheral manuals for more information LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Care and Maintenance Other Maintenance Replacing illuminated key caps lamps Contact a local Service Representative when a key cap or lamp needs to be replaced LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 18 13 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 User Maintenance Quality Assurance Introduction A good Quality Assurance Evaluation program consists of periodic systematic actions that provide the user with adequat
119. 11 cm s Fra 66 0 MHz Gn 50 amp Generic Vel 0 00 cm s EVA 1 3 General Gynecology lan Map C0 z D 10 0 cm Prox Mid Dist DR 81 Rt Lt FR 22 Hz AO 100 Ao Umbilical Placenta Desc Aorta Uterine MCA Ovarian HR Pw Modify Auto Calcs Ak 0 MHz n Cancel Transfer AO 100 Worksheet Display ee a a SV 4 DR 36 SVD 5 8 cm Menu Delete Active Measure Cycle Select Angle Correct Side Rt Fetus Cursor Select HR lt gt Mode PW start ws Place the velocity point M amp A Figure 9 20 Doppler Mode General Gynecology study Chapter 10 Cardiology Describes how to perform cardiac measurements and calculations LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 10 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Cardiology This feature is not available at this time 10 2 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Chapter 11 Vascular Describes how to perform Vascular measurements and calculations LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 11 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Vascular Vascular Exam Preparation Introduction Measurements and calculations derived from ultrasound images are intended to supplement other clinical procedures available to the attending physician The accuracy of measurements is not only determined by the system accuracy but also by use of proper medical protocols by the user When appropriate be sure to note any protocols associated with a particular measurement or calculation Formulas and dat
120. 21062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Dataflow overview The dataflow overview displays a three level structure tree showing the following information e A list of the dataflows configured Level 1 e The network devices Level 2 e The services associated to the dataflows Level 3 3 Ho Archive Local Archive Int HD Local Archive MOD Local Archive nt HDMOD E S My Computer 3 28 125 40 Local Archive Int HI Worklist Local Archive DICOR WorklistRemote Archive DIC Raw DICOM MOD DICOM MOD Figure 16 62 Connectivity Views Dataflows 16 104 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity Network overview The network overview displays a three level structure tree showing the following information e The network Level 1 e Connected devices Level 2 e The services configured for each device Level 3 The Network EP my Computer 3 28 17 41 YD Pe Dicom mo350 R E Pure nicom co R amp Pure DICOM MOD350 R W i GQ Pe nicom co rw E Raw picom sF co Rw YD Raw nicom mF mon350 gt CopyToWflow_01 GY Read MAC EP upto6 GP Color Videorrint A BW VideoPrint J VCR RecordPause Figure 16 63 Connectivity Views Network View LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 105 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Buttons overview The buttons overview displays a three level structure tree showing the following infor
121. 321062 100 gt Hide Back Forward Contents Index Search Favorites F MANUAL Publications Direction 2321062 100 Rev 1 Cie LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Online Help fe Figure 6 7 Opening Help Screen 6 20 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Navigating through the Help Book Electronic Documentation Online Help is organized like a manual with individual chapters sections and pages Click on the plus sign next to MANUAL to open up the book Click on the plus sign next to the chapter you want to view to open up that chapter Click on the plus sign next to the chapter you want to view to open up that section Open up the page to view that page s information B HTML Help ul gt Introduction Safety Preparing the System for Use Preparing for an Exam Optimizing the Image Scanning Display Functions General Measurements and Calculations Abdomen and Small Parts OB GYN Chapter 10 Cardiology Chapter 11 Vascular Chapter 12 Urology Chapter 13 Pediatrics Chapter 14 Report Generation Chapter 15 Recording Images E QQ Chapter 16 Customizing Your System E Preset Overview B Q9 Presets E Ly System Presets System General Preset Menu E System System Imaging Preset Menu B System System Measure Preset Menu 5 as System Backup and Restore Preset Menu p a a a l Backup procedure patient and report data 1
122. 3D scan press R the right split screen key You can also press Freeze but then you need to also press the 3D key to obtain the final render Adjust the 3D dataset brightness with B Mode or Color Flow Mode Gain Use Colorize to change the color of the active dataset Use Zoom to increase the zoom factor of the active dataset 1 2 NOTE 3 4 5 NOTE 6 NOTE 3D Notes 5 60 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Manipulating the Volume of Interest Imagine you are able to manipulate the 3D volume of interest VOI in your hand The 3D VOI is a tangible anatomical object that you can see and manipulate easily using the Trackball and Set control panel keys Practice positioning the pointer at different places within the 3D VOI Highlight different colors white red yellow or green Press Set to select a VOI for manipulation Use the hand to manipulate the 3D VOI Rotating the 3D You can rotate it left to right or right to left You can rotate it VOI Left Right or forward backward Press right Set key when the white pointer Forward Backward finger is positioned on the white box Move the closed white hand to manipulate the 3D VOI Tiwu eshoid 20 Figure 5 11 Manipulating the 3D Volume of Interest White Hand Moving Through You can move through the 3D VOI using the red hand Press the 3D VOI Set when the red pointer finger is positioned on the red box Move the closed red hand to
123. 4 Apartado 4094 TLX 22804 P 4002 PORTO CODEX GE VNIIEM_ TEL 7 095 956 7037 Mantulinskaya UI 5A FAX 7 502 220 32 59 123100 MOSCOW TLX 613020 GEMED SU GE Medical Systems Espa a TEL 900 95 3349 toll free Hierro 1 Arturo Gimeno FAX 34 1 675 3364 Poligono Industrial TLX 22384 A B GEMDE E 28850 TORREJON DE ARDOZ GE Medical Systems TEL 020 795 433 toll free PO BOX 1243 FAX 46 87 51 30 90 S 16428 KISTA TLX 12228 CGRSWES GE Medical Systems Schweiz AG TEL 155 5306 toll free Sternmattweg 1 FAX 41 41 421859 CH 6010 KRIENS GE Medical Systems Turkiye A S TEL 90 212 75 5552 Mevluk Pehliran Sodak FAX 90 212 211 2571 Yilmaz Han No 24 Kat 1 Gayretteppe ISTANBUL LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Contact Information Contacting GE Medical Systems Ultrasound continued UNITED KINGDOM GE Medical Systems TEL 0800 89 7905 toll free Coolidge House FAX 44 753 696067 352 Buckingham Avenue SLOUGH Berkshire SL1 4ER OTHER NO TOLL FREE TEL international code 33 1 39 20 0007 COUNTRIES Manufacturer GE Medical System China Co Ltd No 19 Changjiang Road WuxXi National Hi Tech Development Zone Jiangsu P R China 214028 TEL 86 510 5225888 FAX 86 510 5226688 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 1 11 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Introduction Manual Content How This Book is Organized The LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual is organized to provide the information needed to per
124. 5 12 6 12 7 thyroid measurements 8 17 Speakers location 3 37 Spinal Length SL 9 29 Splenic measurements 12 5 12 6 12 7 Start OB exam 9 4 Studies generic 7 57 OB 8 3 9 7 OB GYN vessels 9 35 Study definition 7 3 how to add 7 28 how to delete 7 35 organizing 7 24 System acclimation time 3 24 environmental requirements 3 4 power down 3 29 standby mode 3 28 system options 16 114 System Admin Admin screen 16 114 System cabinet 18 11 System data features 18 2 System presets 16 4 System setup console 3 5 T TAD transverse abdominal diameter 9 37 TAMAX Doppler measurement 7 47 7 48 Doppler measurements 7 46 TCD transverse cerebellar diameter 9 37 TCPIP Connectivity 16 59 Thorax transverse diameter ThD 9 32 Thyroid measurements 8 17 Tibia length 9 33 Time interval Doppler measurement 7 50 Doppler measurements 7 49 M Mode measurement 7 52 Tissue depth LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 M Mode measurement 7 57 Tools Connectivity 16 99 Trace measurement general 7 44 Transverse abdominal diameter TAD 9 37 Transverse cerebellar diameter TCD 9 37 U Ulna length 9 33 Ultrasound age selecting on OB worksheet 9 41 user IDs defining 16 110 Users Admin screen 16 110 Uterine cavity amniotic fluid index 9 19 Uterus measurements 9 73 Utility function changing measur
125. 5 OB GYN To select OB GYN vessel measurements OB GYN Vessel measurements use the auto sequence feature With this feature when you select a folder for the vessel you want to measure the system automatically starts the first measurement It then continues with each of the other measurements in that study 1 Select the folder for the vessel you want to measure The system shows all the measurements for that vessel The caliper for the first measurement is automatically displayed 2 Make the measurement After you complete each measurement the system starts the next measurement After the last measurement is complete the system returns to the OB GYN Vessel Selection Menu Your system is set up to show the measurements that you usually make for each vessel To make a measurement that is not shown for the selected vessel 1 Select the folder for the vessel you want to measure 2 Select Show All The system display all possible vessel measurements 3 Select the desired measurement The following pages describe the steps to make each specific measurement in the OB GYN Vessel study 9 36 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Acceleration Acceleration Time AT OB Measurements and Calculations Select Accel The system displays an active caliper with vertical and horizontal dotted lines To position the caliper at the onset of systole move the Trackball To fix the measure point press S
126. 529 Cannot be used in operating room environment Type BF Applied Part man in the box Beside the probe connector n symbol is in accordance with IEC 878 R 02 03 ATTENTION Consult Various accompanying documents is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label CAUTION Dangerous voltage the Various lightning flash with arrowhead is used to indicate electric shock hazards ON indicates the power on position See Figure 3 19 for location of the power switch information CAUTION This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply Standby indicates the power standby position of the power switch CAUTION This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply Protective Earth indicates the Inside of AC adapter D protective earth grounding terminal 2 10 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Table 2 2 Label Icons Safety Precautions Label icon Purpose Meaning Location NRTL Listing and Certification Mark is used to designate conformance to nationally recognized product safety standards The Mark bears the name and or logo of the testing laboratory product category safety standard to which conformity is assessed and a control number Bottom LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 R
127. 9 1954 F 08 28 2002 Figure 4 3 Patient Search Key 3 The appropriate patient is displayed If patient information needs to be edited or the exam category changed use the New Exam feature Pressing New Exam allows modification of the Patient Screen without erasing accumulated patient images measurements annotations calculations and worksheets LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 4 7 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing for an Exam Changing Patient Information or an Exam continued 4 5 4 8 To have the database shown in its entirety Backspace on the Search string and all patient names appear Press Register to register the new exam A new exam is automatically created on that patient unless an exam already exists on that day for that patient If an exam already exists for that patient the following warning is displayed A warning An exam already exists for this date Reuse existing Ho Figure 4 4 Dialog Box Select Yes to reuse the existing data Select No to create a new exam for the patient To display the patient information on the title bar press the Esc key or the B Mode key Select the Preset and appropriate probe Selection Menu keys if necessary LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Beginning an Exam User Defined Application Presets 1 From the keyboard press the Preset key The Probe screen appears 10Lb RS Application Prese
128. AX and Mean TAMEAN For preset location See M amp A Advanced Preset on page 7 36 for more information To auto trace TAMAX or TAMEAN e Press Measure twice an active caliper with a vertical dotted line displays To position the caliper at the trace start point in the Doppler spectrum move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set To position the vertical caliper at the end point move the Trackball To complete the measurement press Set The system automatically fixes both calipers and traces the maximum value between the two points The system displays this value in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Mode Measurements Slope and time interval To measure two velocity values the time interval sec and slope m s Press Measure three times an active caliper with vertical and horizontal dotted lines displays To position the caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second caliper at the end point move the Trackball To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the two peak end point velocities the time interval and the slope in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 49 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Time interval To measure a hori
129. Admin screen has the following sections Users allows you to define user IDs specify operator s registration operator s rights and registration of staff related to an examination for example referral doctors and sonographers Logon defines logon procedures System Administration lists all the options implemented in the system Key Configuration allows you to program function keys to your preferences Start Menu allows the Field Engineer to customize the start menu LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 109 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Users The Users screen allows you to define user IDs It also allows you to specify operators registration operator s rights setting and registration of staff related to an examination for example referring and interpreting physicians Test user with admin rights Figure 16 65 Administrative System Admin Preset Menu 16 110 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Users continued System Administration Table 16 65 User List Preset Parameter Description User List Lists the user ID for operators and other staff defined in the system You can choose to display all user IDs or only those for one of the following specific groups Oper operatorRef referring physicianDiag diagnostic physician Table 16 66 Identity Preset Parameter Description Id
130. Body Pattern adjust the Ellipse control downward I Ellipse o gt 0 To toggle between active calipers press Measure 6 Set To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the gt circumference and area in the Results Window Q HINTS Before you complete the ellipse measurement e To erase the ellipse and the current data measured press Clear once The original caliper is displayed to restart the measurement e To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement press Clear a second time LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 43 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Circumference and area trace measurement MID HINTS 7 44 To trace the circumference of a portion of the anatomy and calculate its area Press Measure twice a trace caliper displays To position the trace caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the trace start point press Set The trace caliper changes to an active caliper To trace the measurement area move the Trackball around the anatomy A dotted line shows the traced area To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the circumference and the area in the Results Window Before you complete the trace measurement To erase the line bit by bit back from its current point move the Trackball or adjust the Ellipse control counterclockwise To erase the dotted line
131. Book Basic User Manual 1 7 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Introduction Contacting GE Medical Systems Ultrasound continued CANADA GE Medical Systems TEL 1 800 664 0732 Ultrasound Service Engineering 4855 W Electric Avenue Milwaukee WI 53219 Customer Answer Center TEL 1 262 524 5698 LATIN amp SOUTH GE Medical Systems TEL 1 305 735 2304 AMERICA Ultrasound Service Engineering 4855 W Electric Avenue Milwaukee WI 53219 Customer Answer Center TEL 1 262 524 5698 EUROPE GE Ultraschall TEL 0130 81 6370 toll free Deutschland GmbH amp Co KG TEL 49 212 28 02 207 Beethovenstrake 239 FAX 49 212 28 02 431 Postfach 11 05 60 D 42655 Solingen ASIA GEMS Asia TEL 65 6277 3512 On Line Center OLC Asia FAX 65 6272 3997 JAPAN GE Yokogawa Medical Systems TEL 0120 055 919 Customer Service Center FAX 81 426 48 2905 1 8 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Contact Information Contacting GE Medical Systems Ultrasound continued ARGENTINA AUSTRIA BELGIUM BRAZIL DENMARK FRANCE GERMANY GREECE ITALY LUXEMBOURG GEME S A TEL 1 639 1619 Miranda 5237 FAX 1 567 2678 Buenos Aires 1407 GE GesmbH Medical Systems Austria TEL 0660 8459 toll free Prinz Eugen Strasse 8 8 FAX 43 1 505 38 74 A 1040 WIEN TLX 136314 GE Medical Systems Benelux TEL 0 800 11733 toll free Gulkenrodestraat 3 FAX 32 0 3 320 12 59 B 2160 WOMMELGEM TLX 72722 GE Sistemas M dicos TE
132. CCA ratio you can specify which portion of the CCA vessel Prox mid distal is chosen You can override the selections on the Vessel summary The ICA CCA ratio is able to be configured for either systole or diastole The vertebral vessel also has systole and diastole selections In the summary page there is a box to select flow reversal for vertebral flows The choices are Ante Antegrade Retr Retrograde and Abs Absent To select the method Move cursor to the box and press Set After the pop up menu Blank Ante Retr Abs is displayed select from a menu of choices The selected choice is displayed in the column The box is independent of Left and Right Renal Artery Study For renal arteries you can calculate RENAL AORTIC ratio RAR based on peak systolic velocities You can combine the two renal summary pages and have a heading to separate the different measurements main renal intra renal You can scroll between the content The most commonly used the main renal artery is the default Lower Extremity Artery Study For the lower extremity artery you need an intra vessel ratio assessing pre vs stenotic velocities You can specify which ratio is stenotic pre The intra vessel ratio needs to be available for all vascular measurements This appears on the worksheet only if used LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 11 35 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Vascular Recording Worksheet 11 36 The worksheet
133. Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the keyboard toward the probe holder Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 35 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Disconnecting the Probe 3 36 Probes can be disconnected at any time However the probe should not be active when disconnecting the probe Press the connector locking lever down Pull the probe and connector straight out of the probe port Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the probe port and around the right side of the keyboard Ensure the cable is free Be sure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage box or a wall hanging unit Figure 3 28 Probe connection to LOGIQ Book LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes Transporting Probes When transporting a probe a long distance store it in its carrying case Storing the Probe It is recommended that all probes be stored in the provided carrying case or in the wall rack designed for probe storage e First place the probe connector into the carrying case e Carefully wind the cable into the carrying case e Carefully place the probe head into the carrying case DO NOT use excessive force or impact the probe head LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 37 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Operator Controls Control Panel Map
134. Carotid N Intravessel Ratio Select Vsteno PS ED Prox ICA PS ED Carotid MD LEA LEV AT TCD UEA UEY Meas Transf Measure Page Change Mode PW lt gt Vessel Wksheet Vessel Summary Generic Intrav Ratio Delete Value j 5 V start e Figure 11 15 Intravessel Pop up Window Vascular Intravessel ratio continued 2 Select the second velocity The second value and Result value are displayed in the window Intravessel Ratio Select Vprox 40 13 Clear Save Cancel Figure 11 16 Intravessel ratio one 3 Select the second velocity The second value and Result value are displayed in the window Intravessel Ratio Save result 40 13 731 86 1 27 Clear Save Cancel Figure 11 17 Intravessel ratio two e To save the Intravessel ratio to the Vessel Summary move the cursor to Save and press Set e To clear values move the cursor to Clear and press Set e To cancel and exit Intravessel ratio move the cursor to Cancel and press Set NOTE _ Intravessel Ratio is only displayed and saved in the Vessel Summary 11 32 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Vessel Summary The Vessel Summary is designed to automatically display measurements made at specific anatomical sites Calculated ratios are automatically summarized and displayed The Vessel Summary can be displayed at any time during the exam by selecting Vessel Summary from the Vascular Wo
135. Changing or adding measurement parameters continued Adding 4 Inthe Measurement section move the Trackball to an measurement empty line at the bottom of the Parameter list Press Set parameters The system adds a parameter with a name of Name See continued Figure 7 18 ae 8 GE Medical Systems MI0 4 Tls0 1 10Lb RS 09 04 03 4 16 16 PM F6 99104103 4 05 39 PM adm wel Thyroid Obstetrics MI Generic Connectivity Measure About Admin amp op 2 3 Bi AFi Moore MEASUREMENT amp ANALYSIS useRDEFS1 M amp A Advanced Doppler ERE USERDEFM1 Measurement menu USERDEFM2 Add measurement Add folder 2D 2 x Delete measure and folder C MM Factory Edit Calc Dop r Measurement Hame USERDEFM2 Tool 2D caliper v Parameter Tootresut Unit Precision Method O Hame Distance O Hame Time Figure 7 18 Adding a Parameter 5 To change the name of the Parameter move the Trackball to the Name and press Set twice Type a name for the parameter 7 34 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Measurement and Calculation Setup Deleting a Folder or Measurement NOTE You can only delete user defined folders or measurements You cannot delete default system folders or measurements 1 Select the folder or measurement in the Selection menu 2 Inthe Measurement menu section select the X next to Delete measure and study LOGIQ Book Basic User
136. Common lliac Artery CIV Common lliac Vein Com lliac A Common lliac Artery DFA Deep Femoral Artery DFV Deep Femoral Vein Dors Pedis Dorsalis Pedis DPA Dorsalis Pedis Artery ECA Exterior Carotid Artery EIA External Iliac Artery EIV External Iliac Vein FV Femoral Vein LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Vascular Measurements Table 11 1 Vascular Vessel Abbreviations Acronym Name GSV Greater Saphenous Vein ICA Internal Carotid Artery Transcranial Doppler ICA Interior Carotid Artery Carotid Artery IJV Internal Jugular Vein IMA Inferior Mesenteric Artery Inn Innominate IVC Inferior Vena Cava LSV Lesser Saphenous Vein MCA Middle Cerebral Artery Mcub V Median Cubital Vein Mid Hep V Middle Hepatic Vein MRA Main Renal Artery PCA Posterior Cerebral Artery PComA Posterior Communicating Artery Peron Peroneal POP Popliteal PTA Posterior Tibial Artery PTV Posterior Tibial Vein RA Radial Artery SMA Superior Mesenteric Artery SMV Superior Mesenteric Vein SUBC Subclavian Artery SUBC V Subclavian Vein SFA Superficial Femoral Artery TCD Transcranial Doppler TIPS Transjugular Intrahepatic Portosystemic Shunt UA Ulnar Artery VERT Vertebral Artery LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 11 11 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Vascular Auto Vascular Calculation Overview 11 12 Auto Vascular Calculation enables the LOGIQ Book to detect and identify a cardiac cycle It allows you to assign measurements
137. Customizing Your System Restore procedure patient data 16 26 CAUTION NOTE The restore procedure overwrites the existing database on the local hard drive Make sure to insert the correct CD Insert the Backup Restore CD into the CD RW drive On the keyboard press Utility Select System On the monitor display select Backup Restore The Backup Restore screen is displayed If you are not logged in with administrator privileges the Operator Login window is displayed Log on with administrator privileges Pe GS 5 Inthe Restore list select Patient Archive 6 Inthe Media field select the Backup Restore CD 7 Select Restore The system performs the restore As it proceeds status information is displayed on the Backup Restore screen LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Presets Backup and restore strategy user defined configurations In addition to generating a safety copy the backup restore function of the user defined configuration presets can be used to configure several LOGIQ Book systems with identical presets preset synchronization Preset synchronization The procedure for preset synchronization of several scanners is as follow 1 Make a backup of the user defined configurations on a removable media from a fully configured LOGIQ Book system 2 Restore user defined configurations from the removable media to another LOGIQ Book system you can restore all the user
138. D Ratio DIS Ratio HR Modify Auto Calcs Muuna T T E T Fra 2 5 MHz Abdomen M Renal 100 4 5 kHz 408 Hz 4 36 9 2 cm Menu Delete Active Measure Cycle Select Angle Correct CursorSelect A Mode PI MaxPG MeanPG S D Ratio start e M amp A Figure 7 26 Doppler Mode Generic Study NOTE The following instructions assume that you do the following 1 In the B Mode part of the display scan the anatomy you want to measure 2 Go to the Doppler Mode part of the display 3 Press Freeze General Measurements and Calculations Pulsatility Index Pl For auto trace 1 Select PI The system displays a caliper and a vertical dotted line 2 Position the caliper at the beginning of the waveform 3 To fix the start point press Set The system displays a second active caliper 4 Position the caliper at the end of the waveform 5 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays peak systole minimum diastole end diastole TAMAX and PI in the Results Window For manual trace 1 Select PI The system displays a trace caliper and a vertical dotted line 2 Position the caliper at the beginning of the waveform 3 To fix the start point press Set The system displays a second active caliper 4 Manually trace the entire waveform 5 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays peak systole minimum diastole end diastole TAMAX and PI in the Results Window 7 70 LO
139. Dynamic Range levels are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs New Patient or Multi Frequency Dynamic Range is useful for optimizing tissue texture for different anatomy Dynamic Range should be adjusted so that the highest amplitude edges appear as white while lowest levels such as blood are just visible Dynamic range operates only in realtime not in Freeze CINE CINE Timeline or VCR playback and affects Gain LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 13 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Line Density Description Optimizes B Mode frame rate or spatial resolution for the best possible image Adjusting Press Line Density right to increase resolution or left to increase frame rate Values Varies by probe NOTE Not available in timeline Values vary by probe and application Line Density values are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Benefits A higher line density is useful in fetal heartbeat adult cardiac applications and in clinical Radiology applications requiring significantly higher frame rates A lower line density is useful in situations where very small vessels are being imaged e g thyroid testicles Affect on other Line density changes the vector density and frame rate controls Bioeffects Activating color flow line density may change the TI
140. E Dependent Triplex M PW Display Format Vert126 v Trace Sensitivity o Acoustic Output 100 PYICF Ratio 2 7 Spectral Averaging Medium z Time Resolution 2 x Auto Calcs Trace Direction General B o PDL M Pw HAR Preset Probe Carotid 10LB RS Carotid All Probes Imaging General Carotid 10LB RS Imagir Figure 16 21 General parameters 16 38 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Annotations Libraries Presets Annotations Libraries Presets Overview Annotation screens allow you to specify annotation text and pointer options to define annotation libraries and assign annotation libraries to applications Annotations Libraries Libraries Preset Menu On the Annotations Libraries tab you can change and create annotation libraries An annotation library is a list of annotations that are associated with a specific application The annotations are listed in the library in the order in which they display on the Selection Menu For each library you can define two Selection Menu displays of annotations Page1 and Page2 with 15 annotations on each Selection Menu Libraries Annotations Applications New Library Library Prostate 7 Delete User Defined Library Periph Zone iransitionaizo apex Paging Copy from Existing Sem Vesicle Fibromusc Strom Base fras Bladder entraina flos Siro Rectum frewa fag fit o Page2 5 Chamber Dist Mid Paging AA AAO Right Lower Acetab
141. GE Medical Systems MI 0 4 Tis 0 1 10Lb RS 09 02 03 9 16 08 AM JO o9102103 9 16 08 AM 1 1 Carotid GF B Fra Gn E A Map D DR FR AO 345 795 6 0 13 9 s Menu Delete Active Frequency Grey Map Dynamic Range Rejection Focus Position lt A gt v Colorize Edge Enhance Updownlnvert Focus Humber Figure 5 1 B Mode Display Optimizing B Mode Typical B Mode Exam Protocol A typical examination using B Mode might proceed Table 5 1 Typical B Mode Exam Step Instructions 1 Record exam related patient information Verify system setup probes and presets 2 Position the patient and the console for optimum operator and patient comfort Perform the scan Add important data to the image annotations and measurements Record results print hard copies CINE review optimize image capture and VCR recording 3 Complete the study by collecting all the data LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 3 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image B Mode Selection Menu Frequency Grey Map Dynamic Range Rejection Focus Position Colorize Edge Enhance Updowninvert Focus Number Figure 5 2 B Mode Selection Menu FrameAverage 2 Biopsy Hone Line Density 1 Focus Width Middle B Softner High Power Output 100 Suppression 0 5 4 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing B Mode B Mode Scanning Hints HINTS These B Mode controls produce the following
142. GIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Resistive Index RI Generic Measurements From the Doppler Generic Selection Menu select RI The system displays an active caliper with vertical and horizontal dotted lines To position the caliper at the peak systolic velocity move the Trackball To fix the measure point press Set The system displays a second active caliper To position the second caliper at the end diastolic velocity move the Trackball To complete the measurement press Set The system displays PS ED and RI in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 71 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations PS ED or ED PS Ratio 7 72 To calculate the Peak Systole End Diastole ratio or End Diastole Peak Systole ratio 1 Select PS ED or ED PS The system displays an active caliper with vertical and horizontal dotted lines To position the caliper at peak systole PS or end diastole ED move the Trackball To fix the measure point press Set The system displays a second active caliper To position the second caliper at end diastole ED or peak systole PS move the Trackball To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the peak systole end diastole and PS ED or ED PS ratio in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 AIB Ratio Velocity Time Acceleration Generic Measureme
143. IP address Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask address NOTE The Subnet Mask is an IP address filter that eliminates communication messages from network devices of no interest to your system Default Gateway Type the default gateway address Table 16 42 Remote Archive Setup Preset Parameter Description Remote Archive IP Addr Remote Archive Name Type the IP Address of the remote archive device Type the name of the remote archive device LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 16 61 Customizing Your System Services Destinations 16 62 The Services screen enables users with administrative rights to add and remove destination devices add and remove services and change service parameters This means that the user can configure a device with the DICOM service s that particular device supports Views Tools Screens Dataflow Buttons Services Tepip CONNECTIVITY m Destination Device CODONICS GRAY Add IP address 192 28 124 216 Remove Format STANDARD2 3 Dicom Verification _03 Dicom Verification x Dicom Print_02 Dicom Print x X Add Remove r Dicom Print Hame Dicom Print_02 IV Enable p y 1 o 1 Max Interval J Is AE Title SCP Port Ho 104 Timeout po Is Settings Densities Job Film Orientation Film Size Configuration Information PORTRAIT X
144. IRONMENT See Peripheral Update for EC countries on page 2 18 for more information Unapproved Devices CAUTION The unapproved devices shall be used out of patient environment If devices are connected without the approval of GE the warranty will be INVALID Any device connected to the LOGIQ Book must conform to one or more of the requirements listed below 1 IEC standard or equivalent standards appropriate to devices 2 The devices shall be connected to PROTECTIVE EARTH GROUND Accessories Options Supplies CAUTION Unsafe operation or malfunction may result Use only the accessories options and supplies approved or recommended in these instructions for use LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 2 23 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Acoustic Output Located on the upper right section of the system display monitor the acoustic output display provides the operator with real time indication of acoustic levels being generated by the system See the Acoustic Output chapter in the Advanced Reference Manual for more information This display is based on NEMA AIUM Standards for Real time Display of Thermal and Mechanic Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment Acoustic Output Display Specifications 2 24 The display consists of three parts Thermal Index TI Mechanical Index MI and a relative Acoustic Output AO value Although not part of the NEMA AIUM standard the AO value informs the use
145. L 0800 122345 Av Nove de Julho 5229 FAX 011 3067 8298 01407 907 S o Paulo SP GE Medical Systems TEL 45 4348 5400 Fabriksparken 20 FAX 45 4348 5399 DK 2600 GLOSTRUP GE Medical Systems TEL 05 49 33 71 toll free 738 rue Yves Carmen FAX 33 1 46 10 01 20 F 92658 BOULOGNE CEDEX GE Ultraschall TEL 0130 81 6370 toll free Deutschland GmbH amp Co KG TEL 49 212 28 02 207 BeethovenstraRe 239 FAX 49 212 28 02 431 Postfach 11 05 60 D 42655 Solingen GE Medical Systems Hellas TEL 30 1 93 24 582 41 Nikolaou Plastira Street FAX 30 1 93 58 414 G 171 21 NEA SMYRNI GE Medical Systems Italia TEL 1678 744 73 toll free Via Monte Albenza9 FAX 39 39 73 37 86 I 20052 MONZA TLX 3333 28 TEL 0800 2603 toll free LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 1 9 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Introduction Contacting GE Medical Systems Ultrasound continued MEXICO NETHERLANDS POLAND PORTUGAL RUSSIA SPAIN SWEDEN SWITZERLAND TURKEY 1 10 GE Sistemas M dicos de Mexico S A de C V Rio Lerma 302 1 y 2 Pisos TEL 5 228 9600 Colonia Cuauht moc FAX 5 211 4631 06500 Me xico D F GE Medical Systems Nederland B V TEL 06 022 3797 toll free Atoomweg 512 FAX 31 304 11702 NL 3542 AB UTRECHT GE Medical Systems Polska TEL 48 2 625 59 62 Krzywickiego 34 FAX 48 2 615 59 66 P 02 078 WARSZAWA GE Medical Systems Portuguesa S A TEL 05 05 33 7313 toll free Rua Sa da Bandeira 585 FAX 351 2 208449
146. Libraries Presets Specifying which libraries belong to an application 1 On the Applications tab in the Application field select the application 2 In the Default Library Group field select the default library you want the system to display when you use annotations NOTE When you use annotations the default library is displayed To use other libraries for the application press the tab for the library 3 To save the changes select the Save button Using annotations from a library To use annotations press the Comment key on the Control Panel Annotations are then displayed on the Selection Menu LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 45 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Body Patterns Presets Overview Body patterns screens allow you to specify body pattern options to define body pattern libraries and assign body pattern libraries Body Pattern Libraries Libraries Preset Menu On the Body Patterns Libraries tab you can change and create body pattern libraries A body pattern library is a list of body patterns that are associated with a specific application The body patterns are listed in the library in the order in which they display on the Selection Menu For each library you can define two Selection Menu displays of body patterns Page1 and Page2 with 15 body patterns on each Selection Menu 16 46 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Body Patterns Presets Body Pa
147. Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Annotating an Image Annotating an image with typed words NOTE NOTE Moving Texts e Press Comment and type the comments where the cursor is currently located the display s home position and use the Trackball to further place the annotation cursor in the desired location Press Enter to move to the next line Annotations wrap to the next line when they are within one character of the right margin if Word Wrapping is selected in the Text Boundary preset See Annotations Libraries Annotations Preset Menu on page 16 41 for more information The word wrap starts one line below the start of that annotation Annotations appear on all prints photos and VCR recordings 1 2 WORD WRAP WORD WRAP Figure 6 4 Next Line Word Wrap 1 Before 2 After If the cursor appears at the right edge of the lowest line or a word cannot be completed in the lower right corner word wrap cannot be executed The same word wrap principles apply for library scripts as typed comments You have the ability to move annotations already on the screen and place them in different locations Place the cursor on the desired text or text group and press Set e The selected text color turns to green e Use the Trackball to move the selected text and press Set LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 6 13 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Scanning Display Functions Annotating an image with typed words c
148. Menu Example 4 Make the required measurements according to the system or select your preferred measurements Manual Vascular Calculation continued Vascular Measurements For each vessel in Doppler mode you can make any of the following measurements e Peak Systole PS e End Diastole ED e Minimum Diastole MD e Heart Rate e TAMAX e Pulsatility Index Pl e Resistive Index RI e S D Ratio e D S Ratio e Acceleration Accel e Acceleration Time AT LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 11 17 To select vascular measurements Your system is set up to show the measurements that you usually make for each vessel To make a measurement that is not shown for the selected vessel 1 Select the folder for the vessel you want to measure 2 Select Show All e 8 GE Medical Systems MI0 6 Tis 0 0 3C RS 09 03 03 3 10 54 PM I 99103103 3 10 54 PM adm b Carotid Vascular GF B Fra 4 0 MHz Mi Generic JA ie Carotid laa Map G0 D 17 0 cm GA DR 81 ICA FR 29 Hz AO 100 Prox Mid Dist Rt Lt PS ED MD HR VOLUME FLOW PW TAMEAN Fra 2 5 MHz Gn 16 Show All AO 100 Worksheet Display Hi Be kiz BULB SV a DR 36 ECA SVD 6 0 cm VERT SUBC Rt Prox CCAPS 0 00 wee Measure Cycle Select Angle Correct Side Rt PS MD Modem ED TAMAX start w Rt Prox ICA PS 44 89 cm s Figure 11 8 ICA folder The system displays all possible vessel measurements To select
149. Obstetrics 09 15 03 5 30 46 PM Name Factory 4 Images Facton 0B 4 Images ID 999 Birth Date Vascular Facton 0B 10 Images cmane O E Rad Abdomen Gynecology Urology Small Parts Pediatrics Cancel PgUpDown ChangeTemplate Retrieve Delete Figure 14 3 Report Template Select the measurement category and the number of images to be included in the report ReportWriter Chapter 15 Recording Images Describes how to record images LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 15 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Recording Images Getting Set Up to Record Images Overview A typical workflow for connectivity might be as follows this setup varies by each user setup 15 2 Select the dataflow worklist for example Start a new exam Select the patient Perform the patient scan Store images as multi frame CINE Loops and Raw DICOM data via the P1 button Check the DICOM Job Spooler via the F5 or F6 keys if programmed for Spooler Store secondary captures as video via P3 End the exam Permanently store images via the Patient menu LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Overview continued NOTE Getting Set Up to Record Images Dataflow combines archive data DICOM and onboard records into one coherent workflow Destination devices are configured and assigned to the print buttons You select the appropriate dataflow Portable etc according to your requirements You manage
150. Pulsatility Index See Pulsatility Index PIY on page 7 70 for more information PI PS ED or ED PS To calculate the Peak Systole End Diastole ratio or End Ratio Diastole Peak Systole ratio 1 Select PS ED or ED PS The system displays an active caliper with vertical and horizontal dotted lines 2 To position the caliper at peak systole PS or end diastole ED move the Trackball 3 To fix the measure point press Set The system displays a second active caliper 4 To position the second caliper at end diastole ED or peak systole PS move the Trackball 5 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the peak systole end diastole and PS ED or ED PS ratio in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 8 13 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Abdomen and Small Parts Abdomen and Renal Exam Calcs continued Resistive Index See Resistive Index RIY on page 7 71 for more information RI TAMAX See TAMAX and TAMEAN on page 7 46 for more information 8 14 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Small Parts Small Parts B Mode Measurements The Small Parts exam category includes the following two folders e Generic measurements listed on the following page e Small Parts which includes the thyroid measurements described in this section LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 8 15 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Generic Measurements In B Mode the Generic Exam Cal
151. Q Quality Assurance 18 14 Introduction 18 14 Quality assurance baselines 18 18 frequency of tests 18 15 periodic checks 18 18 phantoms 18 16 record keeping 18 29 system setup 78 20 test descriptions 18 20 typical tests 18 15 R Record keeping 18 29 removable media formatting 16 100 verifying 16 100 Resistive index 7 77 Results Window 7 8 specifying default location and format 16 18 Results window display location 3 46 moving to new location 3 46 S S D ratio 7 72 Safety 2 3 equipment 2 8 EMC electromagnetic compatiblity 2 13 hazards 2 8 2 9 2 25 17 9 17 10 biological 17 16 smoke and fire 2 9 labels 2 10 patient 2 5 acoustic output hazard 2 6 electrical hazard 2 6 mechanical hazards 2 6 patient identification 2 5 training ALARA 2 7 personnel 2 8 precaution icons defined 2 2 precaution levels defined 2 2 probes 17 9 handling precautions 17 12 Screens Connectivity 16 96 Search Criteria DICOM Worklist 16 77 Search Criteria tags DICOM Worklist 16 79 service adding to a dataflow 16 92 verifying network connectivity 16 107 Service Parameters LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Connectivity Services 16 63 Service requesting 1 7 Services Connectivity 16 62 Site Requirements Before the system arrives 3 3 Slope Doppler measurements 7 49 Small Parts exam splenic measurements 12
152. Select PS ED or ED PS The system displays an active caliper with vertical and horizontal dotted lines To position the caliper at peak systole PS or end diastole ED move the Trackball To fix the measure point press Set The system displays a second active caliper To position the second caliper at end diastole ED or peak systole PS move the Trackball To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the peak systole end diastole and PS ED or ED PS ratio in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Measurements and Calculations Pulsatility Index Pl See Pulsatility Index PIY on page 7 70 for more information Resistive Index RI See Resistive Index RI on page 7 71 for more information TAMAX See TAMAX and TAMEAN on page 7 46 for more information LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 39 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN OB Worksheet The OB Worksheet lists patient information and all measurement and calculation data To view the OB Worksheet 1 Press Measure 2 Select Worksheet Display Origin LMP LMP 03 23 2003 BBT GA 23w3d EDD LMP 12 28 2003 Fetus 4 1 CUA 34w4d Iwid EDD CUA 10 11 2003 1 FetusPos PLAC Parameter mi m2 m3 Method AGE Range B Mode Measurements BPD Hadlock 8 67 cm Avg 35wOd 31w6d 38wOd 2 HC Hadlock 26 63 cm Avg 29wOd 27wOd 31wOd AC Hadlock 33 37 cm avg 37w2d 34w2d 40w2d FL Hadl
153. Technical Publications GE Medical Systems Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 C cer LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual R2 0 x Operating Documentation Copyright 2002 2003 2004 By General Electric Co Regulatory Requirement This product complies with regulatory requirements of the following European Directive 93 42 EEC concerning medical devices C E wis This manual is a reference for the LOGIQ Book It applies to all versions of the R2 0 x software for the LOGIQ Book ultrasound system E GE Medical Systems GE Medical Systems Telex 3797371 P O Box 414 Milwaukee Wisconsin 53201 U S A Asia Pacific Latin America North America GE Ultraschall TEL 49 212 28 02 208 Deutschland GmbH amp Co KG FAX 49 212 28 02 431 Beethovenstra e 239 Postfach 11 05 60 D 42655 Solingen GERMANY Revision History Reason for Change DATE REASON FOR CHANGE 10 24 2002 Initial Release 04 21 2003 1 2 0 10 30 2003 2 0 0 06 18 2004 2 0 3 List of Effective Pages pRev 2 07 10 2003 Caution and Graphic Update REVISION REVISION PAGE NUMBER NUMBER PAGE NUMBER NUMBER Title Page Rev 5 Chapter 9 Rev 5 Revision History i 1 and i 2 Chapter 10 Regulatory Requirements i 3 Chapter 11 and i 4 Please verify that you are using the latest revision of this document Information pertaining to this document is maintained on GPC GE Medical Systems Global Product Configuration If you need to know the la
154. The system displays the ulna length in the Results Window See Volume on page 7 61 for more information LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 33 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN M Mode Measurements In M Mode you can measure stenosis A B ratio and heart rate Stenosis In M Mode you measure Stenosis by diameter See Stenosis on page 7 59 for more information AIB Ratio In M Mode you can measure A B ratio by diameter time or velocity See A B Ratio on page 7 67 for more information Heart Rate See Heart Rate on page 7 68 for more information 9 34 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Measurements and Calculations Doppler Mode Measurements You can use Doppler mode to study fetal blood flow in the heart umbilical cord placenta and middle cerebral arteries OB GYN Doppler mode also allows you to study uterine and ovarian blood flow The OB GYN vessel study includes the following vessels Aorta Desc Aorta Middle Cerebral Artery MCA right and left Ovarian right and left Placenta Umbilical Uterine right and left For each of these studies you can make any of the following measurements Peak Systole PS End Diastole ED Minimum Diastole MD Heart Rate TAMAX Pulsatility Index Pl Resistive Index RI PS ED Ratio ED PS Ratio Acceleration AT TAMEAN Volume Flow PV LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 35 Direction 2321062 100 Rev
155. This configuration category enables users with administrative rights to set the TCPIP for the system and connected remote archive 1 Type the name of the Ultrasound system in the Computer Name field 2 Inthe IP settings section identify the ultrasound system to the rest of the network by one of the following e DO NOT enable DHCP Type the IP Address acquire unique static IP address from hospital network administrator Subnet Mask and Default Gateway if applicable 3 In the Remote Archive Setup section type the Remote Archive IP Addr and Remote Archive Name NOTE Do not type the Remote Archive IP Addr and Remote Archive Name if you select Enable DHCP 4 Select Save settings 5 Re boot the ultrasound system LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 59 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System TCPIP continued Figure 16 33 Connectivity TCPIP Preset Menu 16 60 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 TCPIP continued Configuring Connectivity Table 16 40 Computer Name Preset Parameter Description Computer Name Type the AE Title of the Ultrasound system no spaces in name Table 16 41 IP settings Preset Parameter Description Enable DHCP IP Address DO NOT select this box to enable dynamic IP Address selection Type the IP Address of the Ultrasound system NOTE IP stands for Internet Protocol Every device on the network has a unique
156. To enter data in a field move the Trackball to highlight the field and then press Set Use the Tab key to move between fields Obstetric patient fields are listed in Table 9 1 For information about entering general patient data such as Patient ID and name See Beginning a New Patient on page 4 3 for more information Table 9 1 Obstetric fields Field Description LMP Last Menstrual Period enter the date that the patient started her last menstrual period in mm dd yyyy format You must enter 4 digits for the year When you type the month and day the system fills in the BBT Basal Body Temperature LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Exam Table 9 1 Obstetric fields Field Description EDD by LMP Estimated Delivery Date by LMP the system fills in the date after you enter the LMP GA by LMP Gestational Age by LMP the system fills in the age after you enter the LMP Gravida Number of pregnancies Para Number of births AB Number of abortions Ectopic Number of ectopic pregnancies Fetus Number of fetuses default is 1 Can be 1 4 Accession Exam number used with hospital information system DICOM This is a tracking number from the workilist Exam Describe the type of exam Description Perf Physician The physician who performs the exam Choose from the list or type the name Ref Physician Operator The physic
157. User Maintenance LOGIQ Book Features Specifications 18 2 Clinical Measurement Accuracy 18 6 Overview 18 9 Inspecting the System 18 9 Weekly Maintenance 18 10 Cleaning the system 18 11 Other Maintenance 18 13 Introduction 18 14 Typical Tests to Perform 18 15 Baselines 18 18 Periodic Checks 18 18 Results 18 19 System Setup 18 20 Test Procedures 18 20 Setting up a Record Keeping System 18 29 Supplies Accessories 18 31 Index LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual I xi Table of Contents Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter consists of information concerning indications for use contraindications contact information and how this documentation is organized LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 1 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Introduction Attention 1 2 system Overview This manual contains necessary and sufficient
158. Worksheet and select Exclude Value this value is excluded from result line and resultant value is re calculated without this value and also calculation values using this value is blank 1 Select Worksheet Display from any page of the Vascular Calculation Selection Menu Menu 2 To position the cursor at the field you want to delete or exclude move the Trackball The field is highlighted 3 Select Exclude Value 4 The data in the field is not visible and is not included in worksheet calculations as below 5 To include a value that you previously excluded select Exclude Value 09 03 03 3 28 35 PM 98 GE Medical Systems MI 0 6 Tis 0 0 3C RS U J09103103 3 23 46 PM adm b 1 1 Carotid Right Left 2 Method 2 Method Prox CCA PS ED i 67 80 Prox ICA PS ED Carotid MD LEA LEV AT TCD UEA UEY Meas Transf Measure Page Change motes Vessel Wksheet Vessel Summary Generic Intrav Ratio Delete Value Exit start e Figure 11 12 Display of the excluded value To edit a worksheet continued To select the method The user can select the method for calculating the cumulative value This value is only calculated by using displaying values If the user takes parameters more than 3 times latest 3 values are used for this calculation 1 Move cursor to method column and press Set 2 The pull down menu is displayed Move to cursor any one of methods and press Set The selected method is display
159. Yellow Cursor Position Color When Set reboot Results Window Left Bottom v Result Window Location TimeLine Lett Top 7 Result Window Location 2D Wide C Narrow Off White v Medium x Result Window Format Font Color reboot Font Size reboot Figure 16 12 System System Measure Preset Menu 16 18 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Presets System System Measure Preset Menu continued Table 16 10 Measurement Preset Parameter Description Repeat Measurement Select Off Repeat DefaultMeas OB Type Select which OB measurements and calculations studies to use USA Europe Tokyo Osaka or ASUM EFW GP Select the source used to calculate EF W GP Estimated Fetal Weight Growth Percentile CUA AUA for Hadlock Select to use CUA Composite Ultrasound Age or AUA Average Ultrasound Age as the default Hadlock Table Type Select Hadlock 82 or Hadlock 84 tables EFW Formula Europe EFW Formula Tokyo Select the source used to calculate EFW Europe Estimated Fetal Weight Shepard Merz Hadlock German Rich Select the source used to calculate EFW Tokyo Estimated Fetal Weight Add 1 week to EDD Select to add additional week to estimated date of delivery OB Graph Display Select Single or Quad for displaying OB Graphs Preset Parameter Table 16 11 Cursor Description Cursor Type
160. a F1 6 20 CD ROM 6 26 Chapter 7 General Measurements and Calculations Overview 7 2 Location of Measurement Controls 7 5 General Instructions 7 8 Starting Study and Measurement SetUp 7 15 Specifying Which Measurements Go in a Study or Folder 7 24 Changing Measurements 7 26 Adding Folders and Measurements 7 28 M amp A Advanced Preset 7 36 Manual Calcs Presets 7 38 B Mode Measurements 7 40 Doppler Mode Measurements 7 45 M Mode Measurements 7 51 Viewing and Editing Worksheets 7 54 Overview 7 57 B Mode Measurements 7 58 M Mode Measurements 7 66 Doppler Mode Measurements 7 69 Helpful hints 7 77 Chapter 8 Abdomen and Small Parts Introduction 8 2 General Guidelines
161. a worksheet on page 11 26 for more information Exclude Value Use to exclude a value from the result line See To edit a worksheet on page 11 26 for more information Intravessel Ratio Select this key to display the Intravessel Ratio Calculation window See Intravessel ratio on page 11 31 for more information Page Change knob If a worksheet has more data to view the next page adjust the Page Change knob LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 11 25 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 To edit a worksheet To change data on a worksheet 1 Select Worksheet Display from any page of the Vascular Calculation Selection Menu Menu 2 To position the cursor at the field you want to change move the Trackball The field is highlighted 3 Type the new data in the field and move the cursor to another place then the new data is displayed in blue and asterisk are appended to value and resultant value to indicate that it was manual entered The average measurements calculations and ratios are automatically updated to reflect the edited values GACE Medical Systems MI 0 6 Tis 0 0 3C RS 09 03 03 3 15 47 PM 09 03 03 3 12 14 PM adm b Carotid Right Left 2 Method 2 Method Prox CCA PS HR Prox ICA PS ED Carotid MD 44 89 12 39 AT 1 276 0 819 Meas Transf Measure Page Change Mode PW A Vessel Wksheet Vessel Summary Generic Intrav Ratio Delete Value be Exit start e Figure 11 11 Display of the edit
162. abases used within the system software that are associated with specific investigators are so noted Be sure to refer to the original article describing the investigator s recommended clinical procedures General Guidelines New Patient information must be entered before beginning an exam See Beginning a New Patient on page 4 3 for more information Any measurement can be repeated by selecting that measurement again from the Selection Menu Menu 11 2 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Introduction Vascular measurements offer several different types of measurement studies 09 03 03 2 47 30 PM 09 03 03 2 47 30 PM adm b gengen Abdomen GE B Fra 4 0 MHz amp Generic Gn TE E A 3 2 M Carotid Map GA D 17 0 cm pE DR 81 FR 14 Hz AO 100 IDSE Medical Systems MI04 Tls0 0 3C RS IO Vascular ME Lev S rco MB EA E uev Renal Worksheet Display PW Fra 2 5 MHz Gn 20 AO 100 PRF 4 5 kHz WF 408 Hz SV 4 DR 36 SVD 8 0 cm Menu Delete Active Measure Cursor Select lt gt Mode PW start e M amp A Figure 11 1 Vascular Exam Category Selection Menu Vascular Introduction continued e Generic Common to all applications See Generic Measurements on page 7 57 for more information e Carotid e LEA Lower Extremity Artery e LEV Lower Extremity Vein e TCD Trans Cranial Doppler e UEA Upper Extremity Artery e UEV Upper Extremity Vein e R
163. ace start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set To trace the maximum values of the desired portion of the spectrum move the Trackball NOTE To edit the trace line move the Trackball To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the measurement values in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Auto Trace Jull Set OQ Set amp LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Mode Measurements The value measured depends upon the Vol Flow Method preset The two selections available are Peak TAMAX and Mean TAMEAN For preset location See M amp A Advanced Preset on page 7 36 for more information To auto trace TAMAX or TAMEAN Press Measure twice an active caliper with a vertical dotted line displays To position the caliper at the trace start point in the Doppler spectrum move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set To position the vertical caliper at the end point move the Trackball To complete the measurement press Set The system automatically fixes both calipers and traces the maximum value between the two points The system displays this value in the Results Window 7 47 General Measurements and Calculations Auto Trace Chl Set D 7 48 The value measured depends upon the Vol Flow Method preset The two selections available are Peak TAM
164. act a local sales representative for training assistance LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 3 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN To Start an Obstetrics Exam 9 4 NOTE NOTE NOTE Calculation formulas are listed in the Advanced Reference Manual To begin an Obstetrics exam you enter patient data or if the patient data from a previous exam is saved in the system find the patient information 1 On the control panel press Patient The Patient Data Entry screen is displayed 2 On the Patient Data Entry screen select New Patient 3 To choose an Obstetrics exam move the Trackball to highlight Obstetrics then press Set The obstetric fields are listed in the Exam Information section of the Patient Data Entry screen 4 Doone of the following e Ifthe patient data is already stored in the system search for the data Use the search fields in the bottom section of the Patient Data Entry screen For information about how to search for patient data See Changing Patient Information or an Exam on page 4 7 for more information When the correct patient data is listed in the search list move the Trackball to highlight the patient name and press Set The system displays the patient data To change patient data use the Trackball to move the cursor to the field and press Set Press Backspace to delete the data and then type the correct data e Ifthe patient data is not stored in the system enter the data
165. active caliper To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the distance value in the Results Window and displays an active caliper 3 To make a distance measurement of the transverse trunk diameter repeat steps a d above The system displays the antero postero trunk diameter the transverse trunk diameter and AxT in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Measurements and Calculations Cardio Thoracic Area Ratio CTAR FENES To calculate cardio thoracic area ratio you make two ellipse OO08O0O measurements 1 Select CTAR an active caliper displays 2 Make an ellipse measurement of the cardiac area a To position the active caliper move the Trackball b To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper c To position the second caliper move the Trackball d Adjust the Ellipse control an ellipse with an initial circle shape displays e To position the ellipse and to size the measured axes move the calipers move the Trackball e To increase the size adjust the Ellipse control upward To decrease the size adjust the Ellipse control downward e To toggle between active calipers press Measure e To complete the ellipse measurement press Set The system displays the card
166. add to or delete from the Examination list window Use free text addresses In the Patient information window When selected the address information is entered in a single field free text When cleared the address information e g street city etc is entered in type specific fields Use birthdate In the Patient information window enter either the patient age or the birth date When selected enter birth date then the age is calculated When cleared enter age birth date field not available Use extended patient dialog In the Patient information window When selected the entire patient information data is displayed When cleared patient information data displayed is restricted to a minimum for example Name and Patient ID NOTE When cleared to display the entire patient information data in the Patient information window press More Use extended search dialog In the Search Create Patient window When selected all the searching filters are displayed as default When cleared the searching criteria are restricted to a minimum NOTE When cleared to display all the searching filters in the Search Create Patient window press More Auto search for patient In the Search Create Patient window When selected the system automatically searches through the selected patient archive while the user enters patient information When cleared the automatic search tool is turned off If you are trying to keep th
167. adjusted so that it is at the same relative position with respect to the display window in the new format as it was in the single image format Annotations may not be retained when the image is switched to M Mode image format depending on the preset Arrows and pointers can be used by activating the F5 or F6 key if programmable as arrows on the keyboard When the pointer comes up it is a GREEN color indicating it is active and can be moved To activate the arrows and points as a programmable function key See Key Configuration on page 16 115 for more information e Move the pointer using the Trackball to any place on the screen The pointer head direction can be controlled by how the trackball is moved e Press Set to fix the place of the pointer and direction of the pointer head The GREEN color turns to YELLOW or the default color if changed e To delete all arrow marks press the Clear key right after pressing the F5 or F6 key This action clears the arrows only not the comments on the screen To erase all annotations as well as arrows press the Clear key right after the Comment key LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Annotating an image using the library To reduce the amount of time spent annotating an image store frequently used annotations in the Annotation Library As many as 6 libraries are available per study One of the selected libraries is designated as the default and its entrie
168. ages with more resolution than is available with the JPEG selection select Save As and select AVI as the Save As Type You can save single images as avi files Table 15 1 Store Options Store as Image Only Store as Secondary Capture Image Type CINE Loop Still Image Gives you a loop of just the image no title bar and scan information Gives you a single image no title bar and scan information Gives you a single image of the video area DO NOT DO THIS BECAUSE YOU DO NOT KNOW WHICH IMAGE FROM THE LOOP THAT YOU ARE GETTING Gives you a single image of the video area LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 15 13 Recording Images Save As Saving Images to USB Memory Stick To use the USB Memory Stick do the following Insert the Memory Stick into a free USB port Select the Menu option from the right side of the screen Select Save As Select the Removable disk drive Select File Type DICOM JPG or AVI Enter the file name and press Save When the file has been saved select the Eject Hardware icon at the bottom of the screen NONON gt Pore 15 3 Eject Hardware Icon a Eject Hardware Icon 8 Select the device and press Stop NOTE Before pulling out the memory stick the device should not be active 15 14 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Image Data Management Moving Images Image Archive To archive i
169. al length in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 8 5 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 M Mode Measurements In M Mode all Exam Calcs include the following measurements Stenosis AIB Ratio Heart Rate 1 1 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 33 Tis 0 0 3C RS 09 03 03 9 11 31 AM J6 os10303 9 11 04 AM adm b 1 1 Abdomen Abdominal CF ame B a sl z Fra d 9 42 cm Gn 74 z Generic L 0 00 cm E A 3 2 AE Ratio Map C0 ad D 17 0 cm Stenosis DR 66 HR FR 11 Hz AO 100 Worksheet Display Bi Abdomen i Renal Menu Delete Active Measure Mode MM Cursor Select lt gt WStenosis start x Place the first point Figure 8 2 Abdomnal Calculations M Mode Selection Menu See M Mode Measurements on page 7 66 for more information Doppler Mode Measurements Generic Exam Calcs In Doppler Mode the Generic Exam Calcs tab includes the following measurements e PI Pulsatility Index e RI Resistive Index e S D Ratio D S Ratio AIB Ratio e Max PG Pressure Gradient e Mean PG Pressure Gradient SV Stroke Volume e Heart Rate 8 GE Medical Systems MI0 4 Tis 0 0 3C RS J J09 03 03 9 20 36 AM adm b 1 1 Abdomen 09 03 03 9 22 31 AM Abdominal B Fra 4 0 MHz PAE EA 3 2 aii m Map G 0 MI AB Ratio 17 0 cm PI RI MaxPG MeanPG SM Ratio DIS Ratio HR Modify Auto Calcs arrose yin tay AAA e T T 22 Fe M Renal 9 2
170. ale or use by or on the order of a physician _ _ ayz CISPR 11 EN 55011 CLASS A GROUP 1 s CLASSE A GROUPE 1 Figure 2 2 Label location explanations a a i J7 D H a ad amp 6 3 E j g A enma eJ 1 ranean J o _ ae ao GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS CHINA CO LTD N 19 CHANGJIAMO ROAD MUXI NEN DISTRICT JIANGSU P R CHINA 214020 ED a INPUT AW A A POSER SOVA S250 LO0IO Book This machine should be used in compliance with law Some jurisdictions restrict certain uses such as gender determination PRESE EIEEE ENE LET Figure 2 3 TUV and ldentification Rating Plate Label Location ug 260 20e 2 26 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Precautions Console Labels continued CRA HAR o 5A 3 v FERR RE Mid Figure 2 4 TUV and ldentification Rating Plate Label Location Table 2 7 Rating Plate Explanations Date of manufacture The date could be a year year and month or year month and day as appropriate See ISO 8601 for date formats Catalog or model number El Serial number Equipment Class II For products not relying potective ol earth such as products having double or reinforced insulation 5 Direct Current For products to be powered from a DC _ supply LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 2 27 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safet
171. ame Exam Information The patient s name and ID number is retained with each patient s image and transferred with each image during archiving or hard copy printing CAUTION To avoid patient identification errors always verify the identification with the patient Make sure the correct patient identification appears on all screens and hard copy prints 4 2 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Beginning an Exam Beginning a New Patient The New Patient key on the keyboard should be pressed at the beginning of each patient study Pressing this key displays the Patient Entry Menu in the LCD display New Patient should be selected at the beginning of each new patient exam End Exam should be pressed at the end of each exam Pressing New Patient automatically erases all patient data annotations measurements calculations and worksheets of the last exam Images are not automatically erased A warning message appears regarding images being erased or saved It is always best to select Save All if you are unsure of saving Exams and patients can always be erased later Patient Screen 08 28 02 9 58 41 AM Patient ID 142345 detail d Patient 6 1 Image History CET Cin 10 09 1954 mmiddiyyyy Age ATY ee female male Active Images 5 Category Exam Information Obstetrics Anoman m E KOGE 2 Obstetrics Seed mmiddiyyyy Para a mmidd yyyy AB est GAbyLMP Beers ttwitd Ectopic ee 7 Access
172. an I O and a Primary with Input Service only You cannot have a primary In and Primary If you assign a primary role to two services with the same direction the system displays a warning It prompts you to re define one of the services as secondary LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 91 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Selecting the default dataflow NOTE In the Dataflow section in the Name field select the dataflow Select Default When you start the system it selects the dataflow by default To have the system store data to the archive no buffer storage select Direct Store When you select the Default check box it becomes grey and cannot be cleared To change the default dataflow you must select another dataflow This ensures that a default dataflow is always defined Adding a service to a dataflow NOTE NOTE 16 92 In the Dataflow section in the Name field select the dataflow In the Services section select the service from the Select Service list In the Select Service list the services are listed in the following format service destination device For example a print service named DICOM Print_02 that is defined for a destination device of Server09 is listed as DICOM Print_02 Server09 Select the Add button to the right of the list The system adds the service to the list of selected services When you add a service to a dataflow the system automatically a
173. an be repeated by selecting that measurement again from the Selection Menu LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Abdomen Introduction Abdomen Abdominal measurements offer a few different types of measurement studies Generic Common to all applications See Generic Measurements on page 7 57 for more information Abdomen Renal Press Measure 2 Press Exam Calcs The Abdomen exam category allows you to choose from the displayed studies 3 To choose another study select the desired study folder LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 8 3 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 B Mode Measurements The following measurements are located in the Exam Calcs tab for the Abdomen exam category Some measurements are only available in certain Exam Calcs Those specific measurements splenic length splenic width splenic height Aorta Diameter and Renal Length are listed on the following pages In B Mode the Generic Exam Calcs for Abdomen includes the following measurements Stenosis e Volume e Angle AIB Ratio et 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 33 Tis 0 1 3C RS 09 03 03 9 09 34 AM F6 99103103 9 09 34 AM adm b 1 1 Abdomen B Abdominal GF 4 0 MHz Fra amp Generic on as Mi Stenosis m Map G0 D 17 0 cm MI AB Ratio DR 81 FR 14 Hz Vol amie AO 100 Angle Worksheet Display a Bi Renal d 7 75 cm L 0 00 cm Menu Delete Active Measure Cursor Select AN Mocata
174. and calculations during live timeline imaging while the image is frozen or in CINE Peak values are detected for venous flow During cardiac cycle detection the system identifies the cardiac cycle using calipers vertical bars and or highlighting of timeline data Use of identifiers is based on measurements and calculations selected by an operator for the current application The system may place calipers at early systolic peak peak systole minimum diastole and end diastole Vertical bars may also be placed to indicate the beginning and end of the cardiac cycle The peak and or mean trace may be highlighted You can edit the cardiac cycle identified by the system or select a different cardiac cycle You can select the calculations to be displayed in the M amp A Result window during live scanning or on a frozen image These calculations are displayed at the top of M amp A Result Window located adjacent to the image These calculations are presettable by application which means you can set up the default calculations to be displayed for each application LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Vascular Measurements Auto Vascular Calculation Activating Auto To activate Auto Vascular Calculation select the Auto Calc Vascular Selection Menu key to select Live calculations displayed on the Calculation real time image or Freeze calculations displayed on the frozen image To deactivate Auto Vascular calculation s
175. and update exam and imaging parameters Annotation library presets Set up annotation libraries by application Body Pattern library presets Set up body pattern libraries by application Application and User Defined presets Configure application and user specific settings Test patterns Helps configure system settings Connectivity Setup Define connection and communication setup including exam dataflow information Measurement and Analysis presets Customize exam studies create measurements set up manual sequencing and create OB Tables Reports Presets Allows you to edit the report template diagnosis codes and report comments Please refer to Chapter 14 for more information System Administration presets Perform system administrator activities such as setting up user IDs and logon formats To access these functions select the Utility key on the keyboard LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Utility Descriptions System Imaging Annotations Body Patterns Application Test Patterns Connectivity Presets The Utility screens allow you to perform the following tasks View and update general system configuration settings measurement and analysis settings and video settings backup and restore data and configuration files View and update exam and imaging parameters Set up annotation libraries by application Set up body pattern libraries by application Configure application spe
176. ange inclination adjust the Ellipse control or Hip Rotate 5 J z x Set To fix the second measurement line press Set a The system displays the alpha hip measurement in the Results Window 13 8 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Pediatrics Calculations B Mode Measurements continued d D Ratio The d D Ratio measurement measures the percentage of the Measurement femoral head coverage under the bony roof To make this measurement From the Selection Menu select either the right or left side orientation and then select d D Ratio A horizontal dotted line displays O Use the Trackball to place the baseline along the ilium Position the crosshairs edge at the osseous convexity of the ilium Body Pattern Use the Ellipse control or Hip Rotate to adjust or change inclination Set Press Set to fix the baseline The system displays a circle representing the femoral head Use the Trackball to position the circle Body Patter Use the Ellipse control to size the femoral head circumference Set Press Set to fix the femoral head circumference a The system displays the d D ratio for the femoral head in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 13 9 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Chapter 14 ReportWriter Describes how to generate reports LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 14 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Accessing the Report To access the report Press Report on the
177. arameters are displayed Location information is labeled with vessel name first Measured parameters of the vessel are grouped under the vessel label Selected value by method is highlighted however when the average method is selected the highlighted cursor is removed When an entire vessel measurement does not have sides left or right the side label is not displayed in that vessel study worksheet Some fields on the worksheet are view only and others you can change or select To easily see which fields you can change or select move the Trackball As the cursor moves over a field that you can change or select the field is highlighted LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Vascular Worksheet Worksheet Display Selection Menu 1 Worksheet Display To exit the worksheet display and return to scanning Vessel Worksheet Select this key to display the Vessel Worksheet when the Vessel Summary is displayed Vessel Summary Select this key to display the Vessel Summary when the Vessel Worksheet is displayed Examiner s Comment Select this key to display the Examiner s comment window See Examiner s Comments on page 11 30 for more information Generic Worksheet Select this key to display the Generic Worksheet Generic study measurements calculations such as volume and velocity are displayed on this worksheet Delete Value Use to delete a value each measurement value See To edit
178. ary select the tabs for example ABD or OB To select body patterns use the Body Pattern control on the Control Panel Customizing Your System Application Presets Overview Application Settings presets allow you to configure the application specific settings presets The other two tabs Annotations and Body Patterns were described earlier in this chapter Preset Image Store Carotid z Image Control amp Display Single frame live store T Number of heart cycles fi z Show kHz Scale E Footswitch Show Doppler Rate T Frozen Dual Carry Over Footswitch Freeze ad Patient Info Titlebar Line 1 Last FirstName Titlebar Line 2 id X Annotations Active function at freeze None bd Figure 16 31 Application Settings Preset Menu 16 52 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Overview continued Application Presets Table 16 33 Preset Preset Parameter Description Preset Select the application that you want to specify the presets Along with the various applications available on the system there are four user defined application presets that can be set See User Defined Application Presets on page 4 9 for more information Table 16 34 Image Control amp Display Preset Parameter Show kHz scale Description When selected displays the kHz scale on the left side of the Doppler spectrum Show Doppler Rate When selected display
179. ata measured and start the measurement again press Clear once To rotate through and activate fixed calipers from other measurements adjust Cursor Select After you complete the measurement to erase all data that has been measured to this point but not data entered onto worksheets press Clear LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Measurements and Calculations Amniotic Fluid Index AFI r He sas Fes ior S To calculate the amniotic fluid index you make measurements ee eee of the four quadrants of the uterine cavity The system adds these four measurements together to calculate the Amniotic Fluid Index NOTE The four quadrants can be measured with distance caliper or circumference circle measurements Press the appropraite AFI quadrant Selection Menu key to toggle between caliper and circle 1 Select AFI The first distance measurement AFI Q1 is already selected 2 Make a standard distance measurement for the first quadrant a To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball b To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper c To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points d To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the distance value in the Results Window 3 When the measurement of the first quadrant is complet
180. ata used in the calculation That means that the measurement is either less than or more than the range of measurements used to determine fetal age based on the measurement NOTE Calculation formulas are listed in the Advanced Reference Manual LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 9 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN B Mode Measurements This section describes all B Mode measurements that you typically find in OB studies Additional OB measurements follow the typical ones Abdominal Circumference AC gt A ORON FF oF S aaeane Ellipse HINTS 9 10 To calculate abdominal circumference you make an ellipse trace or two distance measurements Select AC an active caliper displays If necessary select AC until Ellipse is displayed above the key To position the active caliper move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second caliper move the Trackball Adjust the Ellipse control an ellipse with an initial circle shape displays e To position the ellipse and to size the measured axes move the calipers move the Trackball e To increase the size adjust the Ellipse control upward e To decrease the size adjust the Ellipse control downward e To toggle between active calipers press Measure To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the circumference in the Results Window Be
181. ation Via a PC To view user documentation on a PC 1 Insert the CD into the CD drive 2 Open the CD drive on your desktop 3 Double click on the gedocumentation html document 4 Select the item you want to view click on the blue underlined link in the File Name column To close the window click on the X in the upper right hand corner of the browser window NOTE If your PC does not have the Adobe Acrobat Reader the PC version is supplied on the CD Open the CD and double click on ar505enu exe Follow the prompts to install Adobe Acrobat Reader on your PC 6 26 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Chapter 7 General Measurements and Calculations Describes how to perform general measurements and calculations LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Overview 7 2 Introduction Measurements and calculations derived from ultrasound images are intended to supplement other clinical procedures available to the attending physician The accuracy of measurements is not only determined by system accuracy but also by the use of proper medical protocols by the user When appropriate be sure to note any protocols associated with a particular measurement or calculation Formulas and databases used within the system software that are associated with specific investigators are so noted Be sure to refer to the original article
182. ation shows ratios for several measurements and the Cephalic Index Cl The worksheet shows if any of the ratios are out of range OOR Out of range indicates one of the following The measurement is out of the normal range based on the gestational age that is calculated from the LMP The system determines OOR from the ultrasound age compared to the gestational age The gestational age is calculated from the last menstrual period or the estimated delivery date e The measurement is outside of the range for the data used in the calculation That means that the measurement is either less than or more than the range of measurements used to determine fetal age based on the measurement For more information about how to use the worksheet See Viewing and Editing Worksheets on page 7 54 for more information LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 43 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN OB Graphs Overview OB Graphs allow you to assess fetal growth compared to a normal growth curve When a patient has completed two or more ultrasound exams you can also use the graphs to look at fetal trending For multi gestational patients you can plot all fetuses and compare the growth on the graphs The LOGIQ Book provides the following two basic types of graphs e Fetal Growth Curve graphs show one measurement per graph These graphs show the normal growth curve positive and negative standard deviations or applicable percentiles and u
183. ator approved applied part LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Precautions Related Hazards continued Training It is recommended that all users receive proper training in applications before performing them in a clinical setting Please contact the local GE representative for training assistance ALARA training is provided by GE Application Specialists The ALARA education program for the clinical end user covers basic ultrasound principles possible biological effects the derivation and meaning of the indices ALARA principles and examples of specific applications of the ALARA principle LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 2 7 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Equipment and Personnel Safety Related Hazards DANGER Explosion Elazar Electical Hazard _e Y 2 8 This equipment contains dangerous voltages that are capable of serious injury or death If any defects are observed or malfunctions occur stop operating the equipment and perform the proper action for the patient Inform a qualified service person and contact a Service Representative for information There are no user serviceable components inside the console Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel only Only approved and recommended peripherals and accessories should be used The concerns listed below can seriously affect the safety of equipment and personnel during a diagnostic ultrasound exam
184. azards are indicated by the following icons Table 2 1 Potential Hazard Icon Potential Hazard Usage Source e Patient user infection due to e Cleaning and care ISO 7000 contaminated equipment instructions No 0659 Sheath and glove guidelines e Electrical micro shock to patient e g e Probes _ ventricular ECG s Connections to back panel e Patient injury or tissue damage from ALARA the use of ultrasound radiation Power Output following the as low as reasonably achievable principle Risk of explosion if used in the Flammable anesthetic presence of flammable anesthetics e Patient user injury or adverse reaction e Replacing fuses from fire or smoke Outlet guidelines e Patient user injury from explosion and a fire LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 2 3 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Important Safety Considerations 2 4 CAUTION The following topic headings Patient Safety and Equipment and Personnel Safety are intended to make the equipment user aware of particular hazards associated with the use of this equipment and the extent to which injury can occur if precautions are not observed Additional precautions may be provided throughout the manual Improper use can result in serious injury The user must be thoroughly familiar with the instructions and potential hazards involving ultrasound examination before attempting to use the device Training assistance is
185. body pattern in the Copy from Existing list and press Set When you select a body pattern name in a Selection Menu location or in the Copy from Existing list the system displays the pattern in the lower left corner of the screen To save the changes select the Save button Creating a new body pattern library 16 48 In the New Library field type a name for the library then select Create The system creates a new library Enter body patterns as described in step 2 above To save the changes select the Save button LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Body Patterns Presets Body Pattern Libraries Body Patterns Preset Menu On the Body Patterns tab you specify body pattern options Libraries Body Patterns Applications Body Patterns Erase When the probe is changed v Erase When the image is unfrozen I Copy to active side in mutiple image IV Body pattern background Transparent Opaque Figure 16 27 Body Patterns General Preset Menu Table 16 31 Body Patterns Preset Parameter Description Erase When the probe is changed If checked when you change probes the system erases the body pattern Erase When the image is unfrozen If checked when you unfreeze the image the system erases the body pattern Copy to active side in multiple image If checked when you use dual B Mode the system copies the body pattern to the active side of the dual image
186. but not the trace caliper press Clear once e To clear the trace caliper and the current data measured press Clear twice LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Mode Measurements Doppler Mode Measurements Four basic measurements can be made in Doppler Mode e Velocity TAMAX TAMIN and TAMEAN Manual or Auto Trace e Two Velocities with the Slope and Time Interval between them e Time Interval NOTE The following instructions assume that you do the following 1 In the B Mode part of the display scan the anatomy you want to measure 2 Go to the Doppler Mode part of the display 3 Press Freeze Velocity To measure velocity Press Measure an active caliper with a vertical dotted line displays 6 To position the caliper at the desired measurement point move the Trackball Set To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the velocity measurement in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 45 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations TAMAX and TAMEAN 7 46 Manual Trace Ge The value measured depends upon the Vol Flow Method preset The two selections available are Peak TAMAX and Mean TAMEAN For preset location See M amp A Advanced Preset on page 7 36 for more information To do a manual trace of TAMAX or TAMEAN Press Measure twice a trace caliper displays To position the caliper at the tr
187. caliper move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second caliper move the Trackball Adjust the Ellipse control an ellipse with an initial circle shape displays e To position the ellipse and to size the measured axes move the calipers move the Trackball e To increase the size adjust the Ellipse control upward e To decrease the size adjust the Ellipse control downward e To toggle between active calipers press Measure To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the circumference in the Results Window Before you complete the ellipse measurement To erase the ellipse and the current data measured press Clear once The original caliper is displayed to restart the measurement To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement press Clear a second time LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Measurements and Calculations Head Circumference HC continued Trace 1 Select HC an active caliper displays If necessary select HC until Trace is displayed above the key To position the trace caliper move the Trackball To fix the trace start point press Set The trace caliper changes to an active caliper To trace the measurement area move the Trackball around the anatomy To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the
188. can be saved as you would any ultrasound image Once it is displayed on the screen it can be recorded on the VCR printed on the B W or color page printer stored on media with the Image Archive option or placed on regular paper with a line printer LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Chapter 12 Urology Describes how to perform Urology measurements and calculations LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 12 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Urology Introduction Urology Exam Preparation Measurements and calculations derived from ultrasound images are intended to supplement other clinical procedures available to the attending physician The accuracy of measurements is not only determined by the system accuracy but also by use of proper medical protocols by the user When appropriate be sure to note any protocols associated with a particular measurement or calculation Formulas and databases used within the system software that are associated with specific investigators are so noted Be sure to refer to the original article describing the investigator s recommended clinical procedures General Guidelines 12 2 New Patient information must be entered before beginning an exam See Beginning an Exam on page 4 2 for more information Any measurement can be repeated by selecting that measurement again from the Selection Menu Menu The system retains as many as eight measurements but the worksheet retai
189. ce operates in realtime only not in Freeze or CINE Rotation Updown Invert Description You can flip the image up down Adjusting To flip the image vertically press Rotation up down Values Up down Values vary by probe and application Values are returned to the preset value when you change Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Benefits Beneficial in transvaginal and transrectal scanning CAUTION When reading an rotated image be careful to observe the probe orientation to avoid possible confusion over scan direction or left right image reversal LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 19 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Rejection Description Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified an echo must have a certain minimum amplitude before it will be processed Adjusting Adjust to the right to increase and left to decrease Values 0 2 5 10 15 and 20 Benefits Allows for the elimination from the display of low level echoes caused by noise Image Rotate Description You can flip the image up down Adjusting To flip the image vertically press Rotation up down Values Up down Values vary by probe and application Values are returned to the preset value when you change Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Benefits Orient image display for easy reference CAUTION When reading a rotated image be careful to observe the probe orientation to avoid possible confusi
190. ces Destinations on page 16 62 for more information Removing a service from a Print key 1 Inthe Button field select the print key you want to remove a service from 2 Inthe destinations list move the Trackball to the service you want to remove 3 Press Set to highlight the service 4 Inthe Destinations section select Remove The service is removed from the destinations list LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 89 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Dataflow A dataflow is a set of pre configured services When you select a dataflow the ultrasound system automatically works according to the services associated with the dataflow The Dataflow tab allows you to select and review information about dataflows You can also create change and remove dataflows NOTE You must be logged on as Administrator to use the Dataflow tab CONNECTIVITY Vises Toul Bagane Maratlow Euion Suivicce Tepi Dataflow Hane Local Archive Int HD e M Defaut Add I Direct Store Remner Hidden permies Select Service fo gou Destinat on De Remnve Kame Type Local Archee m EchaUstabase vse Mycomputer isa Primar Selected Serwiee lt n n Ss Rak l Fumar Figure 16 57 Connectivity Dataflow Preset Menu The Dataflow screen has the following sections of information 1 Dataflow Displays information about dataflows You can add data
191. cific settings Helps configure system settings Define connection and communication setup including exam dataflow information Measure Customize exam studies create measurements set up manual sequencing and create OB Tables NOTE The Measure screens allow you to customize exam studies create measurements set up auto sequencing and create OB Tables Admin Perform system administrator activities such as setting up user IDs and logon formats LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 3 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Overview system Presets System presets allows you to view or change the following parameters General Location Date Time Patient Info Key Usage and Utility configuration System Imaging CINE Loop Store Cardiac Biopsy Guides and Image Control and Display configuration System Measure Measurement Cursor and Results Window configuration VoiceScan System User Voice Profile Setup and VoiceScan Parameters Backup Restore Backup Media EZBackup Move Detailed Restore of User Defined Peripherals Video Settings VCR Print and Store Options and Setup configuration About System software patent and image information Changing system parameters 16 4 NOTE To change system parameters 1 2 On the keyboard select Utility Select System The System screen is displayed On the monitor display move the Trackball to select the tab that has the
192. cm Menu Delete Active Measure a a a es Mode Pw core ied MaxPG MeanPG SM Ratio start x M amp A Figure 8 3 Doppler Mode Selection Menu Abdominal Calculations See Doppler Mode Measurements on page 7 69 for more information Abdomen and Renal Exam Calcs Your system is set up to show the measurements that you usually make for each region of interest To make a measurement that is not shown for the selected region 1 Select the folder for the region you want to measure 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 4 Tis 0 0 3C RS 09 03 03 9 23 17 AM FS 93103103 9 20 36 AM adm b welecies Abdomen Abdominal OCS ae B Fra 4 0 MHz Vel 39 03 cm s Gn 74 ME Generic Vel 0 00 cm s E A 3 2 Abdomen Map G0 D 17 0 cm Prox Mid Dist DR 81 Rt Lt FR 14 Hz AO 100 cla v willing if Nii UNM a MSA T Fa 2 5 MHz Gn 11 Ivc AO 100 PRF 4 5 kHz Modify Auto Calcs WF 408 Hz Cancel Transfer SV 4 DR 36 Worksheet Display SVD 9 2 cm More Menu Delete Active Measure Cycle Select Angle Correct Side Rt Cursor Select lt 5 Mode PW start e Place the velocity point M amp A Figure 8 4 Abdomen Exam Calcs Folder Doppler Mode in Abdomen exam category Abdomen and Renal Exam Calcs continued 2 Press Show All 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 4 Tis 0 0 3C RS dE 09 03 03 9 34 55 AM adm b 1 1 Abdomen B Fra 4 0 MHz Gn 74 E A 3 2 Abdomen Map G0 D 17 0 cm Ao DR 81 Prox Mid Dist FR 14 Hz AO 100
193. cm Time Scale Eight speeds 0 7 Major marker 1 second M Mode Cursor Displays where the M Mode Cursor is positioned Optimizing M Mode M Mode Selection Menu Gray Map 3Dynamic Range 4 Sweep Speed 5 Display Format Colorize Edge Enhance Full Timeline Figure 5 4 M Mode Selection Menu M Mode LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 23 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Scanning Hints HINTS Sweep Speed Description Adjusting Values Benefits Bioeffects 5 24 These M Mode controls produce the following results Edge Enhance Affects border sharpness Sweep Speed Controls speed of M Mode update Dynamic Range Affects the amount of gray scale information displayed Changes the speed at which the timeline is swept Available in M Mode and Doppler Mode To increase decrease select Sweep Speed Each selection represents a different sweep time values vary by probe and application Sweep Speed values are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient You can speed up or slow down the timeline to see more or fewer occurrences over time Changing the Sweep Speed may change the TI and or MI Observe the output display for possible effects LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Intended Use Optimizing Color Flow Optimizing Color Flow Color Flow Mode is a Doppler Mode intended
194. cs for Small Parts includes the following measurements Stenosis e Volume Angle AIB Ratio ER GE Medical Systems MI0 4 Tis 0 1 8L RS 79 09103103 9 43 59 AM adm b sclesie Carotid SmallParts GF B Fra 8 0 MHz Gn 56 EA 2 2 Map B D 09 03 03 9 44 41 AM B AB Ratio Volume Angle Worksheet Display Mth Menu Delete Active Measure Cursor Select Modecn Volume Angle start e M amp A Figure 8 7 Generic Calculations B Mode Selection Menu See B Mode Measurements on page 7 58 for more information Small Parts Thyroid length width and height Each of height a these is a standard distance measurement Length and re typically measured in the sagittal plane Width is measured in the transverse axial plane To measure thyroid length width or height 1 On the Exam Calcs tab select the Small Parts folder 2 Select the Thyroid folder 3 Select the appropriate orientation side Right or Left 4 Select Thyroid L Thyroid W or Thyroid H An active caliper displays 5 Perform a standard distance measurement a To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper if preset accordingly To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement p
195. ct local authorities for the location of a chemical waste collection program nearest you NOTE The battery is designed to work with LOGIQ Book systems only Only use the batteries authorized by GE WARNING e The battery has a safety device Do not disassemble or alter the battery e Charge the batteries only when the ambient temperature is between 0 and 65 C 32 and 149 F and discharge the batteries between 10 and 55 C 14 and 131 F e Do not short circuit the battery by directly connecting the negative terminals with metal objects e Do not heat the battery or discard it in a fire Do not expose the battery to temperature over 60 C 140 F Keep it away from fire and other heat sources e Do not charge the battery near a heat source such as a fire or heater Do not leave the battery in direct sunlight e Do not pierce the battery with a sharp object hit it or step on it e Do not use a damaged battery e Do not solder a battery e Do not connect the battery to an electrical power outlet LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 7 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Battery continued WARNING If the LOGIQ Book is not being used on a monthly basis the battery needs to be removed during the lengthy non use period CAUTION To avoid the battery bursting igniting or fumes from the battery causing equipment damage observe the following precautions 3 8 Do not immerse th
196. d 8L RS B Carotid 8L RS B Preset Carotid Carotid All Probes B Edge Enhance 2 Softener High gt Width poo Focus Number 2 Gray Scale Map Bc_crave gt Focus Width miae z gain ss z Focus Depth s0 Dynamic Range e1 gt Depth cm ja gt Rejection fs Compression fi gt Frequency MHz fe zl Line Density fzx AutoLineDensity 7 Line Density Zoom 3 Suppression ov BiM Acoustic Output 100 v Image Reverse L B Color Tit MapD Thermal Index C Te Tis Tib Frame Average 2a Figure 4 8 Imaging Presets for User Defined Application NOTE If you select Reload Factory Defaults for the User Defin application that you created the settings for this user ed defined application revert back to the factory settings for the exam category and application it was based upon NOTE Currently there is no way to delete a user defined application LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 4 11 Preparing for an Exam Chapter 5 Optimizing the Image Describes how to adjust the image This chapter is broken into the following sections B Mode M Mode Color Flow Mode Doppler Mode and 3D Mode LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Intended Uses B Mode is intended to provide two dimensional images and measurement capabilities concerning the anatomical structure of soft tissue 1 1 E
197. d Biopsy Multi Angle Biopsy Guide Assembly continued Place an adequate amount of coupling gel on the face of the probe Place the proper sanitary sheath tightly over the probe and biopsy bracket Use the rubber bands supplied to hold the sheath in place Figure 17 17 Applying Sanitary Sheath Snap the needle clip onto the biopsy guide bracket Figure 17 18 Fixing the Needle Clip Attachment 1 Sheath Push the locking mechanism towards the bracket to secure the lock Make sure the needle guide is firmly attached to the bracket Figure 17 19 Locking the Needle Clip 17 32 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing for a Biopsy Multi Angle Biopsy Guide Assembly continued Choose the desired gauge size needle barrel Twist it back and forth to remove it from the plastic tree Figure 17 20 Needle Barrel Selection Place the needle barrel into the needle clip with the desired gauge facing the needle clip and snap into place Figure 17 21 Needle Barrel Installation CAUTION Ensure that all guide parts are seated properly prior to perfoming a biopsy LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 17 33 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes and Biopsy Biopsy Need Path Verification To verify that the path of the needle is accurately indicated within the guidezone on the system monitor perform the following e Properly install the bracket and biopsy guide Scan in a contai
198. d Calculations Specifying Which Measurements Go in a Study or Folder The Folder section of the Measurement amp Analysis screen has two lists of folders and measurements This is where you specify which items go in a study or folder Available folders and measurements The left list contains all possible folders and measurements for the selected study or folder e Selection Menu The list has all folders and measurements currently selected for the study or folder These are selected from the available folders and measurements list These are the folders and measurements you see when you are scanning and choose an exam category 7 24 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Measurement and Calculation Setup Setting up an automatic exam flow In some cases related measurements are put ina measurement folder This allows you to logically organize measurements It also allows you to specify that the system automatically start each measurement in a folder one after the other This is the automatic sequence feature To use this feature 1 Inthe Selection menu select the folder that contains the measurements you want The system displays the folder and lists the measurements 2 Inthe Folder section of the Measurement amp Analysis screen select Auto sequence See Figure 7 12 For OB GYN Vessel measurements Umbilical Doppler measurements are put in the Umbilical measurement folder GACE Medical Systems
199. d privacy e Prior material knowledge and approval of the presence of nonessential personnel with the number of such personnel kept to a minimum e An intent to share with the parents per the physician s judgement either during the examination or shortly thereafter the information derived e An offer of choice about viewing the fetus e An offer of choice about learning the sex of the fetus if such information becomes available Ultrasound examinations performed solely to satisfy the family s desire to know the fetal sex to view the fetus or to obtain a picture of the fetus should be discouraged LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Exam Acoustic Output Considerations General warning The LOGIQ Book system is a multi use device which is capable of exceeding FDA Pre enactment acoustic output spatial peak temporal average intensity limits for fetal applications CAUTION It is prudent to conduct an exam with the minimum amount and duration of acoustic output necessary to optimize the image s diagnostic value Concerns surrounding fetal exposure Always be aware of the acoustic output level by observing the Acoustic Output Display In addition become thoroughly familiar with the Acoustic Output Display and equipment controls affecting output Training It is recommended that all users receive proper training in fetal Doppler applications before performing them in a clinical setting Please cont
200. d the cable acutely e Avoid crossing cables between probes 17 2 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probe Overview Probe orientation Each probe is provided with an orientation marking refer to Figure 17 1 This mark is used to identify the end of the probe corresponding to the side of the image having the orientation mark on the display Figure 17 1 Orientation Marking on Probe 1 Orientation Mark Labeling Each probe is labeled with the following information e Seller s name and manufacturer e Operating frequency GE part number e Probe serial number e Month and year of manufacture e Probe designation provided on the probe grip and the top of the connector housing so it is easily read when mounted on the system and is also automatically displayed on the screen when the probe is selected LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 17 3 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes and Biopsy Labeling continued 17 4 wake OE eb egasg Hakul dhdi LTO Tekh par ae 1 E ae itir Figure 17 2 Probe Adapter Label LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probe Overview Labeling continued 3C RS GEMS E Am GEMS A JAPAN GEMS E Figure 17 3 Probe Handle Labels 6 GE Medical Systems demo 3D al 1 Tis0 2 3C 06 14 01 7 42 43 PM adm 2001 OB 2 3 an oe 125 125 4 2 6 P s ee OB General Figure 17 4 Displayed Probe Information 1 Probe Informa
201. dataflow with a default name such as Workflow05 To change the name of the dataflow move the Trackball to the Name field press Set and type a new name The system displays a message to confirm that you want to change the name 3 Select Yes Removing a dataflow or service 16 94 Select the dataflow or service Select the appropriate Remove button The system displays a warning message to confirm that you want to remove the dataflow or service Select OK LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Dataflow continued Configuring Connectivity The following table lists dataflows that are pre configured with the ultrasound system Table 16 61 Dataflows Dataflow Description No Archive Performs an exam without storing the data to the archive HD Local Archive Int Local archive internal hard driveUses the local database for patient archiving Stores images to the internal hard drive HD MOD Local Archive Int Local archive internal hard drive and Magneto Optical DiskUses the local database for patient archiving Stores images to the internal hard drive raw data and to a MOD as DICOM Media NOTE LocArch HD MOD enables only pure DICOM to both destinations or both DICOM and raw data to both destinations Remote Archive Remote HD Remote archive remote hard driveUses a remote database either on EchoPAC workstation or on EchoServer for patient arc
202. de from two different studies on the Different Studies same patient from the Same Patient 1 2 15 10 Select the patient Select new exam Go to the Image History page Ensure that the most recent exam is marked as the Active Exam Select the image from the clipboard that you want to view side by side Press R to split the screen Select L for the active window Press Measure to get a cursor that you can then make into an arrow Change the Active Exam to the other exam containing the image you want to compare for your side by side presentation Exit Press Freeze to unfreeze the image the side without an image will become active Press Measure to get a cursor tha tyou can then make into an arrow Select the new image from the clipboard LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Image Data Management Image Management Guide Save As to View Use this to save images Dicom or Raw Dicom in a computer on any PC friendly format avi or jpeg so you can view it on any PC EZBackup Move Use this to take images off your Ultrasound system onto Images to Archive removable media for long term archive This is the way to free up hard disk space rather than deleting images Export Import Use this to copy both patient data and images for specified Data Images patient s from one system to another Between Systems Media Requirements Only use CD R CD ROMs DO NOT use CD RW CD ROMs Also
203. defined presets or select specific presets to restore via Detailed Restore LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 27 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Backup procedure user defined configurations CAUTION To avoid the risk of overwriting the local patient and report archives on the system to update DO NOT check Patient Archive when making a backup of configuration settings 1 Insert a formatted CD into the CD RW drive NOTE For information about formatting a disk See Formatting removable media on page 16 100 for more information 2 On the keyboard press Utility 3 Select System 4 Onthe monitor display select Backup Restore The Backup Restore screen is displayed NOTE If you are not logged in with administrator privileges the Operator Login window is displayed Log on with administrator privileges 5 In the Backup list select User Defined Configuration 6 In the Media field select CD 7 Select Backup The system performs the backup As it proceeds status information is displayed on the Backup Restore screen 8 After the backup is complete press AIt E to eject the CD 16 28 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Presets Restore procedure user defined configurations CAUTION CAUTION NOTE The restore procedure overwrites the existing database on the local hard drive Make sure to insert the correct CD ROM MOD To avoid the risk of overwriting
204. detect system performance trends LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 18 19 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 User Maintenance System Setup Test Procedures 18 20 The user should tailor the tests to their particular needs It is certainly not necessary to make all checks with all probes A representative example with the probes used most often by the customer should be adequate in judging system performance trends Use a gray scale phantom as the scan object for the tests Commercial phantoms are supplied with its own operator manual Be familiar with proper phantom operating procedures prior to use for quality assurance evaluations 1 Adjust image monitor Brightness and contrast should be set to the normal viewing of a good gray scale image 2 Check all recording devices for proper duplication of image monitor Ensure that what is seen is what is recorded 3 Annotate non displayed image processing controls 4 Set TGC slide pots to center detent position 5 Place focal zone marker s in area of interest for an optimum image The following are recommended Quality Assurance tests A brief description of the test the benefit it provides and steps to accomplish the test are supplied The importance of recording scan parameters and consistent record keeping cannot be stressed enough Reproducibility to monitor system trends is the key to quality assurance evaluations Using the system s dual image display format is often ve
205. dio frequency energy The equipment may cause radio frequency interference to other medical and non medical devices and radio communications To provide reasonable protection against such interference this product complies with emissions limits for a Group 1 Class A Medical Devices Directive as stated in EN 60601 1 2 However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment is found to cause interference which may be determined by turning the equipment on and off the user or qualified service personnel should attempt to correct the problem by one or more of the following measure s e reorient or relocate the affected device s e increase the separation between the equipment and the affected device power the equipment from a source different from that of the affected device e consult the point of purchase or service representative for further suggestions The manufacturer is not responsible for any interference caused by using other than recommended interconnect cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment To comply with the regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A FCC Device all interconnect cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly grounded Use of cables not properly shielded and grounded may result in the equipment
206. dy NOTE The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze Stenosis Diameter NOTE NOTE Generic Measurements You can calculate Stenosis by diameter or by area depending on the mode When you use diameter to calculate the stenosis always take the measurement from a cross sectional view of the vessel To calculate percent stenosis by diameter 1 2 From the Generic Selection Menu select Stenosis Select sten Diam in Doppler mode The system displays an active caliper Make a distance measurement of the inner area of the blood vessel The system displays an active caliper for the second distance measurement Make a distance measurement of the outer area of the blood vessel The system displays each distance measurement and the Stenosis in the Results Window For details on how to make a distance measurement See Distance measurement on page 7 40 for more information For the diameter calculation do NOT take a distance measurement from a longitudinal view This may lead to an inaccurate assessment of stenosis LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 59 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Stenosis continued 7 60 Area NOTE To calculate percent stenosis by area 1 2 From the Generic Selection Menu select Stenosis Select sten Area The system displays a trace caliper Make a trace measurem
207. e In the Destination Device section select Add The system adds a new destination device with a default name such as Server05 To change the name of the destination device type a new name in the Name field The system displays a message to confirm that you want to change the name 3 Select OK LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 63 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Removing a destination device 1 Inthe Destination Device section select the destination device 2 Inthe Destination Device section select the Remove button The system displays a warning message to confirm that you want to remove the device and associated services NOTE When you remove a destination device all associated services are automatically removed 3 Select OK Services Pure DICOM CD R Dicom Media Storage x y p A Pure DICOM MOD525 RW Dicom Media Storage x l X Pure DICOM CD RW Dicom Media Storage x Raw DICOM MOD525 RW Dicom Media Storage x Raw DICOM CD RW Dicom Media Storage x _______ CopyToWflow_01 Image To Buffer x Remove Read MAC EP up to 6 EchoPac Media x zi Figure 16 36 Services Table 16 44 Services Preset Parameter Description Name Free text give a descriptive name to the device Type The type of service Enable If selected this service is enabled 16 64 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Con
208. e 7 42 trace 7 44 AUA OB worksheet 9 47 Audio speakers 3 31 Auto sequence how to use 7 25 B B Mode scanning hints 5 5 Biological hazard 2 9 Biparietal diameter BPD 9 13 B Mode imaging changing presets 16 34 B Mode measurements general 7 40 Gynecology exam 9 67 OB 9 10 Body Patterns 6 15 body patterns applications 16 50 General tab 16 49 libraries 16 46 Buttons screen Connectivity 16 84 buttons print viewing structure of configuration 16 106 Index 1 Index Cc Calculations 9 8 OB worksheet 9 43 selecting 7 10 Calipers description of 7 6 Cardio thoracic area ratio CTAR 9 23 Care and maintenance cleaning the system 18 11 footswitch 18 12 monitor 78 17 operator controls 18 11 printer 18 12 system cabinet 18 11 inspecting the system 18 9 maintenance schedule 18 10 Caution icon 2 2 Changing measurements 7 26 Cine gauge display location 3 46 Circumference measurement ellipse 7 42 trace 7 44 Cleaning 18 12 Cleaning probes 17 13 Clinical calculation accuracy 18 8 measurement accuracy 18 6 Color Flow Mode imaging changing presets 16 34 Connectivity Buttons 16 84 Dataflow 16 90 overview of screens 16 57 Screens 16 96 Services 16 62 DICOM Performed Procedure 16 70 Service Parameters 16 63 TCPIP 16 59 Tools 16 99 connectivity configuring 16 57 presets 16 57 service types 16 67 verifying a ser
209. e Volume Angle Worksheet Display amp carotid Mica er Bi rco Mi uea Mi uey Bi porai 1 L 1 01 cml Menu Delete Measure i Cursor Selget Mode 2D en Caliper Ellipse Area trace Volume Angle start e M amp A 19 20 21 22 23 Figure 3 31 Monitor Display Tour Preparing the System for Use Monitor Display continued 1 Institution Hospital Name Date 13 Imaging Parameters by Mode Time Operator Identification 44 Focal Zone Indicator 2 Patient Name Patient Identification 15 TGC 3 Power Output Readout 16 Body Pattern 4 GE Symbol Probe Orientation 17 Depth Scale Marker 18 SoftMenu ee silage PENEN 19 Caps Lock On or Off 6 rayunan pat 20 Start Menu Icon fa Ame sauge 21 Battery Icon 8 Measurement Summary Window 22 Card Icon ay image 23 Trackball Functionality Status Scroll 10 Measurement Calipers M amp A Measurement and Analysis 11 Measurement Results Window Position Size Scan Area Width and 12 Probe Identifier Exam Preset Tilt 3 46 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Chapter 4 Preparing for an Exam Describes how to begin an exam LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 4 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing for an Exam Introduction Beginning an Exam Begin an exam by entering new patient information The operator should enter as much information as possible such as 1 2 3 4 5 Dataflow Exam category Patient ID Patient n
210. e confidence that their diagnostic ultrasound system will produce consistently high quality images and quantitative information Therefore it is in the best interests of every ultrasound user to routinely monitor equipment performance The frequency of Quality Assurance evaluations should be based on user s specific needs and clinical practice Periodic monitoring is essential in order to detect the performance changes that occur through normal aging of system components Routine equipment evaluations may also reduce the duration of exams number of repeat exams and maintenance time required For details on system and peripheral routine preventive maintenance instructions See System Care and Maintenance on page 18 9 for more information 18 14 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Quality Assurance Typical Tests to Perform Quality assurance measurements provide results relating to system performance Typically these are e Axial Measurement Accuracy e Lateral Measurement Accuracy e Axial and Lateral Resolution e Penetration e Functional amp Contrast Resolution e Gray Scale Photography With these tests a performance baseline can be set at installation with the phantom in your department Future test results can be compared to the baseline in order to maintain a record of system performance trends Frequency of tests Quality assurance tests are used to determine whether a scanner is p
211. e the published specifications Keep power to these devices turned off when near this equipment Medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians patients and other people who may be around this equipment to fully comply with the above regulation Portable and mobile radio communications equipment e g two way radio cellular cordless telephones and similar equipment should be used no closer to any part of this system including cables than determined according to the following method LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 EMC Performance continued Safety Precautions Table 2 4 Portable and mobile radio communications equipment distance requirements Frequency Range Calculation Method Where d separation distance in meters P rated power of the transmitter V compliance value for 150 kHz 80 MHz 80 MHz 800 MHz d 3 5 V square root of P of P conducted RF E4 compliance value for radiated RF d 3 5 E square root 800 MHz 2 5 GHz d 7 E square root of P If the maximum transmitter power in watts is rated The separation distance in meters should be 5 2 6 2 6 5 2 20 5 2 5 2 10 5 100 12 0 12 0 24 0 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 2 15 Safety Notice upon Installation of Product Separation distance and effect from fixed radio communications equipment field strengt
212. e Ellipse control an ellipse with an initial circle shape displays e To position the ellipse and to size the measured axes move the calipers move the Trackball To increase the size adjust the Ellipse control upward e To decrease the size adjust the Ellipse control downward e To toggle between active calipers press Measure To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the measurement in the Results Window Before you complete the ellipse measurement To erase the ellipse and the current data measured press Clear once The original caliper is displayed to restart the measurement To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement press Clear a second time LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 25 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Fetal Trunk Area FTA continued 9 26 Trace 1 Select FTA a trace caliper displays 2 To position the trace caliper at the start point move the Trackball 3 To fix the trace start point press Set The trace caliper changes to an active caliper 4 To trace the measurement area move the Trackball around the anatomy A dotted line shows the traced area 5 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the measurement in the Results Window HINTS Before you complete the trace measurement To erase the line bit by bit back from its current point move the Trackball or adjust the Ellipse control downward To erase the dotted
213. e all unsaved data before the system shuts down or you may lose useful information Do not use an AC adapter without approval by GE Be sure that nothing rests on the AC adapter s power cable and that the cable is not located where it can be tripped over or stepped on Place the AC adapter in a ventilated area such as a desk when you use it to run LOGIQ Book Do not cover the AC adapter with paper or other items that will reduce cooling do not use the AC adapter inside a carrying case LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Console Overview Peripheral Accessory Connection Peripheral Accessory Connector Panel LOGIQ Book peripherals and accessories can be properly connected using the rear connector panel CAUTION Each outer case ground line of peripheral accessory connectors are Earth Grounded Signal ground lines are Not Isolated CAUTION Use only approved probes peripherals or accessories DO NOT connect any probes or accessories without approval by GE Figure 3 6 Peripheral Accessory Connector Panel 1 Port for DC In AC Adapter 2 2 USB Ports for digital B W printer color printer memory sticks footswitch CD RW and USB Lamp 3 PCMCIA Port for PC card network card and wireless card 4 SVGA Output Video Adapter CRT monitor Option is not supported LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 11 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Peripheral Accessory Connecto
214. e battery in water or allow it to get wet Do not put the battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container If the battery leaks or emits an odor remove it from all possible flammable sources If the battery emits an odor or heat is deformed or discolored or in a way appears abnormal during use recharging or storage immediately remove it and stop using it If you have any questions about the battery consult GE or your local representative Short term less than one month storage of battery pack e Store the battery in a temperature range between 0 C 32 F and 50 C 122 F Long term 3 months or more storage of battery pack e Store the battery in a temperature range between 10 C 50 F and 30 C 86 F When charging for the first time after long term storage recover such packs to original performance through repeating several cycles of full charging and discharging e When storing packs for more than 6 months charge the pack at least once during the 6 month timeframe to prevent leakage and deterioration in performance Use only GE recognized batteries LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Console Overview Battery continued View current When the system is running there is a battery icon in the system battery status status bar Frequency Grey Dynamic Range Image Rotate Focus Position Edge Enhance Updown Invert Focus Number Figure 3 3 Battery icon 1 Batter
215. e generic measurement 7 59 M Mode 9 34 A A 9 21 AIB ratio 9 27 Doppler measurements 7 73 generic measurement 7 65 M Mode measurements 9 34 Abdomen exam splenic measurements 12 5 12 6 12 7 Abdominal circumference AC 9 10 About System Utility screen 16 33 Acceleration 8 11 9 37 vascular measurement 11 20 Acceleration time AT OB GYN vessel measurement 8 17 9 37 vascular measurement 11 20 Accessories ordering 1 7 requesting a catalog 1 7 Accessory connector panel 3 11 Acclimation time 3 24 Accuracy clinical calculation 18 8 clinical measurement 18 6 Acoustic output 2 6 default levels 2 25 Admin overview of Utility screen 16 109 Admin screen Logon 16 113 System Admin 16 114 Users 16 110 administrator specifying system 16 110 AFI OB Measurements 9 79 9 27 ALARA as low as reasonably achievable 2 3 Amniotic fluid index AFI 9 19 9 27 Angle B Mode generic measurement 7 64 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Index Annotation Image 6 10 annotations applications 16 43 General tab 16 47 libraries 16 39 presets 16 39 Antero postero trunk diameter and transverse trunk diameter APTD TTD 9 21 Antero postero trunk diameter by transverse trunk diameter AxT 9 22 Application settings presets 16 52 applications annotations 16 43 body patterns 16 50 Area measurement ellips
216. e is designated by the prefix suffix E e Linear Array Linear Array probes are designated by the prefix suffix L the linear intra operative probes are designated by the prefix suffix I or T LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 17 19 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes and Biopsy Probe Naming Conventions 17 20 Table 17 6 Probe Naming Conventions TYPE B Biplane TEE C Convex CWD Pencil CWD E Endo TR TV l l shaped intra operative L Linear M Active Matrix Array P Multiplane TEE S Sector T T shaped intra Operative LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 LOGIQ Book Convex Probes Table 17 7 Curved Array Convex Probes Probe Discussion Probe Intended Uses Capabilities and Features Illustration 3C RS e General Purpose e Wide field of view e Penetration Good image uniformity CFM Doppler detectability Biopsy capability Contrast image capability E8C RS 8C e Transvaginal e Transrectal e Pediatrics Neonatal e Veterinary e Wide field of view Small headshell and probe shaft e CFM Doppler sensitivity Biopsy capability e Wide field of view Good image uniformity CFM Doppler detectability k p LOGIQ Book Linear Probes Table 17 8 Linear Array Probes e Small Parts e Vascular e Pediatrics case Long light cable e Wide field of
217. e past patient data confidential DO NOT use this feature Pre defined text directly In the Examination list window When selected the Insert text key launches pre defined text input When cleared the Insert text key opens the extended text field Examination List on Archive button When a patient is selected and the user selects Archive When selected opens the Examination list window for the selected patient When cleared opens the Patient Information window for the selected patient LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 16 97 Customizing Your System Table 16 62 Screens Preset Parameter Description Automatic generation In the Search Create Patient window When of patient ID selected the Patient ID is not required when entering a new patient in the archive The system automatically generates an ID number When cleared the Patient ID is required when entering a new patient in the archive Request When selected the user is asked to confirm action acknowledge of End when ending an examination Exam action Go directly to When selected the system goes directly to the scanning from search Scanning screen after the user selects or creates a patient record When cleared after you select or create a patient record the system displays the Patient information window for further information entry You must select Begin Exam to go to the scanning screen E
218. e spheroidal One ellipse d1 major axis d2 minor axis Volume spheroidal One distance d1 and one ellipse d2 major axis d3 minor axis r L 2 _3 gt a c c a S 4 5 une Figure 7 23 Volume Calculation Examples One distance Two distances Three distances One ellipse One distance and one ellipse a e WN gt LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 63 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Angle This function measures the angle between two intersecting planes 1 From the Generic Selection Menu select Angle The system displays an active caliper 2 To position the caliper move the Trackball 3 To fix the position of the first caliper press Set The system displays a second active caliper 4 To position the second caliper at the apex of the angle move the Trackball 5 To fix the position of the second caliper press Set The system displays a third active caliper 6 To position the third caliper move the Trackball 7 To complete the angle measurement press Set The system displays the angle in the Results Window NOTE To rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers adjust the Cursor Select control 7 64 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Generic Measurements AIB Ratio In B Mode you can calculate A B ratio by diameter or by area Diameter To calculate A B ratio by diameter 1 From the Generic Selection Menu select A B Ratio 2 Select rat
219. e system lists the measurement and its parameters in the Measurement section 5 When you create a new measurement the measurement name is automatically highlighted Type a name for the new measurement You can change the name of a measurement you created from a copy Eee 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 20 Tis 0 0 E8C RS 08 28 03 4 57 19 PM 6 08128103 4 55 13 PM adm apg OB 2 3 Obstetrics MI Generic Connectivity Measure About Admin amp op 2 3 a Penne MEASUREMENT amp ANALYSIS AC Hadlock M amp A Advanced l Doppler OB Table HC Hadlock Measurement menu 20 BPD Hadlock Add measurement Add folder 2 2 an sasaa x Delete measure and folder C MM Ft Mercer Factory Edit Cale Dop CRL Nelson BPD Paris Teramo CRL Paris Hame Faeroer mao V Fet Loc Side CRL Osaka Tool FL Paris Ft Paris TAD Paris Parameter___ Toolresut_ Unit Precision _ Method _ 0 Ci ee A BPD Jeanty HC Jeanty FL Jeanty USERDEFM39 CAPS start e Figure 7 17 Measurement amp Analysis Add measurement LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 31 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Adding a user defined measurement continued Defining After you add a measurement you can add parameters You measurement may also want to change parameters if you copied an existing parameters measurement See Changing or adding measurement parameters on page 7 32 for
220. e the color flow press Invert Color Invert In Triplex both Color Flow and Doppler Mode velocity scales are inverted Invert and non Invert Values vary by probe and application Invert values are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Allows you to view blood flow according to your personal preference Changes the Color Flow or Doppler spectrum baseline to accommodate higher velocity blood flow Minimizes aliasing by displaying a greater range of forward flow with respect to reverse flow or vice versa Baseline adjusts the alias point The default baseline is at the midpoint of the color display and at the midpoint of the color bar reference display To adjust the baseline adjust Baseline left right as necessary Zero velocity follows the baseline The total PRF range remains the same Values vary by probe and application Baseline values are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Unwraps the alias during color flow imaging Higher velocities can be displayed without reversal of colors LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 35 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Angle Steer Description Adjusting Values Benefits Bioeffects 5 36 You can slant the ROI of the Color Flow linear image left or right to get more information
221. e to hard disk factory default setting P2 key print the image factory default setting P3 key captures the screen factory default setting The function of the P1 P2 and P3 keys can be user defined LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Operator Controls Measurement and Annotation This group of controls performs various functions related to making measurements annotating and adjusting the image information e The Comment key enables the image text editor and displays the annotation library Selection Menu e The Clear key is generally used to erase or exit functions such as annotations comments measurements and zoom Pressing the Clear key again returns the system to the basic mode top menu e When the Ellipse control is pressed it activates the ellipse measurement function after the first distance measurement has been set and the second caliper is activated Press Set to fix the measurement after the ellipse adjustment is complete The measurement is then displayed in the measurement result window e When the Body Pattern control is pressed it enables the Body Pattern Selection Menu and displays the default pattern on the screen The Clear key is used to clear the body pattern e The Measure key is used in all types of basic measurements It also becomes the mouse arrow for making selections along with the Set key to fix or finish a selection When the Measure key is pressed the
222. earch from select appropriate database e Show all displays the entire patient list e More gives you options like moving images export import and DICOM properties e Delete use to remove the selected patient from the database 9 Press Register 10 Press Esc or Patient The patient informaiton is displayed on the title bar 4 6 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Beginning an Exam Changing Patient Information or an Exam If patient information needs to be edited pressing Patient on the control panel enables the Patient Screen for modifying information If the exam category needs to be changed pressing New Exam allows modification of the Patient Screen without erasing accumulated patient images measurements annotations calculations and worksheets 1 Display the Patient screen by pressing Patient on the control panel 2 Select patient from the Patient list The system automatically searches to see if the patient is already in the database e Select Search key by choosing one of the following Patient ID First Name Last Name Birthdate Sex or Exam Date e Enter search string for example initial letter of Patient Name e Select the database in the From box There are two choices searching the entire database list or searching the list currently displayed Br tal patient ID ma Search string Sot Search from es _PatientiD_ Lasttame Firsttlame Birthdate Sex LastExam 10 0
223. eath c Probe Body 5 Rub a finger over the tip of the probe to ensure all air bubbles have been removed 6 Ifa biopsy is to be performed snap the metal or plastic biopsy guide on to the probe over the sheath LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 17 37 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes and Biopsy Preparation continued 7 Place an adequate amount of ultrasound gel on the gel filled sheath tip s outer surface Figure 17 26 Civco Disposable Biopsy Guide 5 Angle 8 Ensure the guide is properly seated and secure by pushing forward on the needle insertion end of the guide until the attachment node is firmly in place in it s hole 17 38 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Chapter 18 User Maintenance This chapter supplies system data assistance information and system care and maintenance instructions LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 18 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 User Maintenance system Data LOGIQ Book Features Specifications Table 18 1 Physical Attributes Physical Attributes Dimensions and Weight e Height 78 mm 3 07 in console only 99 5 mm 3 92 in with handle e Width 350 mm 13 73 in Depth 280 mm 11 in console only 320 mm 12 6 in with handle e Weight approx 4 2 kg 9 2 Ib without batttery Keyboard Keyboard width Minimum 305 mm and Maximum 336 mm e Keyboard Height Minimum 245 mm and Maximum 271 mm Ergonomic intuitive key layout
224. ed unfreeze and move to the second quadrant 4 After you obtain the image press Freeze and then Measure The system prompts you to continue with the AFI measurements LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 19 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Amniotic Fluid Index AFI continued 5 Perform a standard distance measurement for the second third and fourth quadrants see step 2 When all four quadrants have been measured the system calculates the AFI and displays it in the Results Window HINTS e Ifyou unfreeze the image after doing an AFI measurement the system does not delete the previous measurements Unfreeze and change scan planes as necessary e To specify that an unassigned distance measurement be used for an AFI measurement Select AFI e Press Measure e Move the Trackball to highlight the unassigned distance measurement in the Results Window Select the AFI measurement on the Selection Menu e Ifthe fluid in a pocket is zero set the second caliper on top of the first one to give it a zero value 9 20 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Measurements and Calculations AIB Ratio In B Mode you can calculate A B ratio by diameter or by area See A B Ratio on page 7 65 for more information Angle See Angle on page 7 64 for more information Antero Postero Trunk Diameter amp Transverse Trunk Diameter APTD TTD J Sys es SZ KK OF Make two distance measur
225. ed in the column eg GE Medical Systems MI 0 6 Tis 0 0 3C RS 09 03 03 3 29 03 PM F6 99103103 3 23 46 PM adm b aeleein Carotid Right Left 2 Method 2 Method Prox CCA PS ED Prox ICA PS ED Carotid MD LEA LEV AT TCD UEA UEV Meas Transf Measure Page Change Modani Vessel Wksheet Vessel Summary Generic Intrav Ratio Delete Value Exit start e Figure 11 13 Pop up menu of methods Vascular Examiner s Comments To type a comment on a worksheet 1 Select Examiner s Comments The Examiner s Comments window opens 2 Type comments about the exam 3 To close the Examiner s Comments window select Examiner s Comments ae ee GE Medical Systems MI0 6 Tis 0 0 3C RS 09 03 03 3 20 12 PM Uc J09 03 03 3 12 14 PM adm b 1 1 Carotid Right Left 2 Method 2 Method Prox CCA PS Avg HR Avg Prox ICA PS ED Carotid MD FEA Examiner s Comments LEV TCD UEA UEY Meas Transf Measure Mode PW cere Exclude Value Exam s Commts Exit start e Figure 11 14 Examiner s comment field 11 30 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Intravessel ratio To calculate Intravessel ratio you need a measurement of accessing pressure and stenotic velocities 1 Select Intravessel to display the pop up window in the header section of the worksheet a 1 1 9g GE Medical Systems MI 0 6 Tis 0 0 3C RS 09 03 03 3 30 02 PM JO 09103103 3 23 46 PM adm b 1 1
226. ed value NOTE If the user move the cursor to the edited value and press Set key once the value is back again before edit Vascular Worksheet To edit a worksheet continued To delete data Delete Value key is used to delete value each measured value Whenever particular value is deleted the group set of the measurement study value is also deleted from the worksheet as a group set When PS value is deleted ED and RI is also deleted if this value was measured as the set of RI measurement 1 Select Worksheet from any page of the Vascular Calculation Selection Menu Menu 2 To position the cursor at the field you want to delete or exclude move the Trackball The field is highlighted 3 Select Delete Value For Example 1 If the user measured RI 4 times however latest 3 set of measurements were displayed in the worksheet Result Number 2 3 4 PS 0 500 0 600 0 700 ED 0 100 0 200 0 300 RI 0 800 0 667 0 571 1 Then the user deleted PS value of 3 from the worksheet 2 The whole set of 3 measurements is deleted from the worksheet and 1 set of measurements is shifted and displayed as below Result Number 1 2 4 PS 0 400 0 500 0 700 ED 0 000 0 100 0 300 RI 1 000 0 800 0 571 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 11 27 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 To edit a worksheet continued To exclude data When the user selects a particular value on the
227. ee flow in a broad area Color Flow allows visualization of flow in the whole image whereas Doppler Mode provides spectral information in a smaller area Color Flow is also sometimes used as a stepping stone to Doppler You use Color Flow to locate flow and vessels prior to activating Doppler 5 26 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing Color Flow Exiting Color Flow To exit Color Flow press CF LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 27 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Activating Power Doppler Imaging PDI To activate PDI 1 Press PDI The color flow window appears over the B Mode image Move the Trackball to move the CF window To exit press PDI or select a new mode Uses Power Doppler Imaging is a color flow mapping technique used to map the strength of the Doppler signal coming from the flow rather than the frequency shift of the signal Using this technique the ultrasound system plots color flow based on the number of blood cells that are moving regardless of their velocity Because it does not map velocity it is not subject to the aliasing 5 28 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Color Flow and Power Doppler Displays 1 1 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 9 Tis 0 3 3C RS 09 02 03 9 25 34 AM Fo J09102103 9 25 34 AM sclenie Renal Ca B Fra 4 0 MHz Lefi 68 E A 2 2 Map KO D 11 0 cm DR 81 FR 7 Hz AO 100 255 255 35 5 35 5 s Freq
228. elect Off Setting up Auto e Selecting Auto Trace Vascular You can select to have a continuous auto trace of the max or Calculation mean velocities Parameters e Select Max or Mean using the Trace Method Selection Menu e Selecting Trace Detection Trace Detection lets you specify the peak timeline data used for the cardiac cycle identification Indicate whether cardiac cycle detection and therefore cardiac cycle identification should use peak timeline data above below or composite above and below the baseline e Select Positive Negative or Both to set the peak timeline data e Modify Calculation a Select the Modify Calc Selection Menu key The Modify Calculation menu is displayed b Select which measurements and calculations are to be displayed in the Auto Vascular calculation window You can select the following parameter PS ED MD HR TAMAX PI RI Accel PS ED ED PS AT Volume Flow PV LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 11 13 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Auto Vascular Calculation continued Auto Vascular Calculation Exam Preset the system Perform the scan and press Freeze 3 Activate Auto Vascular Calculation N The system performs a calculation automatically The Auto Vascular calculation is assigned to particular vessel measurements 4 Press Measure to display the Measurement menu 5 Select the location of the vessel Prox Mid or Dist and Side Right or Left 6 Select the
229. ements one of the antero postero a ea trunk diameter and one of the transverse trunk diameter 1 Select APTD_TTD an active caliper displays 2 Make a distance measurement of the antero postero trunk diameter a To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball b To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper c To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points d To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the distance value in the Results Window and displays an active caliper 3 To make a distance measurement of the transverse trunk diameter repeat steps a d above The system displays the antero postero trunk diameter and the transverse trunk diameter in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 21 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Antero PosteroTrunk Diameter by Transverse Trunk Diameter AxT Roy Fw OOe O0OO 9 22 gt N QLC no Make two distance measurements one of the antero postero trunk diameter and one of the transverse trunk diameter 1 Select AxT an active caliper displays 2 Make a distance measurement of the antero postero trunk diameter a To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second
230. ements and studies 7 15 7 36 7 38 Utility screens Admin 16 109 Annotations 16 39 Connectivity 16 57 System 16 4 About 16 33 Utility tab overview of functionality 16 3 V Vascular Worksheet 11 23 Editing 11 26 Vascular Calculation manual measurements selecting 11 18 Vascular measurements acceleration 11 20 acceleration time 11 20 end diastole peak systole ratio D S 11 21 minimum diastole 11 21 peak systole 11 21 peak systole end diastole ratio S D 11 21 Vascular measurments end diastole 11 21 Velocity Doppler measurements 7 45 verify removable media 16 100 service connected to network 16 107 Volume B Mode generic measurement 7 61 Index 7 Index WwW Warning icon 2 2 Word Wrap 6 13 Worklist DICOM search criteria 16 79 Worksheet OB 9 40 to change data 7 56 to view 7 54 Index 8 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5
231. enal To change an exam calc Move the Trackball to the Selection Menu and select the desired calcs folder A vascular study is a group of the particular vessels You can customize the vessel exam calcs in the configuration menu See Measurement and Calculation Setup on page 7 14 for more information When you use Auto Vascular calculation you use the vessel keys on the Selection Menu to post assign vascular calculations When you are not using Auto Vascular calculation the vessel key is used for manual measurement LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 B Mode Measurements 09 03 03 2 49 36 PM 09 03 03 2 49 36 PM adm 1 1 Adult B Fra 4 0 MHz Lefi 50 EA 12 E Map G 0 D 17 0 cm DR 81 FR 29 Hz A0 100 ETN Medical Systems MI 0 4 Tis 0 1 3C RS Sm Vascular Generic Volume Angle Worksheet Display M carotid Mica Mev Mico E UEA uey ta Renal Menu ee Th sas ee Delete WENA Active Measure e a a Cursor Select A Mode 2D ade 20 Volume Angle V start w M amp A Figure 11 2 B Mode Selection Menu NOTE The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze Stenosis See Stenosis on page 7 59 for more information Volume See Volume on page 7 61 for more information AIB Ratio See A B Ratio on page 7 65 for more information M Mode Measurements 09 03 03 2 50 58 PM
232. ence mitral Valve Available folders and measureme Ma Biplane Miava OG Modified Simpson OG cuberteicholz O Single Plane A4C OG Single Plane A2c O Single Plane LAX OA Bullet OG Biplane Ellipse OGLA volume OGRA Volume Mirviv CAPS start e Figure 7 10 Available folders and measurements check boxes 7 22 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Using folders 08 28 03 4 47 32 PM Obstetrics MM Generic amp oB 2 3 AFI Q1 AFI Q2 AFI Q3 AFI Q4 CAPS start LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Measurement and Calculation Setup When you select a folder in the Selection menu the system displays all folders and measurements that are in the folder A folder can indicate a study or can indicate a measurement group that contains related measurements For example a calculation such as OB Amniotic Fluid Index AFI requires four measurements one of each quadrant The AFI folder contains four measurements See Figure 7 11 ENI Medical Systems MI 0 18 Tis 0 0 E8C RS 08 28 03 4 31 46 PM adm Gyn Connectivity Measure About Admin HAS Factory Edit Cale Dop m Folder Hame Available folders and measureme MEASUREMENT amp ANALYSIS M amp A Advancea Doppler OB Table Measurement menu x Delete measure and folder C MM s AFI Moore JV Auto sequence Figure 7 11 AFI Folder 7 23 General Measurements an
233. ent 8 12 9 38 vascular measurement 11 21 M Mode general measurements 7 57 M Mode imaging changing presets 16 34 M Mode measurements 9 34 generic 7 66 GYN exam 9 74 OB 9 34 time interval 7 52 tissue depth 7 57 Monitor 18 11 speakers 3 31 Moving the system 3 18 during transport 3 20 precautions 3 19 Multiple fetuses 9 59 fetal trending 9 64 identifying 9 60 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 on OB worksheet 9 63 N network viewing structure of 16 105 O OB exam 9 2 Graph 9 44 Selection 9 45 identifying multiple fetuses 9 60 measurements 9 8 patient data 9 4 studies 8 3 9 7 OB exam start 9 4 OB graphs 9 44 fetal growth bar graph 9 55 fetal growth curve graph 9 46 how to view 9 45 patient data 9 54 OB measurements 9 33 AIB ratio 9 21 abdominal circumference AC 9 10 amniotic fluid index 9 20 amniotic fluid index AFI 9 19 antero postero trunk diameter and transverse trunk diameter APTD TTD 9 27 antero postero trunk diameter by transverse trunk diameter 9 22 biparietal diameter 9 13 B Mode 9 10 cardio thoracic area ratio 9 23 crown rump length 9 13 Doppler mode 9 35 estimated fetal weight 9 24 femur length 9 14 fetal trunk area 9 25 foot length 9 28 gestational sac 9 15 head circumference 9 16 humerus length 9 29 M Mode 9 34 OB GYN vessels 9 35 occipitofrontal diameter 9
234. ent data 16 24 CAUTION NOTE To minimize accidental loss of data perform backup of the patient archives stored on the local hard drive DAILY as described in this section Use a formatted Backup Restore disk to back up patient archives from the hard drive using the backup procedure described in this section Data from the Backup Restore disk may be restored to the local hard drive using the restore procedure The restore procedure overwrites the existing database on the local hard drive To perform backup and restore procedures you must login with administrator privileges LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Presets Backup procedure patient data 1 Insert a formatted CD into the CD RW drive NOTE For information about formatting a CD See Formatting removable media on page 16 100 for more information 2 On the keyboard press Utility Select System 4 Onthe monitor display select Backup Restore The Backup Restore screen is displayed NOTE If you are not logged in with administrator privileges the Operator Login window is displayed Log on with administrator privileges go 5 In the Backup list select Patient Archive and Report Archive 6 In the Media field select CD 7 Select Backup The system performs the backup As it proceeds status information is displayed on the Backup Restore screen LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 25 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5
235. ent of the inner area of the blood vessel To erase an open trace move the Trackball Press Set The system displays a second trace caliper Make a trace measurement of the outer area of the blood vessel The system displays the two area measurements and percent stenosis in the Results Window See Circumference and area trace measurement on page 7 44 for more information LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Generic Measurements Volume The volume calculation can be made from any of the following measurements e One distance e Two distances e Three distances One ellipse e One distance and one ellipse For details on how to make a distance measurement See Distance measurement on page 7 40 for more information For details on how to make an ellipse measurement See Circumference and area ellipse measurement on page 7 42 for more information NOTE IMPORTANT If you want to make a volume calculation using one or two distances you must select Volume BEFORE you make the measurements To make a volume calculation using one or two distances 1 Select Volume 2 Make one or two distance measurements 3 Select Volume The system displays the distances and the volume in the Results Window To make a volume calculation using three distances 1 Make three distance measurements NOTE Three distances should be done in the dual format mode side by side images One measuremen
236. equirements for Safety e IEC EN 60601 1 1 Safety requirements for medical electrical systems e IEC EN 60601 1 2 Electromagnetic compatibility Requirements and tests IEC EN 60601 1 4 Programmable electrical medical systems e IEC 61157 Declaration of acoustic output parameters International Organization of Standards ISO e ISO 10993 1 Biological evaluation of medical devices Underwriters Laboratories Inc UL an independent testing laboratory e UL2601 1 Medical Electrical Equipment Part 1 General Requirements for Safety Canadian Standards Association CSA e CSA 22 2 601 1 Medical Electrical Equipment Part 1 General Requirements for Safety NEMA AIUM Acoustic Output Display Standard NEMA US 3 1998 Medical Device Good Manufacturing Practice Manual issued by the FDA Food and Drug Administration Department of Health USA General Electric Medical Systems is ISO 9001 and EN 46001 certified Original Documentation 1 iv The original document was written in English LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Table of Contents Table of Contents Conformance Standards 1 iii Certifications 1 iv Original Documentation 1 iv Chapter 1 Introduction Attention 1 2 Documentation
237. er Manual 18 21 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 User Maintenance Lateral distance measurements 18 22 Description Benefit Method Procedure Lateral measurements are distance measurements obtained perpendicular to the axis of the sound beam See Figure 18 1 for more information The purpose is the same as vertical measurements Precisely spaced horizontal pin targets are scanned and results compared to the known distance in the phantom Lateral distance should be measured in the near mid and far fields as well as in zoom If necessary different depths of fields of view can be tested To measure lateral distance 1 Scan a test phantom with precisely spaced horizontal pin targets Adjust all scan controls as necessary for the best image of the pin targets from side to side Press Freeze to stop image acquisition and perform a standard distance measurement between the pins at different points in the image Record all images for archiving Scan the horizontal pins in zoom or at different depth scale factors Press Freeze to stop image acquisition repeat the distance measurements between pins and record the images for archiving Document the measurements for reference and future comparison Contact a Service Engineer if horizontal measurements differ by more than 3mm or 3 of that depth whichever is greater LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Axial resolution Descprition Benef
238. erts the spectral trace without affecting the baseline position To invert the spectral trace press Invert The plus and minus signs on the velocity scale reverse when the spectrum is inverted Positive velocities display below the baseline and to the left speaker as you face the system Positive velocities display below the baseline Forward reverse The trace corresponds to flow direction positive flow is forward flow toward the probe or negative flow is reverse flow away from the probe The invert setting is returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient In Triplex both Color Flow and Doppler Mode velocity scales are inverted If you change the probe angle to accommodate anatomy blood flow still moves in the same direction but the Doppler information will be reversed It is easier in cases like this to invert the spectrum instead of reversing the probe orientation The polarity of Doppler Audio is also reversed LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Dynamic Range Description Adjusting Values Benefits Affect on other controls Optimizing Spectral Doppler Dynamic range controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray thereby increasing the range of contrast you can adjust You access Doppler dynamic range from the Doppler Mode Selection Menu Each click cycles you to the next setting
239. es HINTS DO NOT use the following special characters when saving images slash dash or asterisk 15 22 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Other Printing Options Other Printing Options Connecting to a Standard Computer Printer You can now connect a standard computer printer via the USB connection Service NOTE You can connect a different printer if you have the driver for it on a CD ROM inf file 1 Connect the printer to the USB port at the back of the system in the Service port 2 Install the driver if necessary Please refer to the Basic Service Manual for more information 3 Set the printer as the default printer LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 15 23 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Recording Images Connecting to a Standard Computer Printer continued 4 Assign one of the print keys to the standard printer via Utility gt Connectivity gt Buttons gt Select Destinations and select Standard Print My Computer This allows you to print the screen by pressing the print screen key The system automatically determines the portion of the screen to print based upon what is currently displayed Figure 15 13 Print Button Example 15 24 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Other Printing Options Connecting to a Standard Computer Printer continued 5 Bring up the worksheet you want to print on the
240. es all structures outside the marked region The region in the rendered image is marked with the right Set key To define the contour of the region press the right Set key for each vertex To close the contour double click the right Set key As long as a contour is not closed it can be traced back with the left Set key The cut out process can be undone by the Undo Last function As soon as the Apply button is pressed a new dataset is generated Gray Surface Activates the gray surface rendering mode It leads to a transparent appearance of the object generated by displaying only a surrounding shell of structures Texture Activates the texture or photorealistic rendering mode It creates a photorealistic appearance of the object The shading depends on the orientation of the surface of the object If both Texture and Gray Surface mode are switched on the mixture percentage of both modes can be defined Render Changes between the rendered image view and the view of a volume of interest The volume of interest shows the acquired ultrasound images transformed into an isotropic rectangular coordinate system The volume of interest can be manipulated as described above Threshold Opacity Threshold defines which gray values are used for rendering and which are considered noise Opacity defines how strict Threshold is used for discrimination A low opacity value creates a firmer appearance of the surface A high opacity value
241. ess Time Resolution 1 3 Time Resolution 3 high smooths the Timeline Time Resolution 1 low increases the time resolution image not as smooth 5 57 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Modify Auto Calcs Description Activates the menu to select which calculations are automatically calculated Adjusting Press Modify Auto Calcs to activate Modify Auto Calcs Selection Menu Benefits Provides flexibility 5 58 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Using 3D Using 3D Overview WARNING DO NOT scan any pacemaker patient using the sensor device The magnetic fields emitted from the device may interfere with the pacemaker operation LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 59 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image 3D Acquisition Acquiring a 3D Scan To acquire a 3D scan Optimize the B Mode image Ensure even gel coverage Press the 3D control panel key Two screens appear Set appropriate values for Acq Mode and Scan Plane Also set the scan distance before scanning To start acquiring the image press L the left split screen key To perform a parallel scan scan evenly To perform a sweep fan scan rock the probe once Note the distance of the scan The 3D volume of interest VOI is dynamically assembled on the right side of the screen If the image stops before you re done scanning start acquiring the 3D volume of interest again To complete the
242. et The system displays a second active caliper To position the second caliper at early systolic peak move the Trackball To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the acceleration time and acceleration in the Results Window Select AT The system displays an active caliper and a vertical dotted line To position the caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the first caliper press Set The system displays a second active caliper To position the caliper at the end point move the Trackball To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the acceleration time in the Results Window Heart Rate This measurement is available in the Fetal Heart study and the OB GYN Vessel study See Heart Rate on page 7 68 for more information LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 37 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Peak Systole PS End Diastole ED or Minimum Diastole MD To calculate the peak systole end diastole or minimum diastole 1 PS ED or ED PS Ratio Select PS ED or MD The system displays an active caliper with vertical and horizontal dotted lines To position the caliper at the measurement point move the Trackball To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the peak systole end diastole or minimum diastole in the Results Window To calculate the Peak Systole End Diastole ratio or End Diastole Peak Systole ratio 1 9 38
243. etailed under the Bioeffects portion of each control in the Optimizing the Image chapter Always observe the Acoustic Output display for possible effects Best practices while scanning optimization with controls that have no effect on Acoustic HINTS Raise the Acoustic Output only after attempting image a Output such as Gain and TGC NOTE Refer to the sections of the Optimizing the Image chapter for a complete discussion of each control WARNING Be sure to have read and understood control explanations for each mode used before attempting to adjust the Acoustic Output control or any control that can effect Acoustic Output Acoustic Use the minimum necessary acoustic output to get the best diagnostic image L Output or measurement during an examination Begin the exam with the probe that Hazard provides an optimum focal depth and penetration Acoustic Output Default Levels In order to assure that an exam does not start at a high output level the LOGIQ Book initiates scanning at a reduced default output level This reduced level is preset programmable and depends upon the exam category and probe selected It takes effect when the system is powered on or New Patient is selected LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 2 25 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Warning Label Locations LOGIQ Book warning labels are provided in English Console Labels A A Ol At CAUTION United States law restricts this device to s
244. ev 5 2 11 Safety Label Icon Description continued Classifications Type of protection against electric shock e Class Equipment AC Adapter 1 e Class Il Equipment LOGIQ Book Console 2 Degree of protection against electric shock Type BF Applied part 3 for Probes marked with BF symbol Continuous Operation System is Ordinary Equipment IPX0 Footswitch is IPX1 1 Class Equipment EQUIPMENT in which protection against electric shock does not rely on BASIC INSULATION only but includes a protective earth ground This additional safety precaution prevents exposed metal parts from becoming LIVE in the event of an insulation failure 2 Class Il Equipment EQUIPMENT in which protection against electric shock does not rely on BASIC INSULATION only but in which additional safety precautions such as DOUBLE INSULATION or REINFORCED INSULATION are provided 3 Type BF Applied Part TYPE B APPLIED PART providing a specified degree of protection against electric shock with particular regard to allowable LEAKAGE CURRENT Table 2 3 Type BF Equipment Normal Mode Single fault condition Patient leakage current Less than 100 microA Less than 500 microA 2 12 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Precautions EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility NOTE NOTE NOTE NOTE EMC Performance This equipment generates uses and can radiate ra
245. fic controls Figure 3 30 Selection Menu Controls Different menus are displayed depending on which Selection Menu is selected The Selection Menu con up down two button softkeys associated with it The functionality of these controls change depending upon the currently displayed menu NOTE LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 41 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Mode Display and Record This group of controls provides various functions relating to the display mode display orientation image recording saving freeze gain and Cine scroll The Mode Controls select the desired display mode or combinations of display modes NOTE 3 42 During dual display modes the L and R keys activate the Left or Right displayed image B Pause freezes the B Mode image while keeping the Doppler spectrum display active The Auto keys are used to e initiate auto optimize e turn off the auto mode Depth controls the image display depth The Reverse key toggles the left right orientation of the scan image Record keys are used to activate print the designated recording device e g video page printer multi image camera image archive option The Freeze key is used to stop the acquisition of ultrasound data and freeze the image in system memory Pressing Freeze a second time continues live image data acquisition To activate a specific mode press the appropriate mode key P1 key saves the imag
246. flows select from a list of currently existing dataflows and remove a dataflow 2 Services Display add or remove services for the selected dataflow 3 Selected Service Display and select Role for the service currently selected in the Services section 16 90 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity Dataflow continued Table 16 60 Dataflow Preset Parameter Description Name Select the dataflow from the list Direct Search Select whether to search through all patients or today s patients only Default Select to use this dataflow as the default dataflow when you start the system Direct Store Select to store data directly to archive no buffer storage Hidden Select to Select Service Select the services to associate to the selected dataflow The system displays the following information about the service NameTypeDestination Device the device the service was configured for Dir direction input output or both I1 O Role the priority of the service See the following description of Role Role Select the priority of the service Primary first priority can be assigned to input output or 1 O services Secondary second priority can be assigned to input output or O services Primary output allows primary assignment to an output service even if an I O service is already defined as primary You can have a primary out with
247. for intra cavitary and intra operative procedures Use of legally marketed sterile pyrogen free probe sheaths is REQUIRED for neurological intra operative procedures Instructions Custom made sheaths are available for each probe Each probe sheath kit consists of a flexible sheath used to cover the probe and cable and elastic bands used to secure the sheath Sterile probe sheaths are supplied as part of biopsy kits for those probes intended for use in biopsy procedures In addition to the sheath and elastic bands there are associated accessories for performing a biopsy procedure which are included in the kit Refer to the biopsy instructions for the specific probes in the Discussion section of this chapter for further information Reordering To reorder sheaths See Ultrasound Probe and Cord Sheath Sets on page 18 34 for more information CAUTION Devices containing latex may cause severe allergic reaction in latex sensitive individuals Refer to FDA s March 29 1991 Medical Alert on latex products CAUTION Do not use pre lubricated condoms as a sheath In some cases they may damage the probe Lubricants in these condoms may not be compatible with probe construction CAUTION DO NOT use an expired probe sheath Before using probe sheaths verify whether the term of validity has expired 17 10 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probe Overview E8C Probe Handling Precautions If the sterilization sol
248. fore you complete the ellipse measurement To erase the ellipse and the current data measured press Clear once The original caliper is displayed to restart the measurement To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement press Clear a second time LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Measurements and Calculations Abdominal Circumference AC continued Trace 1 Select AC an active caliper displays If necessary select AC until Trace is displayed above the key To position the trace caliper move the Trackball To fix the trace start point press Set The trace caliper changes to an active caliper To trace the measurement area move the Trackball around the anatomy To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the circumference in the Results Window HINTS Before you complete the ellipse measurement To erase the line bit by bit back from its current point move the Trackball or adjust the Ellipse control downward To erase the dotted line but not the trace caliper press Clear once To clear the trace caliper and the current data measured press Clear twice LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 11 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Abdominal Circumference AC continued Two distances HINTS 9 12 1 Select AC an active caliper displays If necessary select AC until Caliper is displayed above the key To make the first dista
249. form exams Detailed information is also provided for more thorough studies Getting started These sections give an overview of the system to help the operator start scanning Introduction Information concerning indications contraindications for use whom to contact and how the documentation is organized Safety Important information concerning the safe operation of the LOGIQ Book system Preparing the System for Use How to prepare the system for use and a map of the control layout Preparing for an Exam How to enter patient information select an exam category and application preset Image optimization These sections detail how to improve image trace or spectral information Optimizing the Image How to adjust and optimize the image in various modes Scanning and Display Functions Information concerning Zoom Freeze Cine Annotation and iLing features LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 How This Book is Organized Manual Content continued e Measurements and Reports Shows how to do general and exam category specific measurements and calculations e General Measurements and Calculations Emphasis on basic measurements for each mode e Abdomen e Small Parts e OB GYN Cardiology e Vascular e Urology e Pediatric e Report Generation Shows how to personalize the reporting package e Recording Images Data management e Customizing Your System Shows how to customize the
250. g Data Between Ultrasound Systems 15 16 Daily Maintenance 15 20 Notes 15 22 Connecting to a Standard Computer Printer 15 23 External Printers 15 25 Chapter 16 Customizing Your System Overview 16 2 Overview 16 4 Changing system parameters 16 4 System General Preset Menu 16 5 System System Imaging Preset Menu 16 16 System System Measure Preset Menu 16 18 System Backup and Restore Preset Menu 16 21 System Peripherals Preset Menu 16 30 System About Preset Menu 16 33 Overview 16 34 Changing imaging presets 16 35 LOGIQ Book Imaging Presets 16 36 Overview 16 39 Annotations Libraries Libraries Preset Menu 16 39 Annotations Libraries Annotations Preset Menu 16 41 Annotations Libraries Applications Preset Menu 16 43 Overview 16 46 Body Pattern Lib
251. g the System for Use Acclimation Time After being transported the unit requires one hour for each 2 5 increment its temperature is below 10 C or above 40 C Table 3 2 System Acclimation Time Chart C 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 oF 140 131 122 113 104 95 86 77 68 59 50 hours 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 F 41 32 23 14 5 4 13 22 31 40 hours 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 3 24 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Powering the System Power On CAUTION Press the top portion of the Power On Off switch to turn the power on Figure 3 19 Power On Off Switch Location LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 25 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use LED 3 26 Figure 3 20 LED Indicators Indicates hard disk working status When the LED is flashing the system is writing or reading from the hard disk Color Green Indicates power status After pressing the Power On Off switch the system power is on and this LED is lit Color Green Indicates battery status When the battery is charged the LED is green When battery power is low the LED is orange Color Green and Orange Indicates Standby mode status When the system is in hibernate mode the LED is lit Color Green LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Powering the System Power Up Seq
252. general measurements 7 45 generic study 7 69 E Edit exam category 4 7 patient information 4 7 EFW growth percentile OB worksheet 9 43 Electrical configurations 3 3 Electrical hazard 2 8 Electromagnetic compatiblity EMC 2 13 Ellipse measurement general 7 42 EMC electromagnetic compatiblity 2 13 End diastole ED OB GYN vessel measurement 8 72 9 38 vascular measurement 11 21 End diastole peak systole ratio D S OB GYN vessel measurement 8 73 9 38 Vascular measurement 11 21 Endometrium thickness Endo GYN exam 9 71 Environmental requirements 3 4 probes 17 8 Equipment safety 2 8 Erasing measurements 7 13 Estimated fetal weight EFW 9 24 Exam definition of terms 7 3 OB 9 2 workflow 7 3 Exam study display location 3 46 Exam workflow example 7 4 Explosion hazard 2 8 F Features physical attributes 78 2 Federal law USA requirements 1 6 Femur length FL 9 14 Fetal growth bar graph 9 44 9 55 Fetal growth curve graph 9 44 description 9 47 example 9 46 how to select 9 48 multiple fetus 9 62 quad view 9 49 Fetal heart study 9 37 Fetal trending fetal growth curve graph 9 57 multiple fetuses 9 64 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Fetal trunk area FTA 9 25 Fetus select on an OB worksheet 9 41 to enter number of 9 59 Fetus Compare multiple fetus 9 62 Focal zone display location 3 46 F
253. gure footswitch pedal as B Pause key LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Overview There are different test patterns available Gray Bars Color Bars Resolution Text Monitor Calibration White Gray Red Green and Blue Table 16 39 Available Test Patterns Brightness Calibration To calibrate the monitor 1 Select Calibration from the Test Pattern Utility Selection Menu The test pattern consists of a small box inside a larger box NOTE Calibrate the monitor in a dim room Calibration White Figure 16 32 Brightness Calibration Test Pattern 2 Press the Brightness Contrast control on the front of the monitor 3 Set the Contrast at 50 4 Setthe Brightness at 100 Then slowly decrease the Brightness until the inner box is no longer visible Please note that the monitor response to this adjustment lags behind the button push NOTE After you calibrate the monitor you may need to adjust peripheral settings Configuring Connectivity Configuring Connectivity Overview You use Connectivity functionality to set up the connection and communication protocols for the ultrasound system This page gives an overview of each of the Connectivity functions Each function is described in detail in the following pages LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 57 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Connectivity Functions To set up your institution s connectivity you
254. h emer 4 oa prote he LE To measure crown rump length make one distance measurement a rump length CRL Select CRL an active caliper displays To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement press Set Disinfecting probes Dies mearreee The system displays the crown rump length in the Results Window gener Doppler measurements A B ratio D S ratio Figure 6 12 Index Other Help Features To hide the left side of the screen press the Hide icon at the upper left hand portion of the screen To view the left side of the screen again press the Show icon at the upper left hand portion of the screen To size the Help window position and hold down the cursor at the corner of the screen while moving the Trackball To move the Help window to the Selection Menu display position and hold down the cursor at the very top of the Help window while moving the Trackball to the Selection Menu display Exiting Online Help To exit Online Help press the X in the upper right hand corner of the Online Help window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 6 25 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Scanning Display Functions CD ROM Accessing Document
255. h Use 1 Disconnect the probe from the ultrasound console and remove all coupling gel from the probe by wiping with a soft cloth and rinsing with flowing water 2 Wash the probe with mild soap in lukewarm water Scrub the probe as needed using a soft sponge gauze or cloth to remove all visible residue from the probe surface Prolonged soaking or scrubbing with a soft bristle brush such as a toothbrush may be necessary if material has dried onto the probe surface 3 Rinse the probe with enough clean potable water to remove all visible soap residue 4 Air dry or dry with a soft cloth LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 17 13 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes and Biopsy Cleaning probes continued E8C RS 10Lb RS 8L RS UM Ner 1 2 3 Figure 17 5 Probe Immersion Levels 1 Fluid Level 2 Aperature 3 Contact face within Patient Environment 17 14 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Disinfecting probes Perform After Each Use WARNING CAUTION Probe Overview Ultrasound probes can be disinfected using liquid chemical germicides The level of disinfection is directly related to the duration of contact with the germicide Increased contact time produces a higher level of disinfection Cidex and Sporox are the only germicides approved by GE Medical Systems for Ultrasound probe disinfecting purposes 2 Glutaraldehyde based solutions have been shown to be very effec
256. h and all translations Paper documentation may be ordered by using a form in the Quick Guide The LOGIQ Book manuals are written for users who are familiar with basic ultrasound principles and techniques They do not include sonographic training or detailed clinical procedures LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 1 3 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Introduction Principles of Operation 1 4 Medical ultrasound images are created by computer and digital memory from the transmission and reception of mechanical high frequency waves applied through a transducer The mechanical ultrasound waves spread through the body producing an echo where density changes occur For example in the case of human tissue an echo is created where a signal passes from an adipose tissue fat region to a muscular tissue region The echoes return to the transducer where they are converted back into electrical signals These echo signals are highly amplified and processed by several analog and digital circuits having filters with many frequency and time response options transforming the high frequency electrical signals into a series of digital image signals which are stored in memory Once in memory the image can be displayed in real time on the image monitor All signal transmission reception and processing characteristics are controlled by the main computer By selection from the system control panel the user can alter the characteristics and features of the sys
257. he B Mode images anatomy To visualize deeper structures increase the depth If there is a large part of the display which is unused at the bottom decrease the depth Each adjustment cycles you to the next Depth setting Imaging and display parameters adjust automatically To increase decrease adjust Depth You can reverse how the Depth control functions on the Utility gt System gt General page Depth increments vary by probe and application Depth displays on the monitor in centimeters Depth values are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calc or New Patient Depth adjusts your field of view It increases your field of view to look at larger or deeper structures it decreases your field of view to look at structures near the skin line After adjusting the depth you may need to adjust the TGC and focus Changing Depth e Erases real time calculations graphics on the display but not the completed results on the worksheet page Changing the depth may change the TI and or MI Observe the output display for possible effects Make sure enough space is left below the anatomy of interest to demonstrate shadowing or enhancement LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Gain Description Adjusting NOTE Values NOTE Benefits Affect on other controls Bioeffects NOTE Optimizing B Mode B Mode Gain increases or decrea
258. he footswitch to the system The footswitch can be properly connected using the USB Port 1 or 2 Figure 3 9 Footswitch Connection 4 Connect the Wireless LAN Card to the system The wireless LAN Card can be properly connected using the Signal Port for Card Figure 3 10 Wireless LAN Connection 3 14 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Console Overview Peripherals Connection continued 5 Connect the USB Lamp to the system The USB Lamp can be properly connected using USB port 1 or 2 Figur e 3 11 USB Lamp connection 6 Connect the Video Adapter and VCR to the system The Video Adapter can be properly connected using SVGA output and USB port 1 or 2 a Figure 3 12 Video Adapter and VCR Connection LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 15 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Peripherals Connection continued Connect the USB Memory to the system The USB Memory can be properly connected using USB port 1 or 2 Figure 3 13 USB Memory Connection 8 Connect the Bluetooth PC Card to the system The Bluetooth PC Card can be properly connected using USB port 1 the right portion of the figure Figure 3 14 Bluetooth PC Card Connection 3 16 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Console Overview Peripherals Connection continued 9 Connect the Color Printer to the system The Color Printer can be properly connected using USB 1
259. he probe s carrying case on a stable surface and open the case 2 Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cord 3 DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable damage Use the integrated cable management hook to wrap the cord 4 Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place with the cord facing the front of the system 5 Press the connector locking lever up 6 Carefully position the probe cord so it is free to move and is not resting on the floor 7 When the probe is connected it is automatically activated Figure 3 25 Probe connection to LOGIQ Book LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 33 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Connecting the Probe continued Figure 3 26 Probe connector locking handle when the probe is removed Do not touch the patient when CAUTION Fault conditions can result in electric shock hazard Do not N touch the surface of probe connectors which are exposed connecting or disconnecting a probe Cable Handling Take the following precautions with probe cables e Do not bend the cable acutely 3 34 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes Deactivating the Probe When deactivating the probe the probe is automatically placed in standby mode To deactivate a probe sass 1 Press the Freeze key Ex 2 Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe 3
260. hen select a folder from the list The list includes all folders defined for the current exam category and selected mode You cannot edit this folder ADD STUDY Cancel Diank Insert Ei stennsia Figure 7 14 Add folder Window 3 Select the user defined folder in the Selection menu The system displays the new folder in the Folder section of the Measurement amp Analysis screen 4 To name the folder move the Trackball to highlight the Name field press Set twice and type the name 5 To add measurements to the folder See Adding a user defined measurement on page 7 30 for more information LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Measurement and Calculation Setup Adding a folder continued cane 8 GE Medical Systems MI0 4 Tis 0 1 10Lb RS 09 04 03 4 12 04 PM dK Jo9 04 03 4 05 39 PM adm arlesie Thyroid Obstetrics Mi Generic Connectivity Il Measure About Admin 0B 2 3 B AFi Moore MEASUREMENT amp ANALYSIS Mi USERDEFS1 M amp A Advanced l Doppler OB Table AC Hadlock Measurement menu 20 HC Hadlock Add measurement Add folder 2 BPD Hadlock x Delete measure and folder C MM Factory Edit Calc C Dop m Folder Hame USERDEFS1 V Fet Loc Side Available folders and measureme FL Hadlock Figure 7 15 Measurement amp Analysis Add folder LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 29 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measureme
261. her Raises lowers the PRF on the color bar To raise lower the velocity scale press PRF Wall Filter until you reach PRF then adjust PRF left right Velocity range is in kHz PRF values are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Imaging of higher velocity flow requires increased scale values to avoid aliasing Changing the PRF may affect Power Output frame rate and controls wall filter When you adjust the velocity scale CINE memory is cleared Bioeffects Changing the PRF range may change the TI and or MI Observe the output display for possible effects LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 33 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Wall Filter Description Adjusting Values Benefits Scan Area Description Adjusting Values Benefits Affect on other controls Bioeffects 5 34 Filters out low flow velocity signals in order to hide unusable motion It helps get rid of motion artifacts caused from breathing and other patient motion To raise lower the wall filter press PRF Wall Filter until you reach Wall Filter then adjust Wall Filter left right Values vary depending upon probe application and packet size The wall filter is shown graphically on the color bar and is displayed numerically on the monitor cm s Wall Filter values vary by probe and application and are returned to factory or user
262. hiving Stores images to a network image volume either internal HD on EchoPAC workstation or EchoServer volume Remote Archive MOD Remote archive Magneto Optical DiskUses a remote database either on EchoPAC workstation or on EchoServer for patient archiving Stores images to a MOD Worklist Local Archive DICOM Server Int HD Modality Worklist local archive DICOM server and local hard driveSearches the DICOM Modality Worklist Copies the patient information to the local database Stores the patient information and the examination results to the local the database Stores images to a DICOM Server and to an image volume on the local hard drive NOTE WL LA DServ Does not search the local database only the DICOM Modality Worklist LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 16 95 Customizing Your System Screens The Screens tab allows you to configure tools related to patient management You can specify default system functionality such whether patient ID is required when you archive data and if you want the system to automatically search the archive for a patient when you enter patient data Figure 16 58 Connectivity Screens Preset Menu 16 96 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Screens continued Configuring Connectivity Table 16 62 Screens Preset Parameter Description Columns in examination listing Select the columns to
263. horoughly clean probes and reusable accessories after each patient examination and disinfect or sterilize as needed Refer to Probes and Biopsy for probe use and care instructions e Follow all infection control policies established by your office department or institution as they apply to personnel and equipment Contact with natural rubber latex may cause a severe anaphylactic reaction in persons sensitive to the natural latex protein Sensitive users and patients must avoid contact with these items Refer to package labeling to determine latex content and FDA s March 29 1991 Medical Alert on latex products Archived data is managed at the individual sites Performing data backup to any device is recommended LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 2 9 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Device Labels Label Icon Description The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information provided on the equipment Table 2 2 Label Icons Label Icon Purpose Meaning Location Identification and Rating Plate Manufacture s name and address See Figure 2 3 for location Date of manufacture information AC Adapter Label Model and serial numbers Electrical ratings Volts Amps phase and frequency Type Class Label Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection IP Code IPX1 Indicates the degree of protection Bottom of Footswitch provided by the enclosure per IEC60
264. hs from fixed transmitters such as base stations for radio cellular cordless telephones and land mobile radios amateur radio AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast transmitter cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters an electromagnetic site survey should be considered If the measured field strength in the location in which the ultrasound system is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level as stated in the immunity declaration the ultrasound system should be observed to verify normal operation If abnormal operation is observed additional measures may be necessary such as re orienting or relocating the ultrasound system or using an RF shielded examination room may be necessary 1 Use either power supply cords provided by GE Medical Systems or ones designated by GE Medical Systems Products equipped with a power source plug should be plugged into the fixed power socket which has the protective grounding conductor Never use any adaptor or converter to connect with a power source plug e g three prong to two prong converter 2 Locate the equipment as far away as possible from other electronic equipment 3 Be sure to use only the cables provided by or designated by GE Medical Systems Connect these cables following the installation procedures e g wire power cables separately from signal cables 4 Lay out the main equipment and other peri
265. iac area measurement in the Results Window 3 To make an ellipse measurement of the thoracic area repeat steps a e The system displays the cardio thoracic area ratio in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 23 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Estimated Fetal Weight EFW SSK Sy xs To measure estimated fetal weight you make several OB eoooo measurements These measurements can vary based on how your system is set up Measurements can include biparietal diameter fetal trunk area femur length antero postero trunk diameter and transverse trunk diameter abdominal circumference head circumference and spinal length 1 Select EFW The system displays the required measurements 2 Make each measurement The system displays each measurement and the estimated fetal weight in the Results Window NOTE For a description of any of the required measurements refer to that measurement 9 24 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Fetal Trunk Area FTA y yo ss Noe wo oF O O0O0eO Ellipse HINTS OB Measurements and Calculations To measure fetal trunk area you make an ellipse trace or two distance measurements Select FTA an active caliper displays To position the active caliper move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second caliper move the Trackball Adjust th
266. ian who requested the exam Choose from the list or type the name The person not a physician who performs the scan Choose from the list To fill in the following information move the Trackball to highlight the Detail button and press Set Table 9 2 Obstetric fields Detail Field Description Why the patient needs the ultrasound exam Comments about the exam LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 9 5 To Start an Obstetrics Exam continued After you complete the patient information you can begin the scan 1 To change from the Patient Data Entry screen to the Scan screen do one of the following e On the keyboard press Esc e On the Control Panel select Patient or Freeze e On the Control Panel press the B Mode key The system displays the Scan screen 2 On the Control Panel press Measure The default Obstetrics study is displayed on the Selection Menu Figure 9 1 shows the OB General study 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 18 Tis 0 1 E8C RS I 99103103 9 49 50 AM adm b onlento OB 1 F p Obstetrics P Fra 8 0 MHz amp Generic EA in z Stenosis ed 100 cm ME 4 6 Ratio DR 81 Caliper A0 100 k Ellipse 09 03 03 9 49 50 AM Area trace Volume Angle Worksheet Display i oB 1 M oB 2 3 Mi OB General Qi Fetal Heart MM OB GYH Vessel d 4 52 cm L 0 00 cm Menu Delete Active Measure i Cursor Select Mode 2D Caliper Ellipse Area trace Volume Angle
267. iguring Connectivity Standard Print Standard Print Hame OAE IV Enable Device Hame Driver Hame Figure 16 52 Standard Print Service Type Table 16 58 Standard Print Preset Parameter Description Device Name The device name of the print service Driver Name The name of the printer driver The system automatically fills this in when the printer is located Displays the Print Setup dialog box Select to locate the printer device Select LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 83 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Buttons NOTE You can assign print buttons to a device or to a dataflow You can configure each print key to multiple output devices workflows views Tools Sereens Dataflow Buttons Services Tepip CONNECTIVITY Buttons Button Printi Destinations CopyToWflow_01 Select destination s j Add Destination De Dir gest 1 Image To Buffer MyComputer Out Image generated Z Se E Format rawbicom caem Capture Area Image frames Image compression Video Area C Single fuone Image Area C Muniple Whole Screen Quality o ena J Figure 16 53 Connectivity Buttons Preset Menu 16 84 The Buttons screen has the following sections of information 1 Buttons Select the print button 2 Destinations D
268. image displayed to the point at which homogeneous material in the phantom begins to lose brightness 5 Document the depth measurement for reference and future comparison Contact a Service Engineer if the depth of penetration shifts more than one centimeter 1cm when using the same probe and same system settings LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 18 25 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 User Maintenance Functional resolution 18 26 Description Benefit Procedure Functional resolution is an imaging system s ability to detect and display the size shape and depth of an anechoic structure as opposed to a pin target See Figure 18 1 for more information The very best possible image is somewhat less important than reproducibility and stability over time Routine tests at the same settings should produce the same results The data obtained will give a relative indication of the smallest structure the system is capable of resolving at a given depth To measure functional resolution 1 5 Set the front panel TGC slide pots to their center detent position Gain and acoustic output can be adjusted as necessary since these values are displayed on the monitor Scan a test phantom with a vertical row of anechoic cyst targets to typical depths for the probe being used Evaluate the cysts at various depths for a good round shape well defined borders and no fill in Remember TGC slide pots are centered and should remain f
269. imination capability Spectrum Colorize colorizes the spectrum as a function of power using the inverse of the Colorize map for the signal intensity in each Doppler line Colorize enhances the visibility of the spectrum s characteristics and enhances your ability to identify spectral broadening and the edge contours of the spectrum used to define the peak frequency velocity The gray bar displays while Colorize is activated To activate Colorize 1 Select Colorize on the Selection Menu LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Edge Enhance Description Adjusting Values Benefits Affect on other controls Optimizing B Mode Edge Enhance brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences corresponding to the edges of structures Adjustments to M Mode s edge enhancement affects the M Mode only To cycle through settings adjust Edge Enhance on the Selection Menu 0 5 with O Off and 5 High The current value displays on the Selection Menu Values vary by probe application and multi frequency setting Values are returned to the preset value when you change Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs New Patient or Multi Frequency Edge Enhance cleans out the B Mode image M Mode timeline by subduing some of the gray scale in order to highlight the vessel wall or organ This is helpful when you cannot differentiate between the chambers of the heart Edge Enhan
270. in pam amp abdomen Vascular Ms gt SmallParts MEASUREMENT amp ANALYSIS Stenosis Obstetrics 1 6 Ratio pppler OB Table Gynecology Volume PEER Add measurement Add folder 2D 4 Pediatrics Ba Aorta Diameter re and folder a Cancel Factory Edit Cale C Dop Folder Hame Abdomen Available folders and measureme Ma Stenosis MAD AE Ratio Volume Angle Aorta Diameter CAPS start e Figure 7 5 Select Exam Category LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 17 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Selecting the measurement mode In the Measurement menu section of the Measurement amp Analysis screen select one of the following e 2D B Mode e MM M Mode e Dop Doppler Mode The Selection menu lists studies and measurements for the selected mode Measurement menu Add measurement Add folder 20 X Delete measure and folder C MM Factory Edit Caie Dop Figure 7 6 Select Mode 7 18 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Measurement and Calculation Setup Selecting a study or measurement To work with a folder or measurement you must first select it in the Selection menu The Selection menu lists the studies and measurements for an exam category The studies and measurements are organized in a hierarchy in the same order that they are organized on the Selection Menu while doing
271. in the Advanced Reference Manual LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 65 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN To Start a Gynecology Exam 9 66 To begin a gynecology exam you enter patient data or if the patient data from a previous exam is saved in the system find the patient information For details about how to start an exam See To Start an Obstetrics Exam on page 9 4 for more information After you complete the patient information you can begin the scan 1 To change from the Patient Data Entry screen to the Scan screen do one of the following e On the keyboard press Esc e On the Control Panel select Patient or Freeze e On the Control Panel press the B Mode key The system displays the Scan screen To choose the appropriate probe select the probe icon on the Selection Menu On the Control Panel press Measure The default Gynecology study is displayed on the Selection Menu LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 GYN Measurements B Mode Measurements In B Mode you make the measurements in the General Gynecology study These measurements include e Uterine length width and height e Ovarian length width and height e Ovarian follicle e Endometrium thickness LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 67 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Follicle measurements 9 68 One distance You can make left and right ovary follicle measurements from one two or three dista
272. ination Risk of explosion if used in the presence of flammable anesthetics To avoid injury Do not remove protective covers No user serviceable parts are inside Refer servicing to qualified service personnel To assure adequate grounding connect the attachment plug to a reliable hospital grade grounding outlet having equalization conductor Y e Never use any adaptor or converter of a three prong to two prong type to connect with a mains power plug The protective earth connection will loosen Do not place liquids on or above the console Spilled liquid may contact live parts and increase the risk of shock LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Precautions Related Hazards continued CAUTION Smoke amp E Hazard Biological AD Hazard CAUTION CAUTION Do not use this equipment if a safety problem is known to exist Have the unit repaired and performance verified by qualified service personnel before returning to use The system must be supplied from an adequately rated electrical circuit The capacity of the supply circuit must be as specified See Before the system arrives on page 3 3 for more information For patient and personnel safety be aware of biological hazards while performing invasive procedures To avoid the risk of disease transmission Use protective barriers gloves and probe sheaths whenever possible Follow sterile procedures when appropriate T
273. information to operate the system safely Advanced equipment training may be provided by a factory trained Applications Specialist for the agreed upon time period Read and understand all instructions in this manual before attempting to use the LOGIQ Book system Keep this manual with the equipment at all times Periodically review the procedures for operation and safety precautions LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Overview Documentation LOGIQ Book documentation consists of three manuals e The Basic User Manual TRANSLATED and Online Help ENGLISH ONLY provides information needed by the user to operate the system safely It describes the basic functions of the system safety features operating modes measurements calculations probes and user care and maintenance e The Advanced Reference Manual ENGLISH ONLY contains data tables such as OB and Acoustic Output tables e The Quick Guide TRANSLATED provides descriptions of basic system features and operation It is intended to be used in conjunction with the Basic User Manual in order to provide the information necessary to operate the system safely Quick Cards may also be provided with additional feature information NOTE The documentation kit provides the Quick Guide and Release Notes on paper and electronically and the Basic User Manual and Advanced Reference Manual are only provided in electronic format The CD ROM includes Englis
274. information you want to change Select values for the parameters you want to change To save the changes select the Save button Select Exit to return to scanning In some cases you may need to reboot the system for the change to take effect In some cases you may need to reboot the system for the change to take effect LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Presets System General Preset Menu The System General screen allows you to specify hospital name and system date and time System System Backup De gt rals Imaging Measure Restore paunaa ae Location Patient Info GE Medical Systems Department Development Anonymous patient B Title Bar Font Size reboot Large v Language requires reboot ENG 7 Key Usage Units Metric v Regional Options CineRun Trackball control Frame x Frame Loop Speed Swap set and program key reboot Vv Date Time Program Key Mapping Pointer z Reverse Focus Position Rotary E Time Format 12 4M PM z Reverse Depth Rotary i Date Format fus 7 Reverse Steer Rotaries E Default Century 1900 7 r Reverse Baseline Rotaries Date Time Trackball Utility Prompt for Save on Cancel or Exit Vv Figure 16 1 System General Preset Menu Table 16 1 Location Preset Parameter Description Hospital Type the institution s name Department Type the institution s department name Language Selec
275. io Diam The system displays an active caliper 3 Make a distance measurement of the first velocity The system displays an active caliper for the second distance measurement 4 Make a distance measurement of the second velocity The system displays each distance measurement and the AIB ratio in the Results Window NOTE The first caliper is the A velocity The second caliper is the B velocity For details on how to make a distance measurement See Distance measurement on page 7 40 for more information Area To calculate A B ratio by area 1 From the Generic Selection Menu select A B Ratio 2 Select ratio Area The system displays a trace caliper 3 Make a trace measurement of the A velocity NOTE To erase an open trace move the Trackball The system displays a second trace caliper 4 Make a trace measurement of the B velocity The system displays the two area measurements and the AIB ratio in the Results Window For details on how to make a trace measurement See Circumference and area trace measurement on page 7 44 for more information LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 65 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 M Mode Measurements 09 03 03 9 11 31 AM 09 03 03 9 11 04 AM adm b 1 1 Abdomen i B d 9 42 cm Fra 4 0 MHz Gn E A MI AB Ratio Map D 9 SE Medical Systems MI 0 33 Tls 0 0 3C RS Abdominal Generic L 0 00 cm Stenosis HR FR 11 Hz AO 100 Worksheet Display B Abdomen
276. ion ae Exam Description Seas bol 8 3 4 Local Archive Int HD X dea 7 9 GB Figure 4 1 Patient Screen Category OB LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 4 3 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing for an Exam Patient Screen continued Enter Patient Data with the alphanumeric keyboard To navigate through the Patient Entry menu use the Tab key or Trackball and Set to move and fix the white arrow cursor Figure 4 1 shows the location of these windows on the Patient Screen The Patient Screen details are 1 4 4 Image Management e Patient New patient screen currently selected e Exam History Exam History screen e Image History Image History screen e Active Images Active Images screen Category Selection e Select from 8 exam application categories Abdomen Obstetrics Gynecology Cardiology Vascular Urology Small Parts or Pediatrics When a category is selected the measurement and category presets are displayed Function Selection e New Patient Used to clear patient entry screen in order to input a new patient s data into the database New Exam Used to create a new exam on a current patient e Register Used to enter new patient information into the database prior to the actual exam being performed REQUIRED e Exit Used to exit Patient Menu Dataflow Selection e Select the appropriate dataflow e The default is Local Archive Int HD LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Directio
277. ion During the ellipse adjustment use the Trackball to increase or decrease the size of the ellipse Select Cursor Select to adjust the measurement calipers 5 Trackball Moves the measurement calipers selects the measurement on the Summary Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 5 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Description of calipers While you are making a measurement the measurement caliper is either active open plus sign or fixed closed plus sign An active caliper is yellow and a fixed caliper is green The system allows you to identify measurements by number or by unique symbol If you choose Number as the Cursor Type after you complete a measurement it is assigned a number If you choose Symbol as the Cursor Type after you complete a measurement the caliper symbol changes to one of the nine shown below The symbols are used in sequence as listed The first symbol is used for the first measurement the second symbol for the second measurement and so on The numbers or symbols also identify measurements in the Results Window PA KOM Te Figure 7 2 Fixed Caliper Symbols For information about how to choose Cursor Type of Number or Symbol see Table 16 11 Measurement line display While you are making a measurement the system displays a dotted line to show the measurement After you press Set to complete the measurement if Cursor Line Display is On the dotted line remains
278. ion Requested Procedure Code Sequence Admission Id Current Patient Location Scheduled Station AE Title Scheduled Procedure Step Start Time Scheduled Procedure Step Description Scheduled Action Item Code Sequence Scheduled Procedure Step ID Scheduled Station Name Scheduled Procedure Step Location Names of Intended Recipients of Results Req Procedure Comments Imaging Service Request Comments LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 79 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Echo Database V1 1 16 80 EchoDatabase v3 0 Name M Enable Re aa Max z te Corresponding sql ini name PCBE40 MOD525 Interval 1 s n Placement of kmag Flee To osc era ed Tuk 3 Is 127 0 0 1 MOD525 IV Removable Media Placement of Report Files Snr aay mi 127 0 0 1 MOD525 IV Removable Media Figure 46 48 EchoDatabase v3 0 Service Type Table 16 55 EchoDatabase Preset Parameter Description Corresponding sal ini name The name of the sql ini file Placement of Image Files Placement of Report Files Enter the path to the image archive If the image archive is on a removable disk select Removable Media Enter the path to the report archive If the report archive is on a removable disk select Removable Media LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity Echo Database V3 0 EchoDatabase v3
279. ions Doppler Display Description Format Values HPRF HPRF mode is used when detected velocities exceed the processing capabilities of the currently selected PW Doppler scale or when the selected anatomical site is too deep for the selected PW Doppler scale Time Scale Each selection represents a different sweep time Angle Correct Indicates flow direction Sample Volume Indicates sample volume box Each probe defaults to a specific range gate Gate Doppler Velocity Flow direction has a positive and negative indicator noted in centimeters per Scale second cm sec When the velocity scale is less than 10 cm s it is displayed to the first decimal point 4 6 rather than 5 cm s LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 45 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Doppler Mode Scanning Hints HINTS The best Doppler data is collected when parallel to flow with orientation also parallel to the anatomic target whereas the best B Mode image data is collected perpendicular to the anatomic target Therefore you don t usually get both an ideal B Mode image and ideal Doppler data simultaneously Control overview Dynamic Range Affects the amount of Doppler amplitude data displayed Wall Filter Removes the noise caused by vessel or heart wall motion at the expense of low flow sensitivity Sweep Speed Controls speed of spectral update 5 46 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5
280. iper displays To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the transverse abdominal diameter in the Results Window Transverse Cerebellar Diameter C gt cA KF WO os SSF S cecco To measure transverse cerebellar diameter make one distance measurement 1 2 Select TCD an active caliper displays To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the transverse cerebellar diameter in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 31 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Thorax Transverse Diameter g CEON SELLES O00000 9 32 To measure thorax transverse diameter make one distance measurement 1 2 Select ThD an active caliper displays To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system f
281. iry tic o F mae P Pio a 3 mea fl isl ee foma Tesa fh Isl inmh Cnm ia Figure 16 46 DICOM Worklist Service Type Table 16 53 DICOM Worklist Preset Parameter Description Max Result Specify the maximum number of patient records you want the system to retrieve when searching the patient database Search Criteria Displays the Search Criteria window where you can enter search parameters for the system to use when searching the patient database See Figure 16 47 16 76 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity DICOM Worklist continued The Search Criteria dialog box allows you to define specific search parameters for the system to use when searching the patient database E Search Criterias Select Tag 00080090 Referring Physician s Name gt Value Blackwell Don t Use Remove 00080060 Modality us 00080090 Referring Physician s Name Blackwell Figure 16 47 DICOM Worklist Search Criteria LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 77 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System DICOM Worklist continued Table 16 54 DICOM Worklist Search Criteria Preset Parameter Description Select Tag Select the type of information that you want to define for search parameters such as Referring Physician s Name Pregnancy Status Medical Alerts or Requested Procedure Description For a list of tags See Search Criteria tags on page 16 79 for m
282. isplay add or remove services for the selected print button 3 Service Parameters Specify service parameters for the service currently selected in the Destinations section The name and parameters in this section change depending on the service that is currently selected LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity Buttons continued Table 16 59 Buttons Preset Parameter Description Button Select the print button Select destination Select output services to associate to the selected button The system displays the following information about the service NameTypeServer the device for which the service was configured Dir direction input output or both 1 0 Only output services can be associated to the print buttons Add Add selected service to the button Remove Remove selected service from the button Service Parameters The data in this section varies depending on the type of service For a description of service parameters See Services Destinations on page 16 62 for more information LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 85 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Capture Area Definitions Video Area Video Area example Ag e 1 3 IL CE TEE Ove 1 PN adn i m T W He rd dE 44 EHe i 1m 4 EH Mle L a 0 Jem Figure 16 54 Video Area Capture Area Configuring Connectivity Capture Area Definitions continued
283. it Procedure Quality Assurance Axial resolution is the minimum reflector separation between two closely spaced objects to produce discrete reflections along the axis of the sound beam It can also be monitored by checking the vertical size of known pin targets See Figure 18 1 for more information Axial resolution is affected by the transmitting section of the system and the probe In clinical imaging poor axial resolution displays small structures lying close together as a single dot This may lead to improper interpretation of the ultrasound image To measure Axial resolution 1 Scan a test phantom with precisely spaced vertical pin targets 2 Adjust all scan controls as necessary for the best image of the pin targets to typical depths for the probe being used 3 Press Freeze to stop image acquisition 4 Perform a standard distance measurement of the pin vertical thickness at different points in the image Record all images for archiving 5 Scan the vertical pins in zoom or at different depth scale factors 6 Press Freeze to stop image acquisition repeat the vertical thickness measurements of the pins and record the images for archiving 7 Document the measurements for reference and future comparison Axial resolution should remain stable over time Contact a Service Engineer if any changes are observed LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 18 23 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 User Maintenance Lateral resolution
284. ixed This may NOT provide optimal cystic clearing Document all results for future reference and comparison Contact a Service Engineer if a greatly distorted image is obtained LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Contrast resolution Description Benefit Method Procedure Quality Assurance Contrast resolution is the ability of an imaging system to detect and display the shape and echogenic characteristics of a structure See Figure 18 1 for more information Specific values measured are less important than stability over time Routine tests at the same settings should produce the same results A correct diagnosis is dependent upon an imaging system s ability to differentiate between a cystic or solid structure versus echo patterns from normal surrounding tissue A phantom with echogenic targets of different sizes and depths should be used To measure contrast resolution 1 Set the front panel TGC slide pots to their center detent position Set dynamic range to 54 db 2 Gain and acoustic output can be adjusted as necessary since these values are displayed on the monitor 3 Scan a test phantom with echogenic targets at the depths available 4 Evaluate the echogenic targets for contrast between each other and between the surrounding phantom material Remember TGC slide pots are centered and should remain fixed This may NOT provide an optimal scan image 5 Document all results for
285. ixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the thorax transverse diameter in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Measurements and Calculations Tibia Length CA o cA X ON Ray SS woe To measure tibia length make one distance measurement 1 Select Tibia an active caliper displays 2 To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball 3 To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper 4 To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points 5 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the tibia length in the Results Window Ulina Length CA gt cA X O Ray X S Ce oe To measure ulna length make one distance measurement 1 Select Ulna an active caliper displays 2 To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball 3 To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper 4 To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points 5 To complete the measurement press Set Volume
286. k Basic User Manual 9 69 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Follicle measurements continued Three distances 9 70 1 To select the left or right adjust the Side knob Select Follicle an active caliper displays Make the first distance measurement a To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the distance value in the Results Window After the first and second distance measurement the system displays an active caliper To make the second and third distance measurement repeat steps a d above After the third measurement the system displays the ovary follicle measurement in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 GYN Measurements Endometrium thickness Endo To measure the endometrium thickness make one distance measurement 1 Select Endo an active caliper displays 2 To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball 3 To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper 4 To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A do
287. l Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Image Data Management Patient Report and User Defined Backup Protocols continued 3 Select Utility Select System then Backup Restore 4 Select the media Select everything under Backup by placing a check mark in front of Patient Archive Report Archive and User Defined Configuration Then press Backup General System Imaging System Measure Backup Restore Peripherals About Backup Restore Patient Archive M No Record M No Record User Defined Configuration No Record Backup Media Media MO Patient Archive E 7 User Defined Configuration T Restore Detailed Restore Report Archive Report Archive Imaging Presets C Connectivity Configuratian E Measurement Configuration L Annotations Body Patterns Libraries All Others E Restore Figure 15 11 Backup Menu NOTE The detailed section of this menu decouples the user defined configuration above This allows you to selectively restore what you want to restore across multiple machines Refer to Chapter 16 for more information 5 Answer Ok to the following pop up message as many times as the number of items you are backing up Waming Backup Backup patient to H GEMS_BACKUP Figure 15 12 Back up Confirmation Message LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 15 21 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Recording Images Not
288. l Measurements and Calculations Heart Rate To calculate the heart rate 1 From the Generic Selection Menu select HR The system displays an active caliper 2 To position the caliper at a recognizable point in the first cycle move the Trackball 3 To fix the first caliper press Set The system displays a second active caliper 4 To position the caliper at the identical point in the next cycle depending on preset you need to move the Trackball NOTE In the message bar at the bottom of the display the system indicates the number of cycles you should measure Figure 7 25 Two Heart Beat Reference example in Doppler mode 5 To complete the measurement and transfer the calculation to the worksheet press Set NOTE For information about how to specify the number of heart beats that the system will use See Specifying measurement and display options on page 7 9 for more information 7 68 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Doppler Mode Measurements In Doppler Mode the Generic study includes the following measurements e PI Pulsatility Index e RI Resistive Index e PS ED Ratio or ED PS Ratio e AJB Ratio e Max PG Pressure Gradient e Mean PG Pressure Gradient SV Stroke Volume e HR Heart Rate i ER GE Medical Systems MI 0 4 Tis 0 0 3C RS 09 03 03 9 22 31 AM I 09 03 03 9 20 36 AM adm b 1 1 Abdomen B Abdominal Fra AB Ratio PI RI MaxPG MeanPG S
289. l Screen 10 or 1mm Ellipse mm Full Screen 5 or 1mm Area 5 or 1mm Trace mm2 Full Screen 5 or 1 mm2 Ellipse mm2 Full Screen 5 or 1 mm Time s Timeline Display 5 or 10 ms M or Doppler Mode Slope mm s Timeline Display 5 or 1 mm s M Mode Only Doppler SV Position mm Full Screen 2 mm Any Direction Velocity cm s From 0 to 100 cm s 10 or 1 cm s PW Doppler Mode From 100 to 130 cm s 5 or 1 cm s 50 Color Flow Mode Doppler Angle cm s From 0 60 5 Correction From 60 80 12 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 18 7 User Maintenance Clinical Calculation Accuracy 18 8 CAUTION Estimate the overall inaccuracy of a combined measurement and calculation by including the stated inaccuracy from the basic measurement accuracy statements Diagnostic errors may result from the inappropriate use of clinical calculations Review the referenced source of the stated formula or method to become familiar with the intended uses and possible limitations of the calculation Calculation formulas and databases are provided as a tool to assist the user but should not be considered an undisputed database in making a clinical diagnosis The user is encouraged to research the literature and judge the equipment capabilities on an ongoing basis in order to assess its utility as a clinical tool LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Care and Maintenance sys
290. l and will provide the targets and extended life necessary for consistent system testing LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Quality Assurance Phantoms continued ram RMI 4036S RMI 405GSxX JA ooo Figure 18 1 Phantoms Penetration Axial Distance Measurement Functional Resolution Lateral Resolution Lateral Distance Measurement Axial Resolution Contrast Resolution and Gray Scale Photography Gray Scale Plane Targets Oo NOaR WN gt LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 18 17 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 User Maintenance Baselines An absolute necessity for a quality assurance program is establishing baselines for each test or check Baselines are established after the system has been verified to be working properly at installation or after a repair If a probe or major assembly is replaced new baselines should be generated Baselines can be made by adjusting system parameters to prescribed levels or to the best possible image The key factor to remember is reproducibility The same conditions must be reproduced for each periodic check All system parameters not displayed on the monitor should be recorded for the permanent record Periodic Checks Periodic checks should be performed in accordance with your facility s quality assurance requirements For the data to be valid periodic checks should mimic the baseline setup parameters The resulting
291. lable calculations are displayed on the Selection Menu Measurement and calculation results 7 8 As you take measurements each measurement is given a sequential number on the display and in the Results Window The system can display nine measurements on the screen at one time While you are taking a measurement the value in the Results Window updates until you complete the measurement Once the Results Window has nine measurements if you make any further measurements the system erases the first measurement and adds the new measurement first in first out LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Introduction Specifying measurement and display options Specifying heart When you measure heart rate the system assumes a specific rate cycles number of cycles are measured You can change the number of cycles used in the calculation To specify the number of heart rate cycles press the Utility key select Advanced gt Connectivity gt Measurement Select the Advanced tab then select Heart Rate Cycle The system displays a list of choices from 1 10 Select the number you want After you choose a number the next time you measure heart rate the system assumes you are measuring the specified number of cycles That number is used when calculating the heart rate After changing patients the system defaults to the number specified in the Heart Rate Cycle parameter See M amp A Advanced Preset on
292. ld be that of a typical commercial and or hospital environment If the user requires continued operation during power mains interruptions it is recommended that the system be powered from a UPS or a battery NOTE UT is the a c mains voltage prior to application of the test level Power frequency magnetic fields should be at levels characteristic of a typical location in a typical commercial and or hospital environment Separation distance to radio communication equipment must be maintained according to the method below Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with the ad symbol NOTE These guidelines may not apply in all situations Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures objects and people LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 2 21 Safety Patient Environmental Devices Figure 2 1 Patient Environmental Devices Left side Security lock Bottom side Lithium ion battery port Right side Probe port Rear panel ONS e 2 Serial Ports gt Peripheral devices B W Printer Footswitch Color Printer and VCR 2 22 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Precautions Acceptable Devices The devices shown in Figure 2 1 are specified to be suitable for use within the PATIENT ENVIRONMENT CAUTION DO NOT connect any probes or accessories without approval by GE within the PATIENT ENV
293. les Frame rate changes the vector density and frame rate controls Bioeffects Activating color flow frame rate high resolution may change the Tl and or MI Observe the output display for possible effects Map Description Allows you to select a specific color map After you have made your selection the color bar displays the resultant map Adjusting After you activate Color Flow the Color Flow Selection Menu displays To cycle through available maps select Map move the Trackball to view available maps and press Set to select Values Velocity Maps VL Flow shown as blue away red toward the probe Velocity Variance Maps VV Provides a measure of turbulence stenosis Adds green to velocity maps Benefits Shows the direction of the flow and highlights the higher velocity flows LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 37 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Threshold Description Adjusting Values Benefits Frame Average Description Adjusting Values Benefits Affect on other controls 5 38 Threshold assigns the gray scale level at which color information stops To increase decrease the gray scale threshold press Threshold left right The settings cycle through various values 10 100 of the gray scale High values display more color low values displays more B Mode gray scale data The Color Threshold level is displayed on the Selection Menu Values vary by probe and application and a
294. lete the measurement press Set The system displays the crown rump length in the Results Window Figure 6 10 Search Results LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 6 23 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Scanning Display Functions Saving Favorite Topics You may find that there are topics you need to refer to often In this case it s a good idea to save these topics as Favorites To save a topic as a favorite press the Favorites tab highlight the topic in the Topics window and press the Add button You can now view this topic quickly by going to the Favorites help tab B HTML Help T e 2 Contents Index Search Crown Rump Length SALLE T measure crown rump length make one distance measurement Select Wl an active caliper displays To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the crown rump length in the Results Window Figure 6 11 Adding Favorites 6 24 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Electronic Documentation Using the Index Or you can look for topics by using the Index Press the Index tab then use the scroll bar to look up a topic HTML Help uv Crown Rump Lengt
295. levisions around the equipment This equipment can be used in residential areas only under the supervision of physicians or qualified technicians Ensure that the following is provided for the new system e A separate power outlet with a 6 amp circuit breaker for 220 240 VAC China or a 10 amp circuit breaker for 100 120 VAC USA or 10 amp circuit breaker for 220 240 VAC Europe Latin America e Take precautions to ensure that the console is protected from electromagnetic interference Precautions include Operate the console at least 15 feet away from motors typewriters elevators and other sources of strong electromagnetic radiation e Operation in an enclosed area wood plaster or concrete walls floors and ceilings helps prevent electromagnetic interference e Special shielding may be required if the console is to be operated in the vicinity of radio broadcast equipment LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 3 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Environmental Requirements The system should be operated stored or transported within the parameters outlined below Either its operational environment must be constantly maintained or the unit must be turned off Table 3 1 System Environmental Requirements Operational Storage Transport Temperature 10 40 C 5 50 C 5 50 C 50 104 F 23 122 F 23 122 F Humidity 30 75 non condensing 10
296. line but not the trace caliper press Clear once To clear the trace caliper and the current data measured press Clear twice LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Measurements and Calculations Fetal Trunk Area FTA continued Two distances 1 Select FTA an active caliper displays 2 Make the first distance measurement a To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball b To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper c To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points if preset accordingly d To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the distance value in the Results Window and displays an active caliper 3 To make the second distance measurement repeat steps a d above The system displays the measurement in the Results Window HINTS e Before you complete a measurement e To toggle between active calipers press Measure To erase the second caliper and the current data measured and start the measurement again press Clear once e To rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers adjust Cursor Select e After you complete the measurement to erase all data that has been measured to this point but not data entered onto worksheets press Clear LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 27 Direction 2321062
297. lop uniform measurement techniques among all users to minimize the potential operator error Also in order to detect possible equipment malfunctions that could affect measurement accuracy a quality assurance QA plan should be established for the equipment that includes routine accuracy checks with tissue mimicking phantoms Please be advised that all distance and Doppler related measurements through tissue are dependent upon the propagation velocity of sound within the tissue The propagation velocity usually varies with the type of tissue but an average velocity for soft tissue is assumed This equipment is designed for and the accuracy statements listed on are based on an assumed average velocity of 1540 m s The percent accuracy when stated applies to the measurement obtained not the full scale range Where the accuracy is stated as a percent with a fixed value the expected inaccuracy is the greater of the two LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Basic Measurements continued Table 18 7 System Measurements and Accuracies System Data Limitations or Measurement Units Useful Range Accuracy Conditions Depth mm Full Screen 5 or 1mm Distance Axial mm Full Screen 5 or 1mm Lateral mm Full Screen 5 or 2mm Linear Probes Lateral mm Full Screen 5 or 4mm Convex Probes Lateral mm Full Screen 5 or 4mm Sector Probes Circumference 5 or 1mm Trace mm Ful
298. lt V start x Place the first point Figure 9 1 OB General Study M amp A To choose a study 1 To change the study on the Selection Menu select Preset The Obstetrics exam category allows you to choose from the following studies e Generic e OB 1 OB 2 3 e OB General e Fetal Heart e OB GYN Vessel 2 To select a study press the study folder on the Selection Menu i 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 18 Tis 0 1 E8C RS 09 03 03 11 41 00 AM I 99103103 11 41 00 AMadm b 1 1 OB 1 Obstetrics GE B s Fra 8 0 MHz Mi Generic Gn 92 EA 1 3 B oB 1 laal Map C0 D 10 0 cm Oras DR 81 Mi oB General FR 22 Hz AO 100 amp Fetal Heart MI OBIGYH Vessel Worksheet Display d 4 78 cm L 0 00 cm Menu Delete Active er Measure Cursor Select A Mode 2D lt gt start e Place the first point M amp A Figure 9 2 OB Study Selection Menu NOTE The folders you see on the Selection Menu may be different if your system has been customized OB GYN OB Measurements and Calculations Introduction Measurements and calculations derived from ultrasound images are intended to supplement other clinical procedures available to the attending physician The accuracy of measurements is not only determined by the system accuracy but also by use of proper medical protocols by the user When appropriate be sure to note any protocols associated with a particular measurement or calculation
299. ltrasound age of the fetus using the current measurement For multi gestational pregnancies you can view all fetuses If previous exam data is available the graph can show fetal trending e Fetal Growth Bar graph shows the ultrasound age and the gestational age based on patient data Plots all measurements on one graph 9 44 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 To View OB Graphs To view OB graphs 1 Press Measure 2 Select Graph Display GE Medical Systems 09 03 03 11 44 28 AM Origin LMP LMP 03 23 2003 BBT Fetus A 1 CUA FetusPos Parameter CUA Value B Mode Measurements BPD Hadlock iv HC Hadlock iv AC Hadlock iv FL Hadlock 4 20 cm 14 32 cm 26 75 cm 8 45 cm 2D Calculations EFVV AC BPD FL HC 1784q 267 71q EFVv Hadlock GP gt 97 HC AC gt 0 54 1 04 1 22 FL BPD gt 201 36 71 0 87 0 Meas Transf Page Change Graph Exit start e 42 F6 osi03i03 11 44 13 AM adm b GA LMP 23w3d 24w4d 1wid GA 23w3d PLAC m3 Method AGE Avg 18w5d Avg 17w4d Avg 30w6d Avg 3lb 150z FLAC FLHC gt 31 58 20 00 24 00 gt 58 98 18 70 20 56 Select CUA AUA Doppler Figure 9 4 B Mode OB Measurement Selection Menu MI 0 20 Tis 0 0 E8C RS OB 2 3 EDD LMP 12 28 2003 EDD CUA 12 20 2003 Range 17w0d 20w3d 16w3d 18w5d 27w6d 33w6d OB GYN To View OB Graphs continued After you select Graph Display the system displays
300. m s EA 272 Thyroid Map B i m D 4 0 cm E DR f PI FR 43 Hz AO 100 RI MaxPG MeanPG SD Ratio D S Ratio HR Modify Auto Calcs Worksheet Display PW Fra 4 0 MHz Gn 28 AO 100 PRF 3 1 kHz WF 214 Hz SV 3 DR 36 SVD 2 1 cm Menu Delete Active Measure Cycle Select i Angle Correct Cursor Select Ru lt gt Mode PW PI MaxPG MeanPG D Ratio start e Place the velocity point M amp A Figure 8 9 Doppler Mode Selection Menu Abdominal Calculations See Doppler Mode Measurements on page 7 69 for more information Calculation formulas are available in the Advanced Reference Manual Abdomen and Small Parts Chapter 9 OB GYN Describes how to perform obstetric and gynecology measurements and calculations and how to use OB graphs and worksheets LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Exam Preparation 9 2 OB Exam Prior to an ultrasound examination the patient should be informed of the clinical indication specific benefits potential risks and alternatives if any In addition if the patient requests information about the exposure time and intensity it should be provided Patient access to educational materials regarding ultrasound is strongly encouraged to supplement the information communicated directly to the patient Furthermore these examinations should be conducted in a manner and take place in a setting which assures patient dignity an
301. m the system s memory HINTS e If you adjust the Trackball unfreeze the image or press Clear the system erases all completed measurements and calculations on the display Measurements and calculations however remain on the worksheets e Ifyou select New Patient the system erases all measurements and calculations on the display and clears the worksheets e If you make a new measurement that exceeds the maximum number of allowable measurements the system erases the first oldest measurement and adds the new measurement e Ifthe second caliper is active to erase the second caliper and activate the first caliper press Clear LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 13 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Measurement and Calculation Setup When you receive your LOGIQ Book system the studies and measurements are organized for typical work flows If you want you can change this set up You can specify which studies are in each exam category and which measurements and calculations are in each study You can change the measurements that are available on the Selection Menu The LOGIQ Book allows you to quickly and easily set up your system so that you can work most efficiently This section describes how to e Change a study to include different measurements e Add anew study or measurement e Remove a study from an exam category e Change measurement parameters e Create a measurement formula to correc
302. mages 1 Insert the backup media Format the backup media CD ROM Select the Utility key on the keyboard Select Connectivity then Tools You MUST set up a protocol for locating images on the media by labeling it consistently The best way is to label images by date CONNECTIVITY Views Tools Screens Dataflow Buttons Services Tepip r Removable Media Media CD Rewritable x verity Label 033103_IMG Format Copy CD Viewer Capacity Free space Formatted Database present DICOMDIR present Finalized CD only Write protected Figure 15 4 Format CD ROM Screen 2 Format the CD ROM 3 Press Patient Set the Dataflow to store images directly to the CD ROM or select the Dataflow tab and select the Removable CD ROM dataflow 4 Press More then select Move Images The Move Images pop up appears 5 Fill in the From Date then press Recalculate Specify to Keep days together Check that you have enough disk space for the images you want to move Select Move Images then press OK An in progress message appears The archive operation is complete when you receive this message LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 15 15 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Recording Images Export Import Moving Data Between Ultrasound Systems To move exams from one Ultrasound system to another you need to export import exam information NOTE Both database information and images are exported No data is deleted from
303. mation e The dataflows configured for the print keys Level 1 e The destination device for the print key Level 2 e The services associated to the buttons Level 3 o ES My Computer 3 28 17 41 E ERY prints o S My Computer 3 28 17 41 ge CopyToWflow_01 Fi 16 106 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity Viewing device or service properties To display the properties information for a device or service 1 If necessary select the on the structure tree to expand the level 2 Move the Trackball to the device or service 3 Press Set to highlight the device or service The system displays information related to the device or service in the Properties section Verifying that a device is connected to the network To verify that a service is connected to the network from the Views Menu select the device and then select Check If the service is connected to the network the system displays a green check mark to the left of the service icon and name If the service is not connected the system displays a red X LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 107 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System MandA Please refer to Chapter 7 General Measurements and Calculations for more information on setting up M amp A Presets 16 108 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Overview System Administration system Administration The
304. measurement Selection Menu is displayed LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 43 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Measurement and Annotation continued The Zoom control has a dual purpose When the Zoom control is pressed it activates the zoom function e When the Zoom control is adjusted it is used to control the zoom size with the zoom function in real time It rotates the probe position indicator when in the body pattern function The Zoom Clear key is used to quit from all zoom layers and restore to the default display mode e The M D Cursor key enables Trackball control of the M Mode or Doppler cursor line not angle correction or the CFM window in real time Color Flow Mode e The Scan Area key enables Trackball control of the B Mode image area size and position in B W the CFM window size and position in Color mode and the Zoomed area size and position in Zoom e The Set key is used for various functions but is generally used to fix or finish an operation e g to fix a measurement caliper e The Trackball is used with almost every key function in this group Trackball control depends on the last key function pressed 3 44 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Monitor Display 09 08 03 1 33 30 PM adm Carotid GF 48 GE Medical Systems Tis 0 1 10Lb RS B Fra 8 0 MHz Gn 66 E A 2 Man 0 D 4 0 cm DR 1 FR 794 794 13 8 13 8 s Area trac
305. ments from 0 to 90 The possible range of operation is from 0 degrees to 90 degrees in either direction For optimum velocity measurements the angle of incidence should be between 45 60 for vascular applications Angle Correct values vary by probe and application Angle Correct values are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Optimizes the accuracy of the flow velocity This is especially useful in vascular applications where you need to measure velocity Quickly adjusts the angle by 60 degrees Quickly adjust the angle by 30 degree To quickly adjust the angle press Quick Angle 0 degrees and 60 degrees 60 30 0 30 and 60 degrees LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 51 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Wall Filter Description Adjusting Values Benefits Affect on other controls Baseline Description Adjusting Values Benefits 5 52 Insulates the Doppler signal from excessive noise caused from vessel movement To increase decrease select Wall Filter then adjust Wall Filter on the Selection Menu PRF and Wall Filter share the same control Press the control to toggle between PRF and Wall Filter Each adjustment cycles you to the next setting Values vary depending upon the probe and application The current value displays on the Selection Menu and the monitor Wall Filter values are returned t
306. monitor Any page displayed on the monitor can be printed 6 Press the appropriate print key that you assigned in Step 2 above NOTE You can also set a preset to override the automatic area print and force the entire screen to print by pressing Utility gt System gt Peripherals and setting the Standard Printer to Print Full Screen NOTE Worksheets and Graphs are printed in reverse video for easier readibility You can also set a preset to override this presentation by pressing Utility gt System gt Setup and setting the Standard Printer to Allow Reverse Video External Printers You can also connect an external printer through the External Printer 1 2 remote expose connections on the back of the system To use a remote printer assign a print key via Utility gt Connectivity gt Buttons gt Select Destinations and select External Printer 1 2 My Computer LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 15 25 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Recording Images Chapter 16 Customizing Your System Describes how to create system user and exam presets LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Overview 16 2 Presets Preset Menus provides the following functionality System presets View and update general system configuration settings measurement and analysis settings and video settings backup and restore data and configuration files Imaging presets View
307. more information Changing or adding measurement parameters You can make changes to measurement parameters and you can add measurement parameters Changing To change a measurement parameter measurement parameters In the Selection menu select the measurement To change the name of the Parameter move the Trackball to the parameter name and press Set three times Type a name for the parameter For a description of other measurement changes See Changing Measurements on page 7 26 for more information 7 32 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Measurement and Calculation Setup Changing or adding measurement parameters continued Adding To add a measurement parameter measurement 1 Inthe Selection menu select the measurement parameters 2 To change the tool used to make a measurement In the Measurement section of the Measurement amp Analysis screen select the desired tool from the Tool list Select the arrow to display the drop down list NOTE If the Tool field is gray it cannot be changed 3 If necessary check Fetus OB only Location Loc or Side e Fetus If this is an OB measurement check this box Default ON e Location If this measurement includes a Prox Mid or Dist location check this box e Side If this measurement includes a Left or Right side check this box LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 33 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations
308. move through the 3D VOI Active Data Grey data Render Method Grey Surface Opacity 20 Itweshold 20 Scan Distance 6 1 cm Figure 5 12 Moving through a 3D Volume of Interest Red Hand NOTE Any plane in the volume can be made active highlighted with red box by clicking on it Viewing Specific Portions of the Anatomy NOTE You can pull back tissue to view specific portions of anatomy using the yellow hand Press Set when the yellow pointer finger is positioned on the yellow box Move the closed yellow hand to manipulate the 3D VOI This actually moves an edge A yellow hand appears only when the pointer is on an edge of the VOI Acie Data Grey data Render Method Grey Surfaca Opacity 20 Threshold 20 Scan Distance 6 1 com Figure 5 13 Manipulating the Edge of a 3D Volume of Interest Yellow Hand Pulling Back a Corner of the VOI to View Specific Anatomy You can pull back a corner to view specific portions of anatomy using the green hand Press Set when the green pointer finger is positioned on the green box Move the closed green hand to manipulate the 3D VOI Active Data Grey data Render Method Grey Surtacd Opacity 70 Itweshold 20 Scan Distance 6 1 cm Figure 5 14 Manipulating a Corner of the 3D Volume of Interest Green Hand Easy 3D 09 03 03 4 48 57 PM 09 03 03 4 47 52 PM adm ann 1 1 Carotid Active Data Grey data EN Medical Systems MI0 4 T1I0 0
309. mur length in the Results Window 9 14 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Gestational Sac OB Measurements and Calculations x S w xs To calculate the gestational sac you make three distance e es on measurements in two scan planes To display two scan planes press the L or R key Get an image in each scan plane and press Freeze 1 Select GS an active caliper displays a To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the distance value in the Results Window and displays an active caliper 2 To make the second and third distance measurement repeat steps a d Afte syst Res LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 r you complete the third distance measurement the em displays the gestational sac measurement in the ults Window 9 15 OB GYN Head Circumference HC gt gt MH eh FSF FS e0000 Ellipse HINTS 9 16 To calculate head circumference you make an ellipse trace or two distance measurements Select HC an active caliper displays If necessary select HC until Ellipse is displayed above the key To position the active
310. n 2321062 100 Rev 5 Patient Screen continued Beginning an Exam 5 Patient Information Patient ID Number Patient Name Last First and Middle Birthdate Age automatically calculated when birthdate is input Sex 6 Patient Detail Phone Patient s Address Telephone Number Comments 06 14 01 7 37 51 PM Figure 4 2 Detail Window CAUTION To avoid patient identification errors always verify the identification with the patient Make sure the correct patient identification appears on all screens and hard copy prints LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 4 5 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing for an Exam Patient Screen continued 7 Exam Information e Shows the Current Active Exam information Information pertinent to the selected exam category appears in the window All possible information needs to be entered e Detail Select the Detail box to activate deactivate the exam details Exam details include Indications Comments Admission Number Perf Physician s Telephone Number Ref Physician s Telephone Number and Operator Telephone Number 8 Patient List e Lists the patients in the database NOTE If Exam Date Between is selected the Input Dialog displays and you can select the date from the displayed calender e Search key select search item from Patient ID Last Name First Name Birthdate Sex and Last Exam Date future e Search string enter appropriate information e S
311. n be viewed in the Active Images screen or in the Analyze screen available from the display or from the New Patient menu 8 GE Medical Systems harsha malagi MI 1 2 Tis 0 0 10LB Cc J 09 09 02 10 59 03 AMadm 100 1 1 Carotid Preview Ga Se a EN B Fra 10 0 MH2 Gn 44 E A 2 3 Map D 0 D 4 0 cm 7 DR 63 FR 4Hz AO 100 09 09 02 11 05 39 AM Transfer PRF 2 6 kHz c IT fi ancel Transfer n WF 201 Hz ryh wry mn Th Here nyt T Nyy Ti mney An cm s sp 3 12 PW Worksheet Display Fra 5 0 MHz gt 20 Gn 25 a AO 100 gt ECA PRF 5 3 kHz WF 158 Hz Modify Calcs Show All gt VERT CS jl i SV 4 o DR 40 SVD 1 4 cm gt suBc Eia leat Mer ANE i delete browse Measure 1 Cursor Select 2 Move Res Win 2 Side 4 Angle Correct Mode PW Trace PS ED First Last CAPS Figure 15 1 Clipboard 15 6 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Image Data Management Previewing Clipboard Images 1 Press Set to obtain a cursor 2 Move the Trackball to position the pointer over the clipboard image you want to recall 3 An enlarged preview of the image is displayed on the left hand side of the monitor Recalling Images from the Clipboard To recall images from the clipboard 1 Press Set to obtain a cursor 2 Move the Trackball to position the pointer over the clipboard image you want to recall 3 Press Set to recall the image LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 15 7 Di
312. n page 16 50 for more information Select the desired body pattern on the Selection Menu The selected body pattern is displayed on the monitor Press the Move Pattern control on the Selection Menu to reposition the body pattern with the Trackball and Set controls A probe mark is associated with the body patterns and illustrates the probe position on the body pattern This marker can be placed with the Trackball and rotated with the Ellipse control The probe mark type is selectable by pressing the upper Probe Type control on the Selection Menu Press the Body Pattern and Clear controls to erase the body pattern The pattern is erased and the system exits the body pattern mode Press Set on the keyboard to exit without erasing the body pattern LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 6 15 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Body Patterns continued abdom1 abdom2 abdom3 abdom4 arm1 arm2 arm3 arm4 o o NOP aA FF eS DN arm5 oO arm6 body1 body2 body3 body4 body5 body6 ee re Caro eC N DO oO FP WB N gt breast1 breast2 co breast3 N oO chest N fetus1 N N fetus2 N oO fetus3 N fetus4 N oa fetus5 N O fetus6 N N fetus7 N fetus8 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Figure 6 5 Body Patterns
313. n the left side of the graph As time progresses the trace moves to the right The baseline of the graph representing zero velocity zero frequency shift or no detected flow appears as a solid line running horizontally across the display By convention movement toward the probe is positive and movement away from the probe is negative Positive frequencies or velocities appear above the baseline Negative frequencies or velocities appear below the baseline Typically blood flow is not uniform but is composed of a mix of blood cells moving at different velocities and in different directions Thus the display is composed of a spectrum as gray scale values Strong signals are displayed as bright while weak signals are displayed as varying shades of gray HPREF is invoked when you are operating in PW Doppler Mode and conditions activate HPRF when the velocity scale factor or sample volume gate depth exceeds certain limits When HPRF is active multiple sample volume gates appear along the Doppler mode cursor Doppler information can be received from any of the multiple sample volume gates The Doppler signals from all the gates are added together and displayed in one spectrum Information about the PW Doppler display is automatically written on the screen and updated when scanning parameters are changed This chapter includes e A discussion of PW Doppler e Activating Pulsed Wave Doppler e Optimizing the Doppler spectrum Imaged
314. n the sagittal plane Width and height are measured in the axial plane ah ASE Medical Systems Harsha Malagi MI 0 10 Tis 0 0 3C 08 18 03 11 30 37 AM J9 08 18 03 11 28 01 AMadm 41543592 1 1 Prostate Urology 4 Frq 4 0 MHz 5 p Gn 38 Bi Generic EBA 18 urology Map A O D 14 0 cm DR 75 FR 18 Hz AO 100 S Renal Renal L Renal H Renal W Worksheet Display Menu Delete Active Measure 1 MG 3 4 5 Cursor Select lt gt Mode 2D oden Renal L Renal H Renal W M amp A Figure 12 4 Renal Volume Touch Panel To measure Renal Volume 1 Scan the patient in the appropriate scan plane 2 Select the Renal folder an active caliper displays 3 Perform a standard distance measurement The system displays the distance value in the Results Window 4 To make the second and third distance measurement repeat steps 2 3 After you complete the third distance measurement the system displays the renal volume in the Results Window 12 8 Chapter 13 Pediatrics Describes how to perform Pediatrics measurements and calculations LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 13 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Pediatrics Introduction Pediatrics Exam Preparation Measurements and calculations derived from ultrasound images are intended to supplement other clinical procedures available to the attending physician The accuracy of measurements is not only determined by the system accuracy but also by use of
315. n until positioned inside the vessel Values Defaults to 50 of the depth and can move continuously throughout the field of view Benefits Positions the sample volume gate to sample blood flow Bioeffects Changing the sample volume gate position may change the TI and or MI Observe the output display for possible effects Doppler sample volume length Description Sizes the sample volume gate Adjusting To increase decrease the gate size adjust SV Length on the Selection Menu Hold down key to continuously size gate A black bar appears indicating changes made to the sample volume size but this is not a time discontinuity NOTE Adjustments to the sample volume gate size are made from the center point of the sample volume position Values Values vary by probe and application Sample volume gate size values are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Benefits A smaller gate produces accurate sampling results because it is more sensitive You can also enlarge the gate to hear the Doppler audio better or for sampling large vessels or areas Bioeffects Changing the sample volume gate size may change the TI and or MI Observe the output display for possible effects LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 49 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image PRF Description High PRF NOTE Adjusting Values Benefits Affect on other co
316. nce measurement a To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball b To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper c To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points if preset accordingly d To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the distance value in the Results Window After the first measurement the system displays an active caliper To make the second distance measurement repeat steps a d above The system displays the abdominal circumference in the Results Window Before you complete a measurement press Set e To toggle between active calipers press Measure To erase the second caliper and the current data measured and start the measurement again press Clear once To rotate through and activate fixed calipers from other measurements adjust Cursor Select After you complete the measurement to erase all data that has been measured to this point but not data entered onto worksheets press Clear LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Biparietal Diameter OB Measurements and Calculations x S xs To measure biparietal diameter make one distance PET A measurement 1 Select BPD an active caliper displays 2 To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball 3 To fix the start point
317. nces 1 2 3 To select the left or right adjust the Side knob Select Follicle an active caliper displays To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement press Set Press Clear The system displays the ovary follicle measurement in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 GYN Measurements Follicle measurements continued Two distances 1 To select the left or right adjust the Side knob 2 Select Follicle an active caliper displays 3 Make the first distance measurement a To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the distance value in the Results Window and displays an active caliper 4 To make the second distance measurement repeat steps a d above 5 Press Clear The system displays the ovary follicle measurement in the Results Window LOGIQ Boo
318. nd report E Backup procedure patient and report data Restore procedure patient and report data NOTE 2 Backup and restore strategy system and user d Do not use the following characters for labelling 2 Preset synchronization E M i lt gt 4 E System Peripherals Preset Menu 3 Select Format E System About Preset Menu Imaging Presets Annotations Libraries Presets Body Patterns Presets Application Presets Test Patterns Figure 6 9 Topic Link 6 22 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Electronic Documentation Searching for a Topic To search for a specific topic click on the Search tab in the left portion of the screen Type in the topic name in the Type in the keyword to find field Topics with the word or phrase you typed appear in the Select Topic to display area Either double click on the topic you want to view or highlight the topic and press the Display button to view this topics E HTML Help Crown Rump Length SPESE eeeed To measure crown rump length make one distance measurement Eveani Work aca Select BRA an active caliper displays Using other OB studies To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To comp
319. nectivity Adding a service to a destination device Removing a service In the Destination Device section in the Name field select the destination device In the Services section select the service from the pull down menu to the right Select the Add button below the list The system adds the service to the list of services In the Destination Device section in the Name field select the destination device In the Services section select the service In the Services section select the Remove button The system displays a warning message to confirm that you want to remove the service Select OK LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 65 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Changing parameters for a service Dicom Performed Procedure om Performed Procedure_01 Heme Max D 7 we _ IV Enable Retry Timeout 10 s Figure 16 37 Service Parameters 1 Inthe Destination Device section in the Name field select the destination device 2 Inthe Services section move the Trackball to highlight a service and press Set The system displays parameters for the service in the bottom section of the screen 3 Define the appropriate service configuration parameters Table 16 45 Service Parameters Common Fields Preset Parameter Description Name Free text give a descriptive name to the device Enable If selected this service is enabled
320. needed Record Keeping Quality Assurance binder Hard copy or electronic file of images Quality Assurance Checklists Display the following information while testing quality assurance e Acoustic Output Gain e Depth Probe e Dynamic Range e Set up new patient to be the name of the test Annotate the following e Any control where its value is NOT displayed e Significant phantom information Complete the following 1 Fill out the Ultrasound Quality Assurance Checklist for each probe as scheduled 2 Make a hard copy or archive the image 3 Compare images to baseline images and acceptable values 4 Evaluate trends over previous test periods 5 File hard copy or electronic file of images and checklist in Quality Assurance binder LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 18 29 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 User Maintenance Ultrasound Quality Assurance Checklist For Future Validation Table 18 8 Ultrasound Quality Assurance Checklist Part 1 Performed By Date System Serial Number Probe Type Probe Model Serial Number Phantom Model Serial Number Room Temperature Acoustic Output Gain Focal Zone Gray Map TGC Depth Monitor Setting Peripheral Settings Other Image Processing Control Settings Table 18 9 Part 2 Test Baseline Value Range Tested Value Image Hardcopy Archived Service Acceptable Called Date
321. ner filled with water 47 C e Display the biopsy guidezone on the monitor e Ensure that the needle echo falls within the guidezone markers 17 34 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing for a Biopsy The Biopsy Procedure WARNING Biopsy procedures must only be performed on live images GAGE Medical Systems 36 os 08 02 10 04 10 AM 09 08 02 10 04 10 AM 390 390 50 9 50 9 s Place coupling gel on the scanning surface of the probe sheath biopsy guide assembly Activate the biopsy guidezone on the system through the B Mode Selection Menu When using multi angle guides ensure that the proper guidezone angle is displayed MI0 6 Tils0 0 10LB Spa hyroid FrarmmeAverage 3 Biopsy None Line Density 3 Focus Width Middle Figure 17 22 B Mode Selection Menu 3 NOTE Scan to locate the target Center the target in the electronic guidezone path Enabling color flow would allow for visualization of the vascular structure around the area to be biopsied Place the needle in the guide between the needle barrel and needle clip Direct it into the area of interest for specimen retrieval LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 17 35 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes and Biopsy Post Biopsy When the biopsy is complete remove the needle barrel needle clip and probe sheath Properly dispose of these items in accordance with current facility guidelines The biopsy bracket can be sterili
322. ng Your System Keyboard Setup Procedure for Russian and Greek continued 5 At the bottom of the Input Locales menu you now need to specify the keys you will press to toggle between the English and the Russian or Greek keyboards Press Change Key Sequence The Change Key Sequence pop up menu appears Make sure the Enable Key Sequence box has a check mark in it Select CTRL SHIFT and say OK You are returned to the Input Locales menu Change Key Sequence Switch between input locales dv Enable Key Sequence gt rgi Ok TAD sac EEEE Pook Cancel Figure 16 6 Set Keyboard Toggle Keystroke 6 Apply the changes by pressing Apply Press OK 16 12 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Presets Keyboard Setup Procedure for Russian and Greek continued 7 Select the General tab Set Your Locale location to Russian or Greek LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 13 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Keyboard Setup Procedure for Russian and Greek continued 8 Press Set default at the bottom of the menu to Select System Locale Press Ok Press Apply to apply all these changes Select System Locale Figure 16 9 General Windows Pop Up Message 16 14 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Presets Keyboard Setup Procedure for Russian and Greek continued 10 Press Yes to restart the system when prompted After
323. ng the focal zone may change the TI and or MI Observe the output display for possible effects LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing B Mode Auto Optimize Auto Description Adjusting Values Affect on other Auto lets you optimize the image based upon a specified region of interest or anatomy within the B Mode image or Spectral Doppler in order to improve the contrast of the displayed image data Auto Optimize is available in B Mode specifically in single or multi image on live frozen or CINE images and while in zoom and in Spectral Doppler However it is not available in Display Zoom Auto in Doppler Mode optimizes the spectral data Auto adjusts the Velocity Scale PRF baseline shift dynamic range and invert if preset The benefit of Auto can be found in reduced optimization time and a more consistent and accurate optimization process Upon deactivation the spectrum is returned to the original dynamic range however the velocity scale baseline and angle is still optimized To activate press Auto Auto Optimize is active until you deactivate it However Auto Optimize values are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calc New Patient or Multi Frequency You may need to adjust the Gain controls M D Cursor Description Displays the M D Mode cursor on the B Mode image Adjusting To activate deactivate the M D
324. ning hints help you to save time to optimize the image LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Chapter 2 Safety Describes the safety and regulatory information pertinent for operating this ultrasound system LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 2 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Safety Precautions Precaution Levels Icon description Various levels of safety precautions may be found on the equipment and different levels of concern are identified by one of the following flag words and icons which precede the precautionary statement DANGER Indicates that a specific hazard is known to exist which through inappropriate conditions or actions will cause e Severe or fatal personal injury e Substantial property damage WARNING Indicates that a specific hazard is known to exist which through inappropriate conditions or actions may cause e Severe personal injury e Substantial property damage CAUTION Indicates that a potential hazard may exist which through inappropriate conditions or actions will or can cause e Minor injury e Property damage NOTE Indicates precautions or recommendations that should be used in the operation of the ultrasound system specifically e Maintaining an optimum system environment e Using this Manual e Notes to emphasize or clarify a point 2 2 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Precautions Hazard Symbols Icon Description Potential h
325. ns allow you to specify parameters for the following B Mode B Color Flow Mode CF Power Doppler Imaging PDI M Mode M Pulse Wave Mode PW General LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Imaging Presets Changing imaging presets To change imaging presets 1 2 NOTE On the keyboard select Utility Select Presets The system displays the Imaging screens See the Imaging screens on the following pages In the Preset list select the exam In the Probe list select the probe In the row across the top of the screen select the mode The system displays two sets of parameters and settings The left column lists all settings for the exam for example Abdomen The right column lists settings that apply only to the exam and probe combination To change a parameter do one of the following e Select the value from a list e Select one value from a choice of two or more buttons e Select or clear a check box After changing the parameters to save the changes select the Save button When you Save changes to imaging parameters the system saves changes to all modes not just the mode currently displayed NOTE If you have problems with imaging you can return parameters back to the original settings Select the exam probe and mode and then select Reload Factory Defaults The system returns the selected parameters to the original settings For information about the specific paramete
326. ns only the last six measurements of each type The three report page measurements can be averaged and the average used in other calculations LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Urology Calculations Urology Calculations Introduction Urology measurements offer two different types of measurement studies e Generic Common to all applications See Generic Measurements on page 7 57 for more information e Urology e This chapter describes Urology B Mode measurements The Urology M Mode measurements are common to other applications See M Mode Measurements on page 7 66 for more information The Urology Doppler measurements are common to other applications See Doppler Mode Measurements on page 7 69 for more information To change a study 1 To select another study select the desired study folder LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 12 3 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Urology B Mode Measurements In B Mode the Generic Exam Calcs for Urology includes the following measurements Stenosis e Volume Angle e AIB Ratio See B Mode Measurements on page 7 58 for more information The following measurements are located specifically in the Urology Exam Calcs Those specific measurements Bladder Volume Prostate Volume and Renal Volume are listed on the following pages Select the Urology Exam Calcs The following Touch Panel is displayed ahi ZASE Medical Systems
327. nt data For example to calculate the area of a gestational sac you need to measure width length and depth LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 3 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Exam workflow continued The following shows a workflow example for an obstetrics exam NEW PATIENT Exam Category Abdomen OBSTETRICS Gynecology Cardiology Pediatrics Study Generic OB 1 OB 2 3 OB General Fetal Heart Measurement GS CRL BPD FL For details on how to start a new patient See Beginning a New Patien on page 4 3 for more information 7 4 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Introduction Location of Measurement Controls Body Pattern 1 Zoom Bue Empse 4 Moasure O ol Zo O nS Commant WO Cursor E gt 3 Clear Scan Arca o gt J y Figure 7 1 Locating Measurement Controls 1 Measure Activates a measurement caliper and the associated calculation package 2 Set Fixes the caliper for measurements and completes the measurement sequence 3 Clear During a measurement sequence erases the measuring caliper and measurement data from the display When not performing a measurement sequence clears all calipers and measurements from the display 4 Ellipse After the first caliper for a distance measurement has been set and the second caliper positioned Ellipse activates the area ellipse measurement funct
328. nt key Annotation Mode can also be automatically activated by typing from the alphanumeric keyboard In this case the cursor begins at the same location where the annotation mode was exited The system automatically searches for the word you want in the comment bar and you can press tab to choose it After activating the annotation mode a vertical bar type cursor appears on the screen Use the Trackball to move the cursor The factory default color for annotations is yellow The color selection can be changed to any of the colors available on the system The choices are white yellow bright red orange etc The user cannot change the Font Family and Size To indicate a specific annotation or text group is selected the color turns to green Once the annotation is set or fixed the color returns to yellow or to the user selected color To delete comments by character press the Backspace key To delete all annotations and arrow marks press the Clear key twice immediately after entering the annotation mode To end the Comment Library Annotation function select Exit or press Comment LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 6 9 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Scanning Display Functions Adding Comments to an Image Annotation Retention NOTE Arrows and Pointers NOTE 6 10 Annotations from the B Mode images are retained and carried over when switching to multi image format or duplex mode The position of the comments is
329. ntrols Bioeffects 5 50 Adjusts the velocity scale to accommodate faster slower blood flow velocities Velocity scale determines pulse repetition frequency If the sample volume gate range exceeds single gate PRF capability the system automatically switches to high PRF mode Multiple gates appear and HPRF is indicated on the display High Pulse Repetition Frequency HPRF is a special operating mode of PW Doppler In HPRF mode multiple energy pulses are used This allows higher velocities to be detected without causing aliasing artifacts HPRF mode is used when detected velocities exceed the processing capabilities of the currently selected PW Doppler scale or when the selected anatomical site is too deep for the selected PW Doppler scale The pulse repetition frequency PRF is displayed to the left of the spectrum in frames per second Ensure that only one gate overlays a blood vessel at a time Otherwise signals from more than one flow area are superimposed To raise lower adjust the PRF on the Selection Menu PRF and Wall Filter share the same control Press the control to toggle between PRF and Wall Filter The display updates velocity scale parameters after you adjust the velocity scale Velocity Scale values vary by probe and application In Triplex when you change the velocity scale in Color Flow the Doppler Mode velocity scale is also updated Velocity Scale values are returned to the factory or user preset value
330. nts 5 24 Sweep Speed 5 24 Intended Use 5 25 Introduction 5 25 Activating Color Flow 5 26 Exiting Color Flow 5 27 Activating Power Doppler Imaging PDI 5 28 Color Flow and Power Doppler Displays 5 29 Color Flow Scanning Hints 5 30 Color Flow Mode Selection Menu 5 31 PDI Power Doppler Imaging Mode Selection Menu 5 32 i vi LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Table of Contents Gain ee ee eee ee eee eee ee eee 5 33 PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency 5 33 Wall Filter 5 34 Scan Area 5 34 Invert Color Invert 5 35 Baseline eee eee ee eee 5 35 Angle Steer 5 36 Color Flow Line Density 5 37 Map 2 2 eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee 5 37 Threshold 5 38 Frame Average
331. nts In Doppler Mode you can measure A B ratio by velocity time or acceleration See Velocity on page 7 67 for more information See Time on page 7 67 for more information To measure A B ratio by acceleration Select A B 1 2 Select ratio Acc The system displays an active caliper 3 Make a distance measurement of the A acceleration point a To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball b To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper c To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points d To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the distance value in the Results Window and displays an active caliper for the second distance measurement 4 To make a distance measurement of the B acceleration point repeat steps a d The system displays the two acceleration measurements and the A B ratio in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 73 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Max Pressure Gradient PG To measure Max PG 1 From the Doppler Generic Selection Menu select Max PG The system displays an active caliper with vertical and horizontal dotted lines 2 To position the caliper at the first pressure gradient point move the Trackball 3 To fix the measure point press Set The
332. nts and Calculations Adding a user defined measurement You can create a user defined measurement in a system defined folder or in a folder you created 1 Inthe Selection menu select the study or folder where you want to add the measurement 2 Inthe Measurement menu section select Add measurement The system displays the Add Measurement window See Figure 7 16 ADD MEASUREMENT Cancel Blank Use copy of 7 insert 7 Figure 7 16 Add Measurement window 3 Doone of the following NOTE 7 30 If you want to create this measurement from a copy of an existing measurement select Use copy of and then select a measurement from the list The list includes all measurements defined for the current exam category and selected mode This only applies to OB and Cardiac If you want to use an exsiting formula select Insert and then select a measurement from the list The list includes all measurements defined for the current exam category and selected mode You cannot edt this formula If you want to create a blank new measurement select Blank LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Measurement and Calculation Setup Adding a user defined measurement continued 4 Select OK e If you created a blank measurement the system adds a measurement with a name such as USERDEFM1 See Figure 7 17 e If you created a measurement from a copy of an existing measurement th
333. nued The following hints can help you to perform distance measurements HINTS e Before you complete a measurement e To toggle between active calipers press Measure To erase the second caliper and the current data measured and start the measurement again press Clear once e After you complete the measurement e To rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers adjust Cursor Select e To erase all data that has been measured to this point but not data entered onto worksheets press Clear LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 41 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Circumference and area ellipse measurement You can use an ellipse to measure circumference and area To measure with an ellipse e Press Measure once an active caliper displays To position the active caliper move the Trackball Set To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays F a second active caliper a To position the second caliper move the Trackball Body Pattem Adjust the Ellipse control an ellipse with an initial circle shape displays 7 42 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Mode Measurements Circumference and area ellipse measurement continued To position the ellipse and to size the measured axes move the calipers move the Trackball e To increase the size adjust the Ellipse control upward To decrease the size
334. o be used Locate the anatomy to be examined Get a good B Mode image Refer to B Mode section of this chapter for more information Press M D Cursor to display the sample volume cursor and gate or Press PW The PW Doppler spectrum appears and the system operates in combined B Doppler Mode Adjust Volume to adjust Doppler audio The Doppler signal is heard through the speakers Position the sample volume cursor by moving the Trackball left and right Position the sample volume gate by moving the Trackball up and down Size the gate by clicking SV Length Optimize the PW Doppler spectrum as necessary Refer to the Doppler Optimization section of this chapter for more information Press B Pause to toggle between real time B Mode with sample volume and spectral display with audio Sample along the whole length of the vessel Make sure that the probe is parallel to flow Listen then look when positioning the sample volume cursor Press Freeze to hold the trace in memory and stop imaging Activate CINE Timeline as necessary See Activating CINE on page 6 6 for more information Perform measurements and calculations as necessary Refer to the Measurements and Calculations chapter for more information LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 41 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Typical exam protocol continued 13 Record results by pressing the appropriate print key depending on the setup of your reco
335. o the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs New Patient Gets rid of excess unnecessary information Cleans out low level noise above and below the baseline so you don t see or hear it on the spectrum Wall filter may be changed by changes to the velocity scale Adjusts the baseline to accommodate faster or slower blood flows to eliminate aliasing Baseline adjusts the point in the spectrum where the velocity trace is at zero The default baseline is at the midpoint of the spectrum To shift the baseline adjust Baseline on the Selection Menu The baseline displays as a solid line running across the spectrum The baseline is raised and lowered in equal increments depending on the current Doppler scale factor The control does not wrap when the maximum baseline shift in either direction has been reached 12 increments with 0 being the center of the display and 100 being the top edge of the display and 100 being the bottom edge of the display Baseline values vary by probe and application and are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Unwraps the alias Rearranges the velocity scale without changing the velocity scale Readjusts the positive and negative velocities limit without changing the total velocity range LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 M D Cursor Description
336. ock 2SD 2SD GA LMP 22w5d FL 3 97 cm GA 22w5d 41 0 Figure 9 7 Fetal Trending on Fetal Growth Curve Graph FL The legend at the bottom of the graph shows the symbols and colors that indicate Past and Present data LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 51 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Fetal Trending continued To manually enter If you have data from a previous ultrasound exam that you want past exam data to use for fetal trending but it is not in the system you can manually enter the data 1 After you have registered the patient for this exam on the Patient Data Entry screen in the Exam Information Obstetrics section select Past Exam The system displays the Input Past Exam screen See Figure 9 8 2 Enter the data from previous exams To enter data on page 2 select Next 4 After you enter the previous exam data select Exit to Save go The system saves the previous exam data When you view the Fetal Growth Curve Graphs select Plot Both to view fetal trending The system automatically uses the data you entered Fetus A Prev Hext Page 1 of 2 Input Past Exam EFW BPD HC AC FL Exam Date g cm cm cm cm mmiddiyyyy Hadlock Hadlock Hadlock Hadlock Hadlock Past Exam Data is used for plotting on Fetal Trend Graph Cancel Exit to Save Figure 9 8 Input Past Exam screen page 1 9 52 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Graphs Fetal Trending continued
337. ock 9 55 cm Avg 2D Calculations EFWV AC BPD FL HC 3570 q 535 64q 7lb 140z EFVv Hadlock GP gt 97 HC AC gt 0 80 0 94 1 11 FL AC gt 28 60 20 00 24 00 FLBPD gt 110 12 71 0 87 0 FL HC gt 35 85 19 80 22 09 3 Figure 9 3 OB Worksheet The OB Worksheet has three sections of information 1 Patient data 2 Measurement information 3 Calculation information 9 40 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Patient data OB Measurements and Calculations The Patient data section at the top of the worksheet lists information from the Patient Data Entry screen You can select the following fields FetusNo if this is a multi gestational patient you can select the fetus in this field You can also adjust the Fetus knob to select the fetus CUA AUA select the ultrasound age calculation method e Composite Ultrasound Age CUA regression calculation e Average Ultrasound Age AUA an arithmetic average You can select the method in this field or adjust the Select CUA AUA knob You can enter information in the following fields FetusPos type information about the fetus position PLAC type information about the placenta LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 41 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Measurement information 9 42 This section lists the results of all measurements CUA or AUA If this field is checked the system uses the measurement to calculate the ultraso
338. ogical procedures must be done with the use of legally marketed sterile pyrogen free probe sheaths 3 After removing from the germicide rinse the probe following the germicide manufacturer s rinsing instructions Flush all visible germicide residue from the probe and allow to air dry CREUTZFIELD JACOB DISEASE Neurological use on patients with this disease must be avoided If a probe becomes contaminated there is no adequate disinfecting means LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probe Overview Disinfecting probes continued WARNING Ultrasound transducers can easily be damaged by improper handling and by contact with certain chemicals Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage e Do not immerse the probe into any liquid beyond the level specified for that probe Never immerse the transducer connector or probe adapters into any liquid e Avoid mechanical shock or impact to the transducer and do not apply excessive bending or pulling force to the cable e Transducer damage can result from contact with inappropriate coupling or cleaning agents Do not soak or saturate transducers with solutions containing alcohol bleach ammonium chloride compounds or hydrogen peroxide e Avoid contact with solutions or coupling gels containing mineral oil or lanolin e Avoid temperatures above 60 C Inspect the probe prior to use for damage or degeneration to the ho
339. ok less pixely Select Spatial Filter to adjust 0 5 Smooths the image Controls the number of samples gathered for a single color flow vector To increase decrease the packet size select Packet Size left right Values vary by probe and application and are returned to factory or user preset value when you change Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Values are displayed on the monitor display as PSize Allows you to improve the color sensitivity and accuracy of color averaging increase packet size or frame rate decrease packet size as needed When you decrease the packet size you increase the frame rate controls at the expense of image quality When you increase the packet size you improve image quality at the expense of frame rate Bioeffects Changing packet size may change the TI and or MI Observe the output display for possible effects LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 39 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Optimizing Spectral Doppler Intended Use Doppler is intended to provide measurement data concerning the velocity of moving tissues and fluids PW Doppler lets you examine blood flow data selectively from a small region called the sample volume Typical Use PW Doppler In Pulsed Wave Doppler PW Mode energy is transmitted from the ultrasound probe into the patient as in B Mode However the received echoes are processed to extract the difference in frequency between the
340. ollicle measurements GYN exam 9 68 Foot length Ft 9 28 Footswitch activating 3 12 connection 3 12 formatting removable media 16 100 Function keys programmable 16 115 G Gels coupling 17 18 General imaging changing presets 16 34 Generic studies and measurements 7 57 Generic measurements Stenosis 7 59 AJB ratio 7 65 angle 7 64 heart rate 7 68 M Mode 7 66 volume 7 61 Generic study Doppler mode 7 69 Gestational sac GS 9 15 GYN exam Doppler measurements 9 75 endometrium thickness 9 71 follicle measurements 9 68 M Mode measurements 9 74 ovaries measurements 9 72 uterus measurements 9 73 Gynecology exam 9 65 B Mode measurements 9 67 to start 9 66 H Hazards 2 6 2 9 17 16 biological 2 9 17 10 defined 2 3 electrical 2 8 17 9 explosion 2 8 mechanical 17 9 symbols 2 3 Head circumference HC 9 16 Heart rate Index 3 Index B Mode generic measurement 7 68 OB GYN vessel measurement 9 37 Humerus length HL 9 29 Image Annotation 6 10 Imaging parameters display location 3 46 Indications for Use 1 5 Information requesting 1 7 Intended Uses 5 2 K Key Configuration 16 115 Keyboard special keys 3 40 L Labeling 17 3 libraries annotations 16 39 body patterns 16 46 log on procedures defining 16 113 LOGIQ 7 Contraindications 1 6 Indications for Use 1 5 Logon Admin screen 16 113
341. on The Logon section defines log on procedures ADMIN Users Logon System Admin KeyConfig StartMenu r Auto Logon r Common Network Login User epn Remote Database Login User DO O i y O r Database maintanance Unlock all Figure 16 66 Administrative Logon Preset Menu Preset Parameter Table 16 67 Logon Description Auto Logon Defines logon procedures e When cleared to log on the user must select a user ID and enter a password e When selected the system is started automatically using the last user logon Common Network Login Define the user ID and password used to access the network User User ID for network accessPassword Password for network access Remote Database Login Define the user ID for database access Database Maintenance Unlocks all patients LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 16 113 Customizing Your System System Admin The System Admin screen has information about any options implemented for the system ADMIN Users Logon System Admin Keycontig StartMenu Product Radiology Dragon HW Number OxFFFFFFFF System Serial Number A r SW Option Key BAFRK VQDFH EQL VM GEH3R R6ZR2 BEJXX 5RBH7 95MXH VHUPOQ HSKVK BHEPX H4ZBA FZQCX TTLRK 390Z5 BV8VU 8B284 R4FQD DPPA8 ZW8wy Options Optionname Status Basic Permanent DICOM Permanent ColorFlow
342. on 4 steps Rotation 0 90 180 270 Imaging Depth 4 30cm Minimum 4 cm Zoom Maximum 30 cm e Transmission Focus 1 8 Focus Points selectable Focus Position 8 steps e Receiving Focus CDA CDF Continuous Dynamic Focus Continuous Dynamic Aperture 256 Shades of Grey Zoom Smart Zoom 2 times write zoom with increased resolution Image Archive e Archiving Format DICOM e Possibly exported to other format CINE Memory Image Memory CINE Gauge and CINE Image number display CINE Review Loop Selectable CINE Sequence for CINE Review by Start Frame and End Frame e Measurements Calculations amp Annotations on CINE Playback Images Memory Stick 18 4 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Data LOGIQ Book Features Specifications continued Table 18 4 Measurements and Calculations B Mode e Distance e Circumference Area Echo Level e Angle e Ratios Depth from Probe Surface M Mode e Distance e Time Slope Heart Rate Doppler Measurements Calculations e Velocity e Frequency e Time e Acceleration e Heart Rate e Auto Doppler Trace function with automatic calculations e Time Averaged Max Mean Velocity e Ratios PI Pulsatility Index RI Resistivity Index Table 18 5 Probes Vascular Measurements Calculations Summary Worksheet Summary Report Obstetrics Measurements Calculations e Gestational
343. on of Immunity Safety Precautions This system is suitable for use in the following environment The user must assure that the system is used according to the specified guidance and only in the electromagnetic environment listed Table 2 6 Declaration of Immunity Immunity Type Test Level Compliance EMC Environment and Guidance IEC 61000 4 2 Static discharge ESD 6 kV contact 8 kV air 6 kV contact 8 kV air IEC 61000 4 4 Electrical fast transient burst 2 kV for mains 1 kV for SIP SOP 2 kV for mains 1 kV for SIP SOP IEC 61000 4 5 Surge Immunity 1 kV differential 2 kV common 1 kV differential 2 kV common IEC 61000 4 11 lt 507 gt 95 dip lt 50 gt 95 dip Voltage dips for 0 5 cycle for 0 5 cycle shortinterruptions 4007 60 Oip for5 400 60 Oip for 5 and voltage cycles cycles variations on 700 30 Oip for 700 30 Oip for mains supply 25 cycles 25 cycles lt 507 gt 95 dip lt 507 295 dip for 5 sec for 5 sec IEC 61000 4 8 3 A m 3 A m Power frequency 50 60 Hz magnetic field IEC 61000 4 6 3 Vams 3 VRMS Conducted RF 150 kHz 80 MHz 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 3 V m 3 V m Radiated RF 80 MHz 2 5 GHz 80 MHz 2 5 GHz Floors should be wood concrete or ceramic tile If floors are covered with synthetic material the relative humidity should be at least 30 Mains power quality shou
344. on over scan direction or right left image reversal 5 20 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing M Mode Intended Use Optimizing M Mode M Mode is intended to provide a display format and measurement capability that represents tissue displacement motion occurring over time along a single vector Typical exam protocol A typical examination using M Mode might proceed as follows 1 Get a good B Mode image Survey the anatomy and place the area of interest near the center of the B Mode image 2 Press M D Cursor 3 Trackball to position the mode cursor over the area that you want to display in M Mode 4 Press M Mode 5 Adjust the Sweep Speed TGC Gain Power Output and Focus Position as needed 6 Press Freeze to stop the M trace 7 Record the trace to disk or to the hard copy device 8 Press Freeze to continue imaging 9 To exit press M Mode LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 21 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 M Mode Display HSE Medical Systems MI 0 4 Tis 0 2 10Lb RS 09 02 03 9 21 11 AM 29709102103 9 21 11 AM sclenie Carotid ee B Frq 8 0 MHz eT 66 EA 3 2 Map AD 4 0 cm 238 238 12 4 12 4 s Gray Map Dynamic Range Sweep Speed Display Format lt Colorize Edge Enhance Full Timeline Pos Figure 5 3 M Mode Display M Mode Display Description Format Values M Mode Gain Displays Overall M Mode Gain as dB Depth Scale Indicator Image depth in
345. onic Convex Array e Electronic Micro convex Array e Electronic Linear Array Endocavitary Electronic Micro convex Operating Modes B Mode M Mode PW Doppler Color Flow Doppler CFM B M Mode B PWD Mode B CFM Options DICOM 3 0 connectivity e Insite capability Accessory Options e Footswitch e Battery Media Options CD RW Type II PCMCIA wireless LAN card Lucent Orinoco Type II PCMCIA memory card SanDisk Peripheral Options B W Printer LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 18 3 User Maintenance LOGIQ Book Features Specifications continued Table 18 3 System Parameters Post Processing ATO Automatic Tissue Optimization ADO Automatic Doppler Optimization e 14 B Mode Grey Maps 14 M Mode Grey Maps e Rejection funtion adjustable from 2 to 20 in 6 digit steps Pre Processing B M Mode Gain TGC Dynamic Range Transmission Focus Position Transmission Focus Number Transmission Frequency Edge Enhancement Image Softener Level Sweep Speed for M Mode D Mode Gain Dynamic Range Transmission Frequency Velocity Scale PRF Wall Filter Baseline Shift Sweep Speed Color Flow CFM Gain CFM Velocity Range MTI Filter Pulse Packet Size CFM Spatial Filter CFM Frame Averaging Diagnostic Color Display Mode Baseline Shift CFM ACE Filter Image Processing and Presentation Image Reverse Right Left e Image Rotati
346. onnection 3 11 Moving the System 3 18 Transporting the System 3 20 Attaching the Security Cable 3 21 Connecting and Using the System 3 22 Rotate the LCD monitor 3 30 Brightness 3 31 Speakers 3 31 Introduction 3 32 Selecting a probe 3 32 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual i v Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Connecting the Probe 3 33 Cable Handling 3 34 Deactivating the Probe 3 35 Disconnecting the Probe 3 36 Transporting Probes 3 37 Storing the Probe 3 37 Control Panel Map 3 38 Monitor Display 3 45 Chapter 4 Preparing for an Exam Introduction 4 2 Beginning a New Patient 4 3 Chapter 5 Optimizing the Image Intended Uses 5 2 B Mode Selection Menu
347. ontinued Editing while Backspace over any error s made Blank spaces take the place annotating of the letter s that were there Continue typing the annotation after backspacing over all incorrect letters To delete previous character s e Press Backspace as many times as necessary to make the deletion e Once all texts within the selected text group are deleted then the cursor will find another text group to delete to the upper left direction f there is no more text to delete the cursor will be located at home position To move through the text a word at a time e Press Tab to move to the right by text group Preset Keyboard Tab Word NOTE Press Shift Tab to move to the left 6 14 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Annotating an Image Body Patterns An additional way to annotate the image display is with body patterns Body patterns are a simple graphic of a portion of the anatomy that is frequently scanned The body pattern and probe marker can serve as a reference for a patient and probe positioning when images are archived or scanned To activate body patterns press the Body Pattern control A maximum of 8 body pattern packages are displayed according to exam category and preset The body pattern packages may be customized to accommodate user preference Up to 30 individual body patterns in the packages can be changed See Body Pattern Libraries Applications Preset Menu o
348. or the Gynecology exam are identical to M Mode measurements for the Obstetrics exam These measurements include stenosis A B ratio and heart rate For details regarding these measurements See M Mode Measurements on page 9 34 for more information GDE Medical Systems MI 0 20 Tis 0 1 E8C RS Jo 09 03 03 1 38 30 PM 09 03 03 1 38 30 PM adm b GA LMP 31w6d i 1 0 725 Gynecology F d 4 71 cm Gn Bi Generic L 0 00 cm Lefi E A amp General Gynecology Leal Map AD i AB Ratio D 10 0 cm FR 18 Hz AO 100 Stenosis HR Worksheet Display Menu Delete Active Modei Stenosis start e Place the first point M amp A Figure 9 19 M Mode Generic study Doppler Mode Measurements Doppler measurements for the Gynecology exam are identical to Doppler measurements for the Obstetrics exam These measurements include the following vessels uterine ovarian umbilical middle cerebral artery aorta placenta and descending aorta For each vessel you can make any of the following measurements peak systole minimum diastole end diastole heart rate TAMAX pulsatility index resistive index acceleration PS ED ED PS and acceleration time For details regarding these measurements See Doppler Mode Measurements on page 9 35 for more information En GE Medical Systems MI 0 25 Tis 0 2 E8C RS 09 03 03 1 49 00 PM Ci 1 09 03 03 1 49 00 PM adm b GA LMP 31w6d 1 1 OB 2 3 Gynecology OCS GF B g Vel 17
349. ore information Value Type the value of the Selected Tag item For example if you select Referring Physician s Name in the Select Tag field you can enter the name of the physician in the Value field Don t Use Select to turn off the selected search criteria To exclude a tag from the worklist query select Don t Use and then select Add to List Add to List Select to add the tag and value to the list of search criteria Remove Select to remove the tag and value from the list of search criteria Name The name of a tag selected to use for search criteria Value The value of the tag For example if the tag is Referring Physician s Name this field contains the name of the referring physician Don t Use Indicates if the Don t Use check box is selected for this tag 16 78 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Search Criteria tags Configuring Connectivity The following is a list of the tags in the Select Tag field of the DICOM Worklist Search Criteria dialog box parameters may change Modality Referring Physician s Name Referenced Study Sequence Referenced Patient Sequence Patient s Birth Time Other Patient IDs Patient s Size Patient s Weight Medical Alerts Contrast Allergies Ethnic Group Additional Patient History Pregnancy Status Patient Comments Study Instance UID Requesting Physician Requesting Service Requested Procedure Descript
350. osseous convexity to labrum acetabulare 3 The Acetabulum roof line connects the lower edge of the osilium to the osseous convexity The a Alpha angle is the supplement of the angle between 1 and 3 It characterizes the osseous convexity The B Beta angle is the angle between lines 1 and 2 It characterizes the bone supplementing additional roofing by the cartilaginous convexity Figure 13 2 Hip Dysplasia Anatomical Landmarks a Ilium d Bony Roof b Iliac Bone e Cartilaginous acetabular roof c Labrum f Femoral Head 1Source R GRAF journal of Pediatric Orthopedics 4 735 740 1984 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 13 5 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Pediatrics B Mode Measurements continued Hip Dysplasia To make a Hip Dysplasia measurement Measurement continued From the Selection Menu select either the right or left side orientation and then select HIP A horizontal dotted line displays O To place the baseline move the Trackball Position the crosshairs edge at the osseous convexity of the ilium Body Patten To rotate or change inclination adjust the Ellipse control or Hip Rotate Set To fix the baseline press Set P The system displays a second dotted line at an angle To place the line along the inclination line of the osseous convexity to labrum acetabulare move the Trackball Body Pattem To rotate or change inclination adjust the Ellipse control or Hip Rotate Ellip
351. peed of the CINE Loop playback Roll the Trackball to the left to slow down playback roll the Trackball right to speed up playback The Loop Speed displays in the lower right hand corner of the screen Swap set and Select the functionality for the left Set key on the program key Front Panel Pointer Set or Freeze Program Key Allows you to program the left set key s functionality Mapping Pointer Set or Freeze You need to reboot the system after reprogramming the Set and Select keys Table 16 5 Utility Preset Parameter Description Prompt for Save on If selected the system prompts you to save data Cancel or Exit when you select cancel or exit without saving LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 7 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Foreign Language Keyboard Setup To set up the keyboard for non Russian Greek languages 1 Inthe Utility gt System gt General set the Language as desired 2 Inthe Utility gt System gt Regional Settings set the Input Locale for International English 3 Reboot the system 4 To type foreign characters press and hold down the Alt GR appropriate keyboard key Keyboard Setup Procedure for Russian and Greek 1 Press Utility gt System gt General gt Language and change the Language to RUS or GRK Press Save DO NOT reboot the system yet Location Haspital oe Medical Systems Department Development
352. perator Controls Prior to cleaning any part of the system 1 Turn off the system power If possible disconnect the power cord See Power Off on page 3 29 for more information To clean the system cabinet 1 Moisten a soft non abrasive folded cloth 2 Wipe down the top front back and both sides of the system cabinet Do not spray any liquid directly into the unit To clean the monitor face Use a soft folded cloth and a glass cleaner solution Apply the glass cleaner to the cloth Gently wipe the monitor face Do NOT use a glass cleaner that has a hydrocarbon base such as Benzene Methyl Alcohol or Methyl Ethyl Ketone on monitors with the filter anti glare shield Hard rubbing will also damage the filter When cleaning the screen make sure not to scratch the LCD To clean the operator control panel 1 Moisten a soft non abrasive folded cloth with a mild general purpose non abrasive soap and water solution 2 Wipe down operator control panel 3 Use a cotton swab to clean around keys or controls Use a toothpick to remove solids from between keys and controls NOTE When cleaning the operator control panel make sure not to spill or spray any liquid on the controls into the system cabinet or in the probe connection receptacle NOTE In case of SARS use bleach alcohol or Cidex in a normal diluted form for cleaning disinfecting the operator panel LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 18 11 Direction 232
353. pherals following the installation procedures described in the Option Installation manuals 2 16 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Notice Safety Precautions Designation of Peripheral Equipment Connectable to This Product The equipment indicated in Chapter 13 can be hooked up to the product without compromising its EMC performance Avoid using equipment not designated in the list Failure to comply with this instruction may result in poor EMC performance of the product Notice against User Modification The user should never modify this product User modifications may cause degradation in EMC performance Modification of the product includes changes in a Cables length material wiring etc b System installation layout c System configuration components d Securing system parts cover open close cover screwing LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 2 17 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Peripheral Update for EC countries Peripheral used in the patient environment CAUTION 2 18 The following is intended to provide the users in EC countries with updated information concerning the connection of the LOGIQ Book to image recording and other devices or communication networks The LOGIQ Book has been verified for overall safety compatibility and compliance with the following on board image recording devices e Sony UP D895 Digital Printer The LOGIQ Book may also be used safel
354. pling gel on the face of the probe Place the proper sanitary sheath over the probe and biopsy bracket Use the rubber bands supplied to hold the sheath in place Figure 17 9 Applying Sanitary Sheath LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 17 27 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes and Biopsy Fixed Needle Guide Assembly continued Snap the fixed or adjustable needle clip onto the biopsy guide bracket Figure 17 10 Fixed Needle Clip Attachment 1 Sheath Choose the desired gauge size needle barrel Twist it back and forth to remove it from the plastic tree Figure 17 11 Needle Barrels 17 28 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing for a Biopsy Fixed Needle Guide Assembly continued Place the needle barrel into the needle clip with the desired gauge facing the needle clip and snap into place Figure 17 12 Needle Barrel Installation CAUTION Ensure that all guide parts are seated properly prior to perfoming a biopsy LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 17 29 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes and Biopsy Multi Angle Biopsy Guide Assembly WARNING DO NOT attempt to use the multi angle biopsy bracket and needle guide until the manufacturer s instructions provided with the biopsy bracket and needle guide in the kit have been read and thoroughly understood Scan the patient and identify the target for biopsy Move the probe to locate the target to the center of the image Enable the
355. ppropriate type 2 Plug the AC adapter connector on the LOGIQ Book 3 Push the power plug securely into the wall outlet Use caution to ensure that the power cable does not disconnect during system use If the system is accidentally unplugged data may be lost The system should rest on the handle to allow an air gap to prevent overheating DO NOT use the LOGIQ Book on plastic foam paper or similar type surfaces The system could overheat and slow down Ensure that the LOGIQ Book is on a sturdy heat resistant surface To avoid risk of fire the system power must be supplied from a separate properly rated outlet See Before the system arrives on page 3 3 for more information Under no circumstances should the AC power plug be altered changed or adapted to a configuration rated less than specified Never use an extension cord or adapter plug To help assure grounding reliability connect to a hospital grade or hospital only grounded power outlet LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Powering the System Connecting and Using the System continued Figure 3 18 Example Plug and Outlet Configurations 1 100 120 VAC 120 VA USA Plug and Outlet Configuration 2 220 240 VAC 120 VA Europe Latin America Plug and Outlet Configuration 3 220 240 VAC 120 VA China Plug and Outlet Configuration LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 23 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparin
356. preset value when you change Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Gets rid of excess unnecessary low frequency signals caused by motion Scan Area sizes and positions the color window The window grows from the center of the color flow window To adjust the size press Scan Area Size appears in the Trackball Status area on the monitor display then move the Trackball left right up down To adjust the position press Scan Area Pos appears in the Trackball Status area on the monitor display then move the Trackball to position the color window Sector and Convex Probes Ranges from 20 degrees to 120 degrees in 1 degree to 2 degree increments Linear Probe Ranges from 10 to full B Mode image Increase the color window to see a larger area decrease the color window to improve frame rate The smaller the color window the faster the frame rate and vice versa Sizing the color window may change the TI and or MI Observe the output display for possible effects LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing Color Flow Invert Color Invert Description NOTE Adjusting Values Benefits Baseline Description Adjusting Values Benefits Lets you view blood flow from a different perspective e g red away negative velocities and blue toward positive velocities You can invert a real time or frozen image Invert reverses the color map NOT the color PRF To revers
357. procedures to backup and restore system and user defined configurations Depending on the system you can use either a CD or MOD for system backup WARNING GE Medical Systems is not responsible for lost data if the suggested backup procedures are not followed and will not aid in the recovery of lost data General System Imaging System Measure Backup Restore Peripherals About Restore Backup M No Record Repor Archive M No Record Patient Archive Patient Archive r Report Archive B User Defined Configuration No Record Media Media Mo x User Defined Configuration P Restore Detailed Restore Imaging Presets B Connectivity Configuration r Measurement Configuration C Annotations Body Patterns Libraries All Others H Restore Figure 16 13 System Backup Restore Preset Menu LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 21 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System System Backup and Restore Preset Menu continued Table 16 13 Backup Preset Parameter Description Patient Archive Select to back up patient data User Defined Configuration Select to back up the user defined configuration settings Backup Select to begin the backup Table 16 14 Media Preset Parameter Description Media Select CD or MO as appropriate Table 16 15 Restore Preset Parameter Desc
358. psy devices and accessories e Use protective barriers such as gloves and probe sheaths e After use follow proper procedures for decontamination cleaning and waste disposal CAUTION Improper cleaning methods and the use of certain cleaning and disinfecting agents can cause damage to the plastic components that will degrade imaging performance or increase the risk of electric shock See Probe Safety on page 17 9 for more information 17 22 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing for a Biopsy Preparing for a Biopsy Displaying the Guidezone Activate the Biopsy Kit by selecting it from the B Mode Selection Menu Menu GGE Medical Systems MI0 6 Tis0 0 10LB 09 08 02 10 04 10 AM Fos 08 02 10 04 10 AM ees Thyroid lt lt B Mode gt gt 390 390 50 9 50 9 s lt lt B Mode gt gt FrameAverage 3 Biopsy None Line Density 3 Focus Width Middle Figure 17 6 B Mode Selection Menu The available biopsy options appear when Biopsy Kit is selected There are fixed and adjustable angle biopsy kits available with the LOGIQ Book depending on the probe Select the desired biopsy kit LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 17 23 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Displaying the Guidezone continued i 2 9 GE Medical Systems MI 0 16 Tis0 1 3C 04 17 02 3 51 27 PM IE 04 17102 3 51 27 PM 1 1 Abdomen CF B Frq 4 0 MHz Gn EA 03 Map B0 D 16 0 cm DR 81 FR 13 Hz AO
359. r Panel continued Footswitch Option 3 12 NOTE NOTE CAUTION The USB devices should be connected to the LOGIQ Book first power on the USB devices before turning on the LOGIQ Book After you insert the PC card into the PCMCIA port a beep is heard which means the card works properly Otherwise please remove the card and insert it again The connection of equipment or transmission networks other than as specified in these instructions can result in electric shock hazard Alternate connections will require verification of compatibility and conformity to IEC EN 60601 1 1 by the installer Use only the GE recommended footswitch The footswitch may be used as select keys Use the footswitch to freeze the real time image Use the footswitch as P1 P2 and P3 buttons on the keyboard The footswitch connection is located on the USB port LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Console Overview Peripherals Connection 1 Connect the B W printer to the system The B W printer can be properly connected using the USB Port 1 the right portion of the figure 2 Connect the CD RW to the system The CD RW can be properly connected using the USB Port 1 or 2 Figure 3 8 CD RW Connection CAUTION Do not connect the CD RW to the system while scanning LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 13 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Peripherals Connection continued 3 Connect t
360. r of where the system is operating within the range of available output Depending on the examination and type of tissue involved the TI parameter will be one of three types Soft Tissue Thermal Index TIS Used when imaging soft tissue only it provides an estimate of potential temperature increase in soft tissue e Bone Thermal Index TIB Used when bone is near the focus of the image as in the third trimester OB examination it provides an estimate of potential temperature increase in the bone or adjacent soft tissue e Cranial Bone Thermal Index TIC Used when bone is near the skin surface as in transcranial examination it provides an estimate of potential temperature increase in the bone or adjacent soft tissue The TI and MI is displayed at all times The MI display starts at a value of 0 0 and increments in steps of 0 1 while the TI display starts at a value of 0 4 and increments in steps of 0 1 values less than 0 4 are displayed as lt 0 4 Display precision is 0 1 and accuracy is 50 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Precautions Controls Affecting Acoustic Output The potential for producing mechanical bioeffects MI or thermal bioeffects TI can be influenced by certain controls Direct The Acoustic Output control has the most significant effect on Acoustic Output Indirect Indirect effects may occur when adjusting controls Controls that can influence MI and TI are d
361. raries Libraries Preset Menu 16 46 Body Pattern Libraries Body Patterns Preset Menu 16 49 Body Pattern Libraries Applications Preset Menu 16 50 Overview 16 52 Overview 16 55 Overview 16 57 Connectivity Functions 16 58 TCPIP 16 59 Services Destinations 16 62 Buttons 16 84 Dataflow 16 90 Screens 16 96 Tools 16 99 Views 16 101 Overview 16 109 Users 2 2 2 ee eee eee eee eee eee eee 16 110 Logon 16 113 System Admin 16 114 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Key Configuration 16 115 Start Menu 16 116 Chapter 17 Probes and Biopsy Ergonomics 17 2 Cable handling 17 2 Probe orientation
362. rding devices 14 Press Freeze to resume imaging 15 Repeat the above procedure until all relevant flow sites have been examined 16 Replace the probe in its respective holder Activating Doppler Mode Use To exit To activate PW Doppler Mode press PW The Doppler spectrum displays along with the B Mode image The cursor changes to a Doppler cursor You can now position and size the sample volume gate to get a velocity Use Doppler Audio to listen for when the sample volume gate is positioned over an area of flow B Pause toggles between real time 2D with Sample Volume and real time spectral display Doppler is used to examine blood flow information in the vessels of the legs arms abdomen neck and heart PW Doppler Mode press PW Activating Triplex Mode Use To Exit 5 42 To activate Triplex Mode press CF Press PW The Doppler spectrum displays along with the Color Flow and B Mode image The cursor changes to a Doppler cursor You can now position and size the sample volume gate to get a velocity Use Doppler Audio to listen for when the sample volume gate is positioned over an area of flow Triplex Mode is used to examine blood flow information in the vessels of the legs arms abdomen neck and heart PW Doppler Mode press CF then PW LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing Spectral Doppler Doppler Display Time zero the start of the trace appears o
363. re programmable Arrows Eject Report Spooler Utility Veterinary or Worksheet LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 16 115 Customizing Your System Start Menu The Start Menu screen allows the Field Engineer to program the Start Menu Blue Tooth ae Service Platform Figure 16 69 Start Menu Preset Menu Table 16 70 Start Menu Preset Parameter Description Available All the available items in the Start Menu list Actual Active Current Start Menu s enabled item list 16 116 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Chapter 17 Probes and Biopsy This chapter consists of the information of each probe and describes some special concerns biopsy kits and accessories as well as basic procedures for attaching a bispsy guide to the different types of probes LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 17 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes and Biopsy Probe Overview Ergonomics Probes have been ergonomically designed to e Handle and manipulate with ease e Connect to the system with one hand e Be lightweight and balanced e Have rounded edges and smooth surfaces Cables have been designed to e Connect to system with appropriate cable length e Stand up to typical wear by cleaning and disinfectant agents contact with approved gel etc Cable handling Take the following precautions with probe cables e Keep free from wheels Do not ben
364. re returned to factory or user preset value when you change Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Limits color flow overlay to low level echoes inside vessel walls Helps minimize color bleeding outside vessel walls Averages color frames To smooth temporal averaging select Frame Average left right The selected value displays on the Selection Menu Frame Average values vary by probe and application the highest value is color capture in both PDI and Color Flow The values are returned to factory or user preset value when you change Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Higher frame averaging keeps the color displayed longer for increased flow visualization decreased frame rate while lower frame averaging provides greater flow dynamics pulsing from increased frame rate Trades off between frame rate and color quality As the color quality increases the frame rate may decrease and as the frame rate increases the color image quality decreases LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Transparency Map Description Adjusting Values Benefits Spatial Filter Description Adjusting Values Benefits Packet Size Description Adjusting Values Benefits Affect on other Optimizing Color Flow Brings out the tissue behind the color map Select Transparency Map to adjust 0 4 Helps demonstrate the tissues behind the color Smooths out the color makes it lo
365. rection 2321062 100 Rev 5 Recording Images Storing an Image Storing a CINE Loop Previewing and Storing a CINE Loop Storing a CINE Loop Without Previeiw Storing a CINE Loop With Preview 15 8 To store an image 1 While scanning press Freeze 2 Scroll through the CINE Loop and select the desired image 3 Press the appropriate Print key The selected image is stored per your preset instructions and a thumbnail is displayed on the clipboard A CINE Loop is a sequence of images recorded over a certain timeframe The timeframe can be adjusted to cover one or more heart cycles The stored CINE Loops are displayed chronologically on the clipboard CINE Loops can be stored at any time during scanning You can choose to preview the CINE Loop before storage and save the CINE Loop directly as described below 1 While scanning press Freeze 2 Determine the best CINE Loop to store 3 Play the CINE Loop to review it 4 Press the appropriate Print key Depending on whether the system has been configured to enable or disable Preview Loop before store see Chapter 16 the following procedures enable the CINE Loop to be stored directly If Preview Loop before store is disabled 1 While scanning press the appropriate Print key 2 The last valid CINE Loop is stored in the archive and a thumbnail is displayed on the clipboard If Preview Loop before store is enabled 1 While scanning p
366. relatively constant over time 1mm Dramatic changes in pin width may indicate beamforming problems Contact a Service Engineer if beam width changes consistently over 2 to 3 periodic tests LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Penetration Description Benefit Method Procedure Quality Assurance Penetration is the ability of an imaging system to detect and display weak echoes from small objects at large depths See Figure 18 1 for more information Penetration can be affected by the system s e Transmitter receiver e Degree of probe focusing e Attenuation of the medium e Depth and shape of reflecting object e Electromagnetic interference from local surroundings Weak reflecting echoes are commonly produced from the internal structure of organs Definition of this tissue texture is important in the interpretation of the ultrasound findings Scan a phantom to see how echoes begin to fade as depth is increased The maximum depth of penetration is the point at which homogeneous material in the phantom begins to lose brightness To measure penetration 1 Set the front panel TGC slide pots to their center detent position 2 Gain and acoustic output can be adjusted as necessary since these values are displayed on the monitor 3 Scan a test phantom along the vertical pin targets to typical depths for the probe being used 4 Perform a standard distance measurement from the top of the
367. rent cardiac cycle To select a different cardiac cycle e Use the Cycle Select control to cycle to a different cardiac cycle e Move through CINE memory with the Trackball until the desired cardiac cycle is selected by the system NOTE You need several good cycles in front of the new cardiac cycle for this to be successful Oftentimes this is problematic near a freeze bar To move the systole or diastole position e Use the Cursor Select control to move the start systole position or the end diastole position LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 11 15 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Manual Vascular Calculation You can perform the following calculations manually when Auto Doppler Calculation is not activated 1 Press Measure If necessary you can select another Exam Calc and then select parameters from Modify Calculation 2 Select the location of the vessel Prox Mid or Dist and Side Right or Left 3 Select the desired vessel folder The Measurement menu is displayed MI0 6 Tis 0 0 3C RS Carotid B Rt Prox CCA PS 0 00 cm am 3 Rt Prox CCA ED 0 00 cm E A Carotid PS Map D 09 03 03 3 09 57 PM 09 03 03 3 09 57 PM adm b GANGE Medical Systems 96 1 1 Vascular M Generic CCA ED Lt ED MD RI PI HR VOLUME FLOW TAMEAN PY Mode PW start e Measure Cycle Select Angle Correct Menu Delete Active wa Cursor Select PS ED M amp A Figure 11 7 Measurement
368. ress Set The system displays the distance value in the Results Window 6 To make the second and third distance measurement repeat steps 2 3 Afte syst LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 r you complete the third distance measurement the em displays the thyroid volume in the Results Window 8 17 M Mode Measurements In M Mode all Exam Calcs include the following measurements Stenosis AIB Ratio Heart Rate ole 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 4 Tis 0 2 8L RS 09 03 03 9 46 07 AM J 09 03 03 9 45 49 AM adm b 1 1 Carotid l SmallParts a B Fra 8 0 MHz d 1 53 cm Gn 56 Generic L 0 00 cm EA 32 ELE Map A0 Stenosis D HR Worksheet Display Thyroid Menu Delete lindini Active Measure a a i S Carso lt gt Se Stenosis HR start e Place the first point M amp A Figure 8 8 Abdomnal Calculations M Mode Selection Menu See M Mode Measurements on page 7 66 for more information Doppler Mode Measurements In Doppler Mode the Exam Calcs tabs include the following measurements e PI Pulsatility Index e RI Resistive Index e S D Ratio D S Ratio AIB Ratio e Max PG Pressure Gradient e Mean PG Pressure Gradient e Heart Rate 1 1 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 5 Tis 0 1 8L RS 09 03 03 9 47 51 AM F6 99103103 9 47 51 AM adm b eclecien Carotid SmallParts as B Vel 30 68 cm s ga E MHz G ME Generic Vel 0 00 c
369. ress the appropriate Print key 2 The last valid CINE Loop is previewed 3 Adjust the CINE Loop as necessary 4 Press the appropriate Print key The thumbnail is displayed on the clipboard LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Image Data Management Using the Monitor Display Controls to Manage Images You can also manage images from the display In the lower right hand corner of the monitor display there are three 3 menu commands Menu Delete and Active Images Menu From the Menu you can save the image as a RawDicom dcm Dicom dcm Avi avi Jpeg jog or SR format You can get the properties for this image Image Study Series Equipment Region Calibration Data Patient and File You can also add comments directly to the Report page via Direct Report Delete You can use this to delete an image from the clipboard LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 15 9 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Recording Images Using the Monitor Display Controls to Manage Images continued Active Images Press Active Images to go to the Patient Active Images page Analyzing Images To review archived images select the image then select Review The archived images is displayed with the date and time of archival To compare the analyzed image to a live image press L R Now both the archived and live images appear on the monitor display Unfreeze the live image area Viewing Two To view images side by si
370. ription Patient Archive Select to restore patient data User Defined Configuration Restore Select to restore the user defined configuration settings Select to begin the restore process for the selected configuration files 16 22 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Presets System Backup and Restore Preset Menu continued The detailed section of this menu allows you to restore one area at a time from the user defined configuration This allows you to selectively restore what you want to restore across multiple machines Check the box es you want to restore insert the CD ROM MOD and press Restore Table 16 16 Detailed Restore Preset Parameter Description Imaging Presets Select to restore imaging presets Connectivity Configuration Select to restore connectivity configurations Measurement Configuration Select to restore measurement configurations Annotations Body Pattern Library Select to restore comment and body pattern configurations All Others Restore Select to restore all other configurations not listed in the Detailed Restore section This includes parameters defined on the System preset menus Select to begin the restore process for the selected configuration files LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 16 23 Customizing Your System Backup and restore strategy pati
371. rksheet Selection Menu 2 3 oe GE Medical Systems MI 0 6 Tis 0 0 3C RS eaa g 09 03 03 3 30 51 PM FO 09103103 3 23 46 PM adm r 1 Carotid Right ED Prox CCA Prox ICA ICAICCA Carotid LEA LEV TCD Meas Transf Measure Page Change Mode PW Vessel Wksheet Vessel Summary Generic Intrav Ratio Delete vue lt Exit start e Figure 11 18 Vessel Summary Example Vascular Vessel Summary continued 1 The first row indicating Right or Left is not displayed when the side is not defined in the vessel In the third column on the second line you select the calculations Move the cursor to the third column and the pop up menu is displayed as in Figure 11 19 The selected parameter is displayed in every third column PS ED MD TAMAX Pl RI PSED EDPS Accel AT TAMEAN VolumeFlow 11 34 Figure 11 19 Pop up menu Vessel Name with location information Check Box Use to select the vessel velocity for calculating the vessel ratio ex ICA CCA You can only select one location position in a vessel Result value column This value cannot be changed or excluded from this page Calculation name and result ICA CCA The ICA CCA ratio selects the highest systolic ICA and CCA velocities when calculating this ratio and displays the velocities LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Vascular Worksheet Carotid Study In the configuration page for ICA
372. rn to the original exam category repeat steps 1 4 NOTE This measurement DOES NOT appear on the original application worksheet LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 11 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations General Instructions continued 7 12 HINTS The following are actions you can take while performing measurements e Before making measurements to stop the acquisition of image data press Freeze e For measurements such as distance to make fine adjustments before completing the measurements press Measure to toggle between active calipers e Before completing the measurement sequence to erase the active measuring caliper and the current data measured press Clear After the sequence is complete to erase all data that has been measured to this point but not data entered on worksheet pages press Clear e When there are several measurements on the display to rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers adjust the Cursor Select knob After a cursor is activated you can change the measurement NOTE If you want to change a trace measurement you must erase it and trace again e To repeat any measurement select that measurement again from the Selection Menu Calculation formulas are available in the Advanced Reference Manual LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Introduction Erasing measurements The following actions erase measurements fro
373. roviding the same level of performance from day to day The frequency of testing varies with the amount of system usage and modes to be tested It is recommended that the user perform quality assurance tests at least every three months or every 400 patient studies Tests should also be performed when a question about system performance exists A mobile system may require more frequent tests Image quality should also be tested immediately after the following events e Service calls e System upgrades modifications e Dropped probe power surge etc LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 18 15 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 User Maintenance Phantoms 18 16 Quality Assurance Evaluations should be done with phantoms and test objects that are applicable to the parameters being evaluated or to the user s clinical practice Typical phantoms are composed of material that acoustically mimic human tissue Pins anechoic and echogenic targets are physically positioned to provide information for a variety of tests Doppler phantoms are currently expensive and complicated to deal with on the user level If a problem with any Doppler parameters or measurement is suspected contact a local service representative for evaluation The RMI 403GS phantom is still available Due to the superior penetration and resolution capabilities of GE ultrasound systems the RMI 405GSX is recommended It is the most current one available to our field service personne
374. rrent exam measurements and the normal growth range based on the gestational age It shows all measurements on one graph To view the Fetal Growth Bar Graph 1 Press Measure 2 Select Graph 3 Select Bar Origin LMP LMP 92 02 2001 FetusNo A 1 FetusPos Growth Bar Graph Ow 10w PLAC 20w 30w 40w a S S AC Hadlock HC Hadlock BPD Hadlock FL Hadlock GS Hellman CRL Hadlock Figure 9 10 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 22wOd 22wOd 22w4d 22w3d Fetal Growth Bar Graph BBT 02 02 0020 GA 22w5d EDD LMP 11 09 2001 20wOd 24wid 20w4d 23w4d 20w6d 24w2d 20w4d 24wid 9 55 OB GYN Fetal Growth Bar Graph continued e The horizontal axis shows the gestational weeks e The red vertical line shows the gestational age using the patient data e The blue dotted vertical line shows the ultrasound age using the current measurements e The yellow x shows the ultrasound age for each measurement e The green rectangle shows the normal age range for the measurement You cannot do fetal trending or view multiple gestation data on the bar graph 9 56 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Using other OB studies The LOGIQ Book system includes measurements for the following studies USA Europe Tokyo Osaka and ASUM The following figures show the OB Selection Menu displays for the Tokyo and Osaka studies and for the ASUM studies For information
375. rs refer to Chapter 5 Optimizing the Image LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 35 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System LOGIQ Book Imaging Presets B Mode Preset Carotid v Carotid All Probes B BiM Acoustic Output 100 v Image Reverse L B Color Thermal Index Tint MapD Y C Te Tis Tib Carotid 8L RS B High hai Focus Number 2 Focus Width Middle z Focus Depth 50 v Softener Depth cm 4 v Compression 1 B Line Density 215 Line Density Zoom 3 v oy 2 Suppression Frame Average Carotid 8L RS B Edge Enhance 2 v Width fi Gray Scale Map BC_GRAYB gt Gain 56 Dynamic Range far gt Rejection fs Frequency MHz fe gt AutoLineDensity JV Figure 16 16 B Mode parameters Color Flow Mode Preset Carotid v Carotid All Probes CF Baseline Invert CF PDI Focus Depth 50 CF PDI ACE isl General Probe 8L RS Carotid 8L RS CF CF PDI Acoustic Output 100 PW CF PDIAngle Steer 20 x Packet Size fox Line Density Line Density Zoom Frame Average Velocity cm s Spatial Filter Transparent Select Carotid 8L RS CF Gain 24 v Wall Filter Oy CF PDI Width 9 04 CF PDI Vertical Size cm 2 v CF PDI Center Depth cm 25 v CF PDI Frequency MHz 4 v Color Map vO v
376. ry then select Create The system creates a new library 2 Enter annotations as described in step 2 above 3 To save the changes select the Save button 16 40 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Annotations Libraries Presets Annotations Libraries Annotations Preset Menu On the Annotations tab you specify text and pointer options Libraries Applications Text Text color Yellow 7 Text Boundary Group Move C Word Wrapping Arrow Arrow Length 30 7 Arrow Size 30 z General Retain while entering or leaving timeline mode V TextOverlay in Multiple Image r Erase When the image is unfrozen E Figure 16 23 Annotation Annotations Preset Menu LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 16 41 Customizing Your System Annotations Libraries Annotations Preset Menu continued 16 42 Table 16 26 Text Preset Parameter Description Text color Select the color for annotation text Text Boundary Select Group Move or Word Wrapping Table 16 27 Arrow Preset Parameter Description Arrow Length Select the default pointer length Arrow Size Select the default pointer size Table 16 28 General Preset Parameter Description Retain while entering or leaving timeline mode TextOverlay in Multiple Image If selected the system keeps the annotation s on the monitor display when you enter or leave
377. ry convenient and saves recording media LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Quality Assurance Axial distance measurements Description Benefit Method Procedure Axial measurements are the distance measurements obtained along the sound beam See Figure 18 1 for more information The accurate measurement of the size depth and volume of a structure is a critical factor in determining a proper diagnosis Most imaging systems use depth markers and or electronic calipers for this purpose Axial distance should be measured in the near mid and far fields as well as in zoom If necessary different depths or fields of view can be tested To measure axial distance 1 Scan a test phantom with precisely spaced vertical pin targets Adjust all scan controls as necessary for the best image of the pin targets to typical depths for the probe being used 2 Press Freeze to stop image acquisition and perform a standard distance measurement between the pins at different points in the image Record all images for archiving 3 Scan the vertical pins in zoom or at different depth scale factors 4 Press Freeze to stop image acquisition repeat the distance measurements between pins and record the images for archiving 5 Document the measurements for reference and future comparison Contact a Service Engineer if vertical measurements differ by more than 1 50 of the actual distance LOGIQ Book Basic Us
378. s AFI Moore Ft Paris AC Hadlock HC Hadlock BPD Hadlock BPD Weenty FL Hadlock 3 HC Jeanty TAD Paris FL Jeanty CAPS start Figure 7 4 Measurement amp Analysis screen 1 Selection menu select exam 3 Folder or measurement define category study or measurement studies and measurements This section changes between Folder and Measurement depending on what you select in the Selection menu 2 Measurement menu add and delete studies folders and measurements select mode NOTE In the Measure menu the navigational tabs across the top may differ from system to system but the functionality is the same 7 16 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Measurement and Calculation Setup Selecting an exam category When you open the Measurement amp Analysis screen it displays the exam category that was last used on the system To select the exam category you want to work with 1 Move the Trackball to highlight the exam category at the top of the Selection menu 2 Press Set The system displays a list of exam categories See Figure 7 5 3 Move the Trackball to highlight the exam category you want 4 Press Set The Selection menu lists studies and measurements for the selected exam category 8 GE Medical Systems MI 0 18 Tis 0 0 E8C RS 6 98128103 4 31 46 PM adm 1 1 Gyn 08 28 03 4 40 06 PM Abdominal Abdominal Mi Generic Carkkae Measure About Adm
379. s are displayed on the Annotation Menu when the annotation mode is activated for that study Press Comment and move the annotation cursor location using the Trackball Select the desired annotation from the annotation menu To activate the library select More from the annotation menu A list of measurement categories is displayed Select the desired annnotation library from the categories Annotation Gp GE Medical Systems carrie Adam MIO 5 Tis0 8 E8C 46 05 08 02 4 21 15PM adm a3345 1 1 OB 2 3 e 4 B Frq 8 0 MHz Gn 78 EJA 23 Map Al D 8 0 cm DR 63 FR 11Hz AO 100 Annot i Grab word 2 Undo 3 ResizeArrow 4 EditLast 5 Text Overlay Mode Word Delete CAPS Figure 6 3 Annotation Menu Scanning Display Functions Accessing Editing the Library 6 12 Access the Annotation Library by selecting Utility Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to the desired annotation Press Set The 20 character space for that library locatiaon will be in reverse video Add or edit the desird script Select the next library entry and press Set Continue until all additions or edits are complete To save all entries and edits Trackball to the SAVE selection and press Set Users can add frequently used keywords e g LEFT RIGHT LONG TRANS in the Annotation Library for use as a prefix or suffix To avoid saving unwanted changes all current changes select RESET and press Set LOGIQ Book Basic User
380. s in the image than Map C Useful when imaging abdomen and liver N S shaped map This map highlights tissue differentiation for a certain band of signals Useful when imaging structures where you want more contrast e g renal tendon vein carotid thyroid breast Cardiology etc 5 16 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Frame Average Description Adjusting Values Benefits Optimizing B Mode Temporal filter that averages frames together thereby using more pixels to make up one image This has the effect of presenting a smoother softer image To adjust frame averaging adjust Frame Average on the Selection Menu The current value displays on the Selection Menu Frame Average values vary by probe application and multi frequency setting Frame Average values are returned to the preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs New Patient Multi Frequency Smooths the image LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 17 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Colorize Description Adjusting 5 18 NOTE Colorize is the colorization of a conventional B Mode image or Doppler Spectrum to enhance the user s ability to discern B M and Doppler Mode intensity valuations Colorize is NOT a Doppler Mode You can colorize realtime or CINE images or Timeline CINE but not VCR images Colorizes the gray scale image to enhance the eye s discr
381. s of images so that the image can fill the available display Auto Invert on Linear Steer When selected for auto calcs automatically inverts the timeline if needed when using ASO Auto Invert on ASO Automatically inverts the spectrum with ASO Audio Volume Adjusts the Doppler audio volume Auto Freeze 15 minutes Automatically freezes the system after 15 minutes of inactivity Image Parameter Size reboot required Choices small medium and large Must reboot the system Show Clipboard Select to show clipboard LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 16 17 Customizing Your System System System Measure Preset Menu The System System Measure screen allows you to specify measurement parameters such as the type of default OB measurements and calculations You can also define cursor and Results Window default functionality System Imaging System Measure Backup General Restore Measurement Repeat measurement C Repeat No DefaultMeasure OB Type USA EFW GP Hadiock gt CUAJAUA for Hadlock cua C aua Hadlock Table Type Hadlock82 Hadlock84 EFW Formula Europe Hadlock at EFW Formula Tokyo Tokyo x Add 1 weekto EDD P OB Graph Display Single Quad Peripherals Cursor Cursor Type I Number Symbol Cursor Line Display Iv Cursor Ellipse Cross Line Display iv C Ast Cursor 2nd Cursor C Image Center
382. s or door frame e Limit movement to a slow careful walk LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 19 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Transporting the System Use extra care when transporting the system using vehicles In addition to the instructions used when moving the system See Moving the System on page 3 18 for more information also perform the following 1 Before transporting place the system in its special storage case 2 Ensure that the system is firmly secured while inside the vehicle 3 Secure system with straps or as directed otherwise to prevent motion during transport 3 20 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Positioning Transporting Attaching the Security Cable To ensure that the LOGIQ Book is not removed from the premises attach the security cable 1 Wrap the cable around an imovable object Figure 3 16 Security Cable 2 Make sure and rotate the key to the unlocked position to the right 3 Insert the lock into the security slot to the system s side cover Figure 3 17 LOGIQ Book with Security Cable 4 Rotate the key to the locked position to the left LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 21 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Powering the System Connecting and Using the System awe Ko 3 22 To connect the system to the electrical supply 1 Ensure that the wall outlet is of the a
383. s the Doppler rate mm s below the Doppler spectrum Frozen Dual Carry Over Select to carry over the live image s imaging parameters to the other image after pressing Freeze Table 16 35 Patient Info Preset Parameter Description Titlebar Line 1 Select the patient information to display on the scanning screen Title bar Titlebar Line 2 Select the patient information to display on the scanning screen Title bar Table 16 36 Annotations Preset Parameter Description Active function at Freeze Select None Body Pattern or Annotations If Body Pattern or Annotation is selected the Body Pattern or Annotation is activated automatically when freezing the system Table 16 37 Image Store Preset Parameter Description Single frame live store If selected stores single frame images only If not selected stores cine loop Number of heart cycles Select the number of heart cycles to store Must be de selected for single frame LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 16 53 Customizing Your System 16 54 Table 16 38 Footswitch Preset Parameter Description No Function Release footswitch pedal setting Print 1 P1 Configure footswitch pedal as P1 key Print 2 P2 Configure footswitch pedal as P2 key Print 3 P3 Configure footswitch pedal as P3 key B Pause Confi
384. se oL Set To fix the second measurement line press Set a The system displays a third dotted line at an angle 13 6 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Pediatrics Calculations B Mode Measurements continued Hip Dysplasia Measurement continued To place the caliper along the acetabular roof line move the Trackball Body Pattern To rotate or change inclination adjust the Ellipse control or Hip Rotate I Ellipse of Set 9 To fix the third measurement line and complete measurement press Set The system displays the hip measurements and B in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 13 7 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Pediatrics B Mode Measurements continued Alpha HIP The Alpha HIP measurement measures the angle between the iliac baseline and the bony roof line To make an Alpha HIP measurement From the Selection Menu select either the right or left side orientation and then select Alpha HIP A horizontal dotted line displays To place the baseline move the Trackball Position the crosshairs edge at the osseous convexity of the ilium Ob Body Pattern To rotate or change inclination adjust the Ellipse control or Hip Rotate Ellipse 0 0 To fix the baseline press Set The system displays a second dotted line at an angle N hs Q To place the caliper along the acetabular roof line move the Trackball Body Pattem To rotate or ch
385. select an exam category select it from the M amp A category list The Parameters list displays parameters for the selected category 6 To select a value for a parameter select it from the Value list LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 37 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Manual Calcs Presets The system allows you to preset the parameters for manual calculations You specify the parameter values on the Doppler tab of the Measurement amp Analysis screen 1 Press Utility The system displays the Utility screen on the monitor display 2 Select Advanced 3 Select Measure 4 Onthe monitor display select the Doppler tab JSE Medical Systems MI 0 22 Tis 0 2 E8C RS 08 28 03 4 59 27 PM 08 28 03 4 58 58 PM adm e 745 Abdominal Mi Generic Connectivity Il Measure About Admin Abdomen MEASUREMENT amp ANALYSIS Ao RA M amp A l Advanced Doppler os Table M amp A Categories and Studies Modify Calcs M amp A Categories Abdominal x Iv PS Iv ED E Abdominal Generic J MD Abdomen E Renal Ao M Pl Seg A J RI Int A Arc A RV M EDPS J TAMAX M PSED I Accel at TAMEAN I VolumeFlow J HR M pv CAPS start e Figure 7 20 M amp A Doppler Preset Menu 7 38 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Measurement and Calculation Setup Manual Calcs Presets continued 5 To select an exam category select
386. ser can cancel the assignment and assigned parameters are removed from Worksheet and Report page When Cancel Transfer occurs a message appears on the screen to indicate the value was erased from Worksheet and Report page Vessel location If the vessel has a location you can select one of the following e Proximal Prox e Middle Mid e Distal Dist NOTE Ifyou do not wish to assign a vessel location press the lit location then no location is assigned Choose the folder you want the value assigned to Vascular Control Assignment continued Side Rt Lt The system has measurements for the patient s right and left side Choose the appropriate side on the Selection Menu TAMAX AUTO To select Auto Doppler Trace or Manual Doppler Trace at the MANUAL time you are making a measurement adjust the Selection Menu knob e Select AUTO the system traces the peak velocity envelope from the begin time to the end time e Select MANUAL trace the waveform manually 11 8 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Control Assignment continued Modify Auto Calcs When you select this key the Modify Calculation menu is displayed as below In this menu you select parameters to display in the Auto Vascular Calculation window Only parameters that can be used by the calculation are displayed Select Save as Default to save the selected parameters as the default calculations for this application Select Return to
387. ses the amount of echo information displayed in an image It may have the effect of brightening or darkening the image if sufficient echo information is generated Gain values vary depending on the probe they are not associated with a particular position of the knob TruAccess allows you to change the gain on a frozen image B Mode gain is independent of M Mode and Doppler and Color Flow Gain Changing the gain while in M Mode does not affect the B Mode image gain To decrease increase rotate Gain Gain displays on the monitor in Gn dB Gain increments by 2 dB Maximum gain varies by probe The current gain value is displayed Gain values vary by probe application and frequency setting Maximum gain is factory preset to an optimum setting to eliminate noise in the display Gain values are returned to the factory or user preset value when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calc New Patient or Frequency Gain allows you to balance echo contrast so that cystic structures appear echo free and reflecting tissue fills in After you adjust the Power Output you may need to adjust the gain Generally speaking if you increase the Power Output you need to decrease the gain if you decrease the Power Output you need to increase the gain Gain and TGC interact by adding together Gain has no affect on Power Output However with increased gain the power output level can usually be reduced to produce an equivalent
388. sheet select the worksheet key for the desired worksheet To view worksheet data for a particular mode select the key for that mode To view a worksheet with data for more than one mode select Expand Worksheet If a worksheet has more data on a second page to view the next page adjust the Page Change control LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 55 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations To edit a worksheet 7 56 HINTS To change data on a worksheet 1 To position the cursor at the field you want to change move the Trackball The field is highlighted Press Set Type the new data in the field The new data is displayed in blue to indicate that it was manually entered To delete or exclude data on a worksheet 1 To position the cursor at the field you want to delete or exclude move the Trackball The field is highlighted Do one of the following e To delete the field select Delete Value e To exclude the field select Exclude Value The data in the field is not visible and is not included in worksheet calculations e To include a value that you previously excluded select Exclude Value To type a comment on a worksheet 1 Select Examiner s Comments The Examiner s Comments window opens Type comments about the exam To close the Examiner s Comments window select Examiner s Comments Some fields on the worksheet are view only and others you can change
389. sheets and the graphs You can type up to 23 characters in the FetusPos and PLAC fields Origin LMP LMP 01 11 2000 BBT GA 22w6d EDD GA 08 08 2001 FetusNo D 4 CUA 23w2d EDD CUA 05 08 2001 FetusPos PLAC Figure 9 14 Patient Data section of the OB Worksheet 9 60 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Multigestational To select a fetus During measurements and calculations to change between fetuses do one of the following e Adjust the Fetus knob e Move the Trackball to the Summary Window and select the fetus Obstetrics BI Generic a Osaka A B c BI EFW Osaka B ari GS Tokyo CRL Osaka BPD Osaka FTA Osaka FL Osaka HL Osaka CTAR BPD Shinozuka AC Shinozuka CRL Shinozuka FL Shinozuka Worksheet Display Figure 9 15 Summary Window Multiple fetus You can change between fetuses at any time during the exam NOTE After you change to the next fetus any measurements you make are recorded and reported to that fetus If you have any active measurement or calculation that is not completed when you change the fetus the system cancels the measurement or calculation LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 61 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN To view multiple fetuses data on graphs 9 62 You can view multiple gestation data on fetal growth curve graphs After you have made measurements for each fetus select Graph Display e To view the graph for each fetus do
390. ssigns a Role of secondary To change the Role See Defining a service priority Role on page 16 93 for more information LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity Defining a service priority Role A dataflow can have many input output or O services but only one of each type can be primary For output services the primary service defines the image format and image data contents 1 In the Dataflow section in the Name field select the dataflow 2 Inthe Services section select the service 3 Inthe Selected Service section in the Role field select the role for the service e Primary first priority can be assigned to input output or O services e Secondary second priority can be assigned to input output or O services e Primary output allows primary assignment to an output service With a primary I O Primary Out or In are allowed e Primary input allows primary assignment to an input service With a primary I O Primary Out or In are allowed NOTE Only one primary role is available The primary service specifies what always happens first to incoming or outgoing data If you assign a primary role to two services with the same direction the system displays a warning LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 93 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Adding a dataflow In the Dataflow section select Add The system adds a new
391. surements the system erases the top first measurement and adds the new measurement last first in first out While you are taking a measurement the value in the Results Window updates until you complete the measurement LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 77 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calc Chapter 8 Abdomen and Small Parts Describes how to perform Abdomen and Small Parts measurements and calculations LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 8 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Abdomen and Small Parts Introduction Abdomen Small Parts Exam Preparation Measurements and calculations derived from ultrasound images are intended to supplement other clinical procedures available to the attending physician The accuracy of measurements is not only determined by the system accuracy but also by use of proper medical protocols by the user When appropriate be sure to note any protocols associated with a particular measurement or calculation Formulas and databases used within the system software that are associated with specific investigators are so noted Be sure to refer to the original article describing the investigator s recommended clinical procedures Calculation formulas are available in the Advanced Reference Manual General Guidelines 8 2 New Patient information must be entered before beginning an exam See Beginning a New Patient on page 4 3 for more information Any measurement c
392. system for your institution exams imaging networking and annotation presets e Probes and Biopsy Provides intended uses specifications care and maintenance and biopsy capability instructions for each probe e User Maintenance Provides information concerning system specifications error messages user diagnostics quality assurance system care and assistance LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 1 13 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Introduction Manual Format Finding information Tables of Contents Tabs Headers Footers References Index Text References Notes References Hints Information has been arranged and provided to help you find information easily and quickly Find topics in the main table of contents Located at the beginning of the book Chapter tabs are provided The section name and page number appear on the outer corners of every page When referencing external articles page references are noted Extensive tool that presents ideas topics terms titles headings and cross references Also use it to find all entries of a like topic throughout the manual Located at the end of the book Notes are set in italics ndicates precautions or prudent use recommendations that should be used in the operation of the ultrasound system References to other chapters appear in italics Various icons highlight safety issues See Safety Precautions on page 2 2 for more information Scan
393. t Carotid Save As Probe Default Overwrite Existing Create New Preset Figure 4 5 Probe Screen 2 Press Create New Preset A pop up menu appears Overwrite Usel C User2 Figure 4 6 Create New User Application Menu NOTE The new user application is based upon the current exam category and application plus any modifications you have made including the comment library and M amp A calcs LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 4 9 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing for an Exam User Defined Application Presets continued 3 Type the name of the new application Specify which User Selection Menu key you want to use and press Save NOTE The name of the new application cannot include spaces or symbols However the name can include numbers and letters The new application now appears on the Selection Menu 10Lb RS Application Preset Save As Probe Default Overwrite Existing Create New Preset Helen1 NOTE You can set up to four 4 user defined application presets for each exam category 4 10 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 User Defined Application Presets continued 4 To view edit the parameters for the user defined preset press Utility gt Presets If you change the settings for this application make sur Beginning an Exam e to save the changes via Save gt Overwrite user application HAR General Probe 8L RS v Caroti
394. t move the Trackball 3 To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper 4 To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points 5 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the spinal length in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 29 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Occipitofrontal Diameter D r oP AAS VORIG e0000 Stenosis 9 30 To measure occipitofrontal diameter make one distance measurement 1 2 Select OFD an active caliper displays To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the occipitofrontal diameter in the Results Window In B Mode you can calculate Stenosis by diameter or by area See Stenosis on page 7 59 for more information LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Measurements and Calculations Transverse Abdominal Diameter Fo yo FES PS C8000 To measure transverse abdominal diameter make one distance measurement 1 2 Select TAD an active cal
395. t press Set The system displays time s and slope between the two points in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 53 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Viewing and Editing Worksheets As you complete measurements the system puts measurement data in the appropriate worksheets To view a worksheet To view a worksheet select the Worksheet Display key on the Selection Menu The system displays the worksheet for the current study 4 GE Medical Systems MI 0 20 Tis 0 0 E8C RS os 08 28 03 5 02 58 PM adm YOU GA LMP 31w1d weleeien OB 23 Origin LMP LMP 01 22 2003 BBT GA 31w1d EDD LMP 10 29 2003 Fetus A 1 CUA 17 w6d 1w0d EDD CUA 01 30 2004 FetusPos PLAC Parameter CUA Value m3 Method AGE Range B Mode Measurements BPD Hadlock HC Hadlock AC Hadlock FL Hadlock 4 48 cm 4 48 Avg 19w4d 17w6d 21w2d 6 09 cm 6 09 Avg 12w2d 11w1d 13w4d 16 28 cm 20 61 10 78 Avg 21w2d 19w2d 23w3d 3 34 cm 3 64 Avg 20w3d 18w5d 22w2d fv iv iv fv 2D Calculations EFVV AC BPD FL HC 319 37 q 47 91q 1102 EFVv Hadlock GP lt 3 FLIBPD 74 43 FLIHC gt 54 80 15 63 17 94 FL AC 20 49 HC AC gt 0 37 1 08 1 28 Figure 7 21 OB B Mode Worksheet 7 54 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Mode Measurements To view a worksheet continued To return to scanning do one of the following e Press Esc e Select the Exit button To view a different work
396. t is usually made in the sagittal plane and two measurements in the axial plane To use the dual format mode press the L or R key on front panel 2 Select Volume The system displays the distances and the volume in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 61 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Volume continued 7 62 HINTS To make a volume calculation using one ellipse 1 2 3 Select Volume Make one ellipse measurement Select Volume The system displays the ellipse measurement and the volume in the Results Window To make a volume calculation using one ellipse and one distance 1 2 Select Volume Make one distance measurement and one ellipse measurement Select Volume The system displays the distance and ellipse measurement and the volume in the Results Window Volumes are most accurate when measurements are taken in the sagittal and axial scan planes To display sagittal and axial plane images simultaneously use the side by side dual format option Calculation formulas are available in the ADVANCED REFERENCE MANUAL LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Generic Measurements Volume continued Table 7 2 Volume Calculations Calc Name Input Measurements Volume spherical One distance Volume prolate spheroidal Two distances d1 gt d2 Volume spheroidal Three distances Volume prolat
397. t the appropriate language from the drop down list Units Select metric or US units of measurement Regional Options Select to set up Russian Greek keyboard LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 5 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System System General Preset Menu continued 16 6 Table 16 2 Date and Time Preset Parameter Description Time Format Select the time format 12 Hr AM PM or 24 Hr Date Format Select the date format US or Europe Default Century Select the default century for the system to use Date Time Select to display the Date Time Properties window to specify the system date time time zone and to auto adjust for daylight savings time Table 16 3 Patient Information Preset Parameter Anonymous patient Description When selected no patient information is displayed on the scanning screen Title bar Title Bar Font Size reboot Select to display patient information in the title bar using a small medium or large font size You need to reboot the system for this change to take effect LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Presets System General Preset Menu continued Table 16 4 Key Usage Preset Parameter Description CineRun Trackball Select Frame by Frame or Loop Speed Frame by control Frame manually steps through CINE playback by using the Trackball Loop Speed controls the s
398. ted by the immersion level diagram Refer to Figure 17 5 Never immerse the probe connector or probe adaptors into any liquid DO NOT drop the probes or subject them to other types of mechanical shock or impact Degraded performance or damage such as cracks or chips in the housing may result Inspect the probe before and after each use for damage or degradation to the housing strain relief lens and seal A thorough inspection should be conducted during the cleaning process DO NOT kink tightly coil or apply excessive force on the probe cable Insulation failure may result e Electrical leakage checks should be performed on a routine basis by GE Service or qualified hospital personnel Refer to the service manual for leakage check procedures Mechanical hazards CAUTION A defective probe or excessive force can cause patient injury or probe damage e Observe depth markings and do not apply excessive force when inserting or manipulating intercavitary probes e Inspect probes for sharp edges or rough surfaces that could injure sensitive tissue LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 17 9 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes and Biopsy Special handling instructions Using protective sheaths CAUTION Protective barriers may be required to minimize disease transmission Probe sheaths are available for use with all clinical situations where infection is a concern Use of legally marketed sterile probe sheaths is strongly recommended
399. tem allowing a wide range of uses from obstetrics to peripheral vascular examinations Transducers are accurate solid state devices providing multiple image formats The digital design and use of solid state components provides highly stable and consistent imaging performance with minimal required maintenance Sophisticated design with computer control offers a system with extensive features and functions which is user friendly and easy to use LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Indications for Use System Overview The LOGIQ Book is intended for use by a qualified physician for ultrasound evaluation Specific clinical applications and exam types include Fetal Abdominal Pediatric Small Parts mamography neck thyroid prostate limbs and extremities Obstetric Gynecology Cardiac adult and pediatric Vascular Urology including prostate Transrectal Transvaginal CAUTION In India and China except when there is a medical necessity the use of technological means to determine the gender of the fetus is strictly forbidden LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 1 5 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Introduction Contraindication The LOGIQ Book ultrasound system is not intended for ophthalmic use or any use causing the acoustic beam to pass through the eye Prescription Device CAUTION United States law restricts this device to sale or use by or on the order of a physician 1 6 LOGIQ Book Basic
400. tem Care and Maintenance Overview Refer to Section 10 of the LOGIQ Book Service Manual for any additional maintenance guidance Contact the local Service Representative for parts or periodic maintenance inspections Inspecting the System Examine the following on a monthly basis Connectors on cables for any mechanical defects Entire length of electrical and power cables for cuts or abrasions Equipment for loose or missing hardware Control panel and keyboard for defects Casters for proper locking operation CAUTION To avoid electrical shock hazard do not remove panels or covers from console This servicing must be performed by qualified service personnel Failure to do so could cause serious injury Biological If any defects are observed or malfunctions occur do not operate the Hazard Ss equipment but inform a qualified service person Contact a Service Representative for information LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 18 9 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 User Maintenance Weekly Maintenance 18 10 The system requires weekly care and maintenance to function safely and properly Clean the following e LCD Monitor e Operator control panel e Footswitch e Printer Failure to perform required maintenance may result in unnecessary service calls LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 System Care and Maintenance Cleaning the system System Cabinet NOTE LCD Monitor NOTE O
401. test revision contact your distributor local GE Sales Representative or in the USA call the GE Ultrasound Clinical Answer Center at 1 800 682 5327 or 1 262 524 5698 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 1 i Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 This page intentionally left blank 1 ii LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Regulatory Requirements Conformance Standards The following classifications are in accordance with the IEC EN 60601 1 6 8 1 e According to 93 42 EEC Medical Device Directive this is Class Ila Medical Device e According to IEC EN 60601 1 e AC adapter is Class I LOGIQ Book console is Class II e According to CISPR 11 this is Group 1 Class A ISM Equipment e According to IEC 60529 the footswitch rate is IPx1 This product complies with the regulatory requirement of the following e Council Directive 93 42 EEC concerning medical devices the CE label affixed to the product testifies compliance to the Directive The location of the CE marking is shown in Chapter 2 of this manual European registered place of business GE Medical Systems Europe Quality Assurance and safety Regulatory Manager BP 34 F 78533 Buc Cedex France Tel 33 0 1 30 70 4040 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 1 iii Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Conformance Standards continued Certifications International Electrotechnical Commission IEC IEC EN 60601 1 Medical Electrical Eqiupment Part 1 General R
402. the local patient and report archives DO NOT check Patient Archive when restoring user defined configurations ad Insert the CD with the user defined configurations into the CD RW drive On the keyboard press Utility Select System On the monitor display select Backup Restore The Backup Restore screen is displayed If you are not logged in with administrator privileges the Operator Login window is displayed Log on with administrator privileges In the Restore list select from the following depending on which configurations you want to restore e User Defined Configuration OR in the Detailed Restore section select one of the following e Imaging Presets e Connectivity Configuration e Measurement Configuration Comment Body Pattern Configuration All Others In the Media field select the system and user defined configurations CD Select Restore The system performs the restore As it proceeds status information is displayed on the System Backup Restore screen LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 29 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System System Peripherals Preset Menu 16 30 The System Peripherals screen allows you to specify video and system setup parameters System System Backup Imaging Measure Restore Video Settings Format reboot C pat ntsc VCR No YCR oe Print and Store Options Set Preview Size to Video Area Iv Dicom Store with Title Bar B Store Dual
403. third distance measurement repeat steps 2 3 After you complete the third distance measurement the system displays the bladder volume in the Results Window Prostate Volume This calculation uses a standard distance measurement Length is typically measured in the sagittal plane Width and height are measured in the axial plane i ASE Medical Systems Harsha Malagi MI 0 10 Tis 0 0 3C 08 18 03 11 29 54 AM J9 08 18 03 11 28 01 AM adm 41543592 1 1 Prostate Urology f a i EL 4 0 MHz Generic EA i3 amp urology m Map A O i Bladder DR E K S Prostate AD 100 H Prostate L Prostate H Prostate W Worksheet Display Renal om d 4 14 cml Prostate L 0 00 cm f ee ee T al F 7 in ee Menu Delete Active Measure 1 2 3 4 5 Cursor Select lt gt Mode 2D se Prostate L Prostate H Prostate W Place the first point M amp A Figure 12 3 Prostate Volume Touch Panel To measure Prostate Volume 1 Scan the patient in the appropriate scan plane 2 Select the Prostate folder an active caliper displays 3 Perform a standard distance measurement The system displays the distance value in the Results Window 4 To make the second and third distance measurement repeat steps 2 3 After you complete the third distance measurement the system displays the prostate volume in the Results Window Renal Volume This calculation uses a standard distance measurement Length is typically measured i
404. tion Inspect probes often for sharp pointed or rough surface damage that could cause injury or tear protective barriers Become familiar with all instructions and precautions provided with special purpose probes A damaged probe can also increase the risk of electric shock if conductive solutions come in contact with internal live parts Inspect probes often for cracks or openings in the housing and holes in and around the acoustic lens or other damage that could allow liquid entry Become familiar with the probe s use and care precautions outlined in Probes and Biopsy Ultrasound transducers are sensitive instruments which can easily be damaged by rough handling Take extra care not to drop transducers and avoid contact with sharp or abrasive surfaces A damaged housing lens or cable can result in patient injury or serious impairment or operation Ultrasound can produce harmful effects in tissue and potentially result in patient injury Always minimize exposure time and keep ultrasound levels low when there is no medical benefit Use the principle of ALARA As Low As Reasonably Achievable increasing output only when needed to obtain diagnostic image quality Observe the acoustic output display and be familiar with all controls affecting the output level See the Bioeffects section of the Acoustic Output chapter in the Advanced Reference Manual for more information Do not use with Defibrillator This equipment does not have a defibrill
405. tion Location LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 17 5 Probes and Biopsy LOGIQ Book Applications Table 17 1 Probe Indications for Use Probe Application 3C RS E8C RS 10Lb RS 8C RS i12L RS Abdomen Small Parts Obstetrics x Xx XxX Xx Gynecology x lt x XxX XxX KI XxX x XxX XxX KI XxX Pediatrics Neonatal X Urology X X Cardiac Vascular X X Biopsy x x X LOGIQ Book Features Table 17 2 Probe Features Probe Application 3C RS E8C RS 10Lb RS 8C RS i12L RS Virtual Convex Easy 3D Option X X X X X TruAccess X X X X x 17 6 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Specifications Table 17 3 System Probe Definitions Probe Designation Center Image Frequency MHz 3C RS 3 8 20 E8C RS 6 5 20 10Lb RS 7 0 20 8C RS 6 5 20 i12L RS 5 55 20 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probe Overview 17 7 Probes and Biopsy Probe Usage For details on connecting activating deactivating disconnecting transporting and storing the probes See Probes on page 3 32 for more information Care and Maintenance Inspecting probes Perform After Each Use NOTE Inspect the probe s lens cable and casing Look for any damage that would allow liquid to enter the probe
406. tions See Doppler Mode Measurements on page 7 69 for more information LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 13 3 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Pediatrics B Mode Measurements ER GE Medical Systems MI 0 13 Tis 0 2 3 5C F6 42103102 5 31 55 PM 1 1 Ped Hip Pediatrics GF Pia 5 0 MH2 B Generic Gn 26 E A 03 Ped Hip m Map C 0 6 0 M Stenosis D om DR 72 BI A Ratio FR 7 Hz AO 100 12 03 02 5 32 15 PM Alpha HIP d D Ratio Worksheet Display menu delete browse Measure 1 Cursor Select 2 Move Res Win 3HIP Orientation fe 5 HIP Rotate Mode zD Volume Angle HIP Alpha HIP d D Ratio CAPS Figure 13 1 Pediatrics B Mode Measurement Selection Menu The following generic measurements are common to other exam applications Stenosis e Volume Angle AJB Ratio See B Mode Measurements on page 7 58 for more information Pediatrics Calculations B Mode Measurements continued Hip Dysplasia The HIP calculation assists in assessing the development of the Measurement infant hip In this calculation three straight lines are superimposed on the image and aligned with the anatomical features The two angles are computed displayed and can be used by the physician in making a diagnosis The three lines are 1 The baseline connects the osseous acetabulum convexity to the point where the joint capsule and the perichondrium unite with the iliac bone 2 The inclination line connects the
407. tive for disinfecting Cidex a 2 Glutaraldehyde based germicide and Sporox an alternative germicide with non glutaraldehyde based chemicals have been evaluated for compatibility with the material used to construct the probes The following FDA cleared high level disinfectant chemicals are recommended e Cidex and Cidex OPA AII Probes e Sporox and Sporox 11 All Probes EXCEPT E8C RS AND TE Transesophageal e Cidex PA TE Transesophageal Probes ONLY In order for liquid chemical germicides to be effective all visible residue must be removed during the cleaning process Thoroughly clean the probe as described earlier before attempting disinfection LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 17 15 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes and Biopsy Disinfecting probes continued CAUTION iS 17 16 Biological Hazard 1 Prepare the germicide solution according to the manufacturer s instructions Be sure to follow all precautions for storage use and disposal 2 Place the cleaned and dried probe in contact with the germicide for the time specified by the germicide manufacturer High level disinfection is recommended for surface probes and is required for endocavitary and intraoperative probes follow the germicide manufacturer s recommended time Probes for neuro surgical intra operative use must NOT be sterilized with liquid chemical sterilants because of the possibility of neuro toxic residues remaining on the probe Neurol
408. tly handle unit conversions e Edit user defined calculations Define application specific measurement parameters e Specify the default manual calc measurements for a selected study or folder 7 14 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Measurement and Calculation Setup Starting Study and Measurement SetUp You make changes to studies and measurements in the Measurement amp Analysis screen To open the screen 1 Press Utility The system displays the Utility screen on the monitor display 2 Select Advanced 3 Select Measure 4 Move the Trackball to the Measure button at the bottom of the screen and press Set The system displays the Measurement amp Analysis screen See Figure 7 4 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 15 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Starting Study and Measurement SetUp continued 1 p GE Medical Systems MI 0 18 Tis 0 0 E8C RS 1 1 Gyn naa oT 08 28 03 4 37 09 PM 36 osiesio3 4 31 46 PM adm Obstetrics MI Generic Connectivity I Measure About Admin S oB 23 Bi ari Moore MEASUREMENT amp ANALYSIS AC Hadlock M amp A Advancea Doppler OB Table l HC Hadlock Measurement menu BPD Hadlock Add measurement Add folder FL Hadlock x Delete measure and folder 2 Ft Mercer Factory Edit Calc CRL Helson BPD Paris Folder CRL Paris Hame oB 23 CRL Osaka Available folders and measureme FL Pari
409. to add color coded qualitative information concerning the relative velocity and direction of fluid motion within the B Mode image Introduction A typical examination using Color Flow Mode 1 Follow the same procedure as described under B Mode to locate the anatomical area of interest 2 After optimizing the B Mode image add Color Flow 3 Move the color flow area of interest as close to the center of the image as possible 4 Optimize the color flow parameters so that a high frame rate can be achieved and appropriate flow velocities are visualized 5 Press Freeze to hold the image in memory 6 Record color flow images as necessary 7 If more definitive information is needed about flow utilize the procedures described under Doppler Mode LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 25 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Activating Color Flow To activate Color Flow Mode 1 Press CF Color Flow The CF window appears over the B Mode image Move the Trackball to move the CF window 96 GE Medical Systems MI0 9 Tis 0 2 10Lb RS ee 09 02 03 9 22 09 AM 5 09102103 9 22 09 AM seleeie Carotid CH B Fra 8 0 MHz Gn 66 27 E A 2 2 M Map J 0 D DR 1 FR 496 697 28 8 40 3 s Menu Delete Active CF Frequency Frame Average Angle Steer Packet Size PRF Mode Color Map Threshold Color Invert Wall Filter start W a Pos Figure 5 5 Color Flow Mode Display Uses Color Flow is useful to s
410. tors e g cyst with septations or calcifications F Assigns a lesser amount of gray scale pixel values to bright reflectors in the image Useful when imaging arteries and grafts G Assigns a lesser amount of gray scale pixel values to weak reflectors in the image than Map F Useful when imaging small parts H Assigns an s shape to gray scale pixel values Useful when imaging anatomical signals with less tissue differentiation e g tendon vein carotid thyroid breast etc S shaped map This map highlights tissue differentiation for a certain band of signals Useful when imaging structures where you want more contrast e g renal tendon vein carotid thyroid breast etc J S shaped map This map highlights tissue differentiation for a certain band of signals Useful when imaging structures where you want more contrast e g renal tendon vein carotid thyroid breast etc K S shaped map This map highlights tissue differentiation for a certain band of signals Useful when imaging structures where you want more contrast e g renal tendon vein carotid thyroid breast etc LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 15 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing the Image Map Description L S shaped map This map highlights tissue differentiation for a certain band of signals Useful when imaging structures where you want more contrast e g cardiology M Assigns a lesser amount of gray scale pixel values to weak reflection
411. transmitted and received signals Differences in frequencies can be caused by moving objects in the path of the ultrasound signal such as moving blood cells The resultant signals are presented audibly through the system speakers and graphically on the system display The X axis of the graph represents time while the Y axis represents the shift in frequency The Y axis can also be calibrated to represent velocity in either a forward or reverse direction PW Doppler is typically used for displaying the speed direction and spectral content of blood flow at selected anatomical sites PW Doppler operates in two different modes conventional PW and High Pulse Repetition Frequency HPRF PW Doppler can be combined with B Mode for rapidly selecting the anatomical site for PW Doppler examination The site where PW Doppler data is derived appears graphically on the B Mode image Sample Volume Gate The sample volume gate can be moved anywhere within the B Mode image 5 40 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing Spectral Doppler Typical exam protocol A typical examination using PW Doppler Mode might proceed as follows 1 10 11 12 Connect the appropriate probe leaving the probes in their respective holders Position the patient for the examination Press Patient Enter the appropriate patient data using the appropriate exam category and worksheet Select the preset application and probe t
412. tted line connects the measurement points 5 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the endometrium thickness in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 71 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB GYN Ovary length width and height You can measure the length width and height of the left and right ovaries Each measurement is a typical distance measurement made in the appropriate scan plane Typically length and height are measured on the saggital plane while the width is measured on the axial transverse plane To measure ovarian length width or height 1 2 3 4 9 72 Scan the patient s right or left ovary in the appropriate plane To select left or right adjust the Side knob Select the OV folder then select OVL OV W or OV H Perform a standard distance measurement a To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper if preset accordingly To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the distance value in the Results Window After the first and second measurement the system displays an active caliper for the next measurement To make the second and third distance measurements repeat steps 3 4 After
413. ttern Libraries Libraries Preset Menu continued Libraries Body Patterns Applications Library 48D z Menu E a Body Pattern Image New Library Delete User Defined Library Copy from Existing Figure 16 26 Body Patterns Libraries Preset Menu Table 16 30 Body Patterns Libraries Preset Parameter Description Library The name of the body pattern application library Menu The body patterns chosen for the selected library Body Pattern Image Displays the image of the currently selected body pattern New Library The name of a new body pattern application library that you want to create Delete User Defined Library Allows the selection of the user defined library to be deleted Copy from Existing A list of body patterns you can use to create an application library LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 16 47 Customizing Your System Defining body patterns NOTE 3 In the Library field select the application library you want The system displays all body patterns for the library You can have two Selection Menu displays of body patterns for each library The body patterns are listed in the order that they are shown on the Selection Menu To change or add a body pattern select the body pattern or blank location and press Set then do one of the following e Type the body pattern name e Select the
414. udies include the following measurements e ASUM AC BPD and CRL e ASUM 2001 AC BPD CRL FL HC HL and OFD Multiple Fetus OB Multigestational LOGIQ Book allows you to measure and report multiple fetus development The system can report a maximum of four fetuses To enter the number of fetuses If more than one fetus is imaged during the exam enter the number of fetuses in the Patient Data Entry Menu Exam Information Obstetrics E BE coy aaimmiyyy _cabyLme n wed Accession Perf Physician o Ref Physician Operator Figure 9 13 Fetus Number Ca GCE AB Ectopic When you start an OB exam the system automatically fills in the Fetus field with 1 To change the number 1 Move the cursor to the fetus number and press Set twice The number is highlighted 2 Type the correct number and press Set The system displays a message to confirm that you want to change the fetus number 3 Select Yes LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 9 59 OB GYN To identify each fetus For measurements calculations and worksheet displays the system labels each fetus A B C or D Each fetus is identified by a letter and the total number of fetuses For example fetus A 3 is fetus A from a total of 3 When scanning you can enter information about the fetus position and placenta location You can enter the information in the Patient Data section of the work
415. uence The system is initialized During this time e System diagnostics run Its status is reflected on the monitor by the graphic in Figure 3 21 iri aut TESS GE Medical Systems Figure 3 21 Power Up Graphic Sequence HINTS If problems occur freeze the image and take a picture for reference This will help if there is a need to call for service e Probes are initialized for immediate operation NOTE _ If no probe is connected the system goes into freeze mode LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 27 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Standby Mode Use Standby Mode to decrease the power off on time while transporting your system for a portable exam To activate standby mode 1 Close the LCD cover The CPU access power saving mode activates and the LCD power is off 2 When the system enters standby mode the LED lights Figure 3 22 Standby Mode LED To exit standby mode 1 Open the LCD cover NOTE Should any errors or problems occur related to Standby mode restart the LOGIQ Book 3 28 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Powering the System Power Off To power off the system 1 Press the Power On Off switch at the front of the system once 2 The System Exit window is displayed 3 Using the Trackball select Shutdown The shutdown process takes a few seconds and is completed when the Power On Off switch illumination is turned amber
416. uency Frame Average An gt i j Packet Size PRF a Color Map Threshold Wall Filter Pos Figure 5 6 Power Doppler Imaging Display Optimizing the Image Color Flow Scanning Hints HINTS Color Flow Mode controls produce the following results Line Density Trades frame rate for sensitivity and spatial resolution If the frame rate is too slow reduce the size of the region of interest select a different frame rate setting or reduce the packet size Wall Filter Affects low flow sensitivity versus motion artifact Color Threshold Percentage of gray scale level where color Doppler is overwritten Frame Average Affects temporal smoothing and color Doppler robustness Ace Ace versus normal affects motion artifact control Packet Size Affects the amount of color Doppler sensitivity versus frame rate Scan Area Increases decreases size of color window Focus Position The best focusing is at the focal zone location Put focal zone s at the area of interest 5 30 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Optimizing Color Flow Color Flow Mode Selection Menu Frequency Frame Average Angle Steer Packet Size PRF Color Map Threshold Color Invert Wall Filter Figure 5 7 Color Flow Mode Selection Menu Spatial Filter Baseline Dynamic Range Line Density 1 ACE ON Capture Transparancy Map 0 Focus Position Power Output LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 5 31 Direction 2321
417. ulum Achilles Tendon Anatomical Neck Figure 16 22 Annotation Libraries Preset Menu LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 39 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Annotations Libraries Libraries Preset Menu continued Table 16 25 Libraries Preset Parameter Description Library The name of the annotation library Page1 The first Selection Menu page of annotations for the selected library Page2 The second Selection Menu page of annotations for the selected library New Library The name of a new annotation library that you want to create Delete User Defined Allows the selection of the user defined library to be Library deleted Copy from Existing A list of annotations you can use to create a library Defining Annotations 1 Inthe Library field select the library you want The system displays all annotations for the library You can have two Selection Menu displays of annotations for each library The annotations are listed in the order that they are shown on the Selection Menu when you use annotations 2 To change or add an annotation select the annotation or blank location and press Set then do one of the following e Type the annotation e Select the annotation in the Copy from Existing list and press Set 3 To save the changes select the Save button Creating a new annotation library 1 Inthe User Defined Library field type a name for the libra
418. und age Value The measured value If more than one measurement was made for an item the system uses the specified method average maximum minimum or last to determine this value m1 m3 Up to three measurement values for each item If you make more than three measurements the worksheet uses the last three Method When there is more than one measurement for an item this specifies the method used to calculate the measurement value listed in the Value column Choices are average maximum minimum or last To change the method a Move the Trackball to the Method field b Press Set c Move the Trackball to select from the list d Press Set AGE The fetal age for this measurement Range The typical range of fetal age for this measurement LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 OB Measurements and Calculations Calculation information This section of the worksheet provides calculation choices and lists calculation results e EFW lists the parameters used to calculate EFW This is followed by the calculation result To change which parameters are used a Select this field or press Select EFW b Select the desired parameters e EFW GP lists the source used to calculate EFW GP growth percentile This is followed by the growth percentile To change the source a Select this field or press Select GP b Select the desired source The remaining calculation inform
419. und systems utilize ultrasound energy that must be coupled to the patient by direct physical contact Depending on the type of examination this contact occurs with a variety of tissues ranging from intact skin in a routine exam to recirculating blood in a surgical procedure The level of risk of infection varies greatly with the type of contact One of the most effective ways to prevent transmission between patients is with single use or disposable devices However ultrasound transducers are complex and expensive devices that must be reused between patients It is very important therefore to minimize the risk of disease transmission by using barriers and through proper processing between patients Adequate cleaning and disinfection are necessary to prevent disease transmission It is the responsibility of the equipment user to verify and maintain the effectiveness of the infection control procedures in use Always use sterile legally marketed probe sheaths for intra cavitary and intra operative procedures For neurological intra operative procedures use of a legally marketed sterile pyrogen free probe sheath is REQUIRED Probes for neuro surgical use must not be sterilized with liquid chemical sterilants because of the possibility of neuro toxic residues remaining on the probe LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probe Overview Probe Cleaning Process Cleaning probes Perform After To clean the probe Eac
420. using strain relief lens and seal Do not use a damaged or defective probe LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 17 17 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes and Biopsy Coupling gels WARNING Applying Precautions Planned Maintenance Do not use unrecommended gels lubricants They may damage the probe and void the warranty In order to assure optimal transmission of energy between the patient and probe a conductive gel or couplant must be applied liberally to the patient where scanning will be performed Coupling gels should not contain the following ingredients as they are known to cause probe damage Methanol ethanol isopropanol or any other alcohol based product Mineral oil lodine Lotions Lanolin Aloe Vera Olive Oil Methyl or Ethyl Parabens para hydroxybenzoic acid Dimethylsilicone The following maintenance schedule is suggested for the system and probes to ensure optimum operation and safety Table 17 5 Planned Maintenance Program Do the Following Daily After Each Use As Necessary Inspect the Probes X Clean the Probes X Disinfect Probes X 17 18 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probe Discussion Probe Discussion Introduction The LOGIQ Book supports the following types of probes e Curved Array Convex Curved Array Convex probes including micro convex are usually designated by the prefix suffix C the endocavity prob
421. ution comes out of the E8C probe please follow the cautions below CAUTION Sterilant Exposure to Patient e g Cidex Contact with a sterilant to the patient s skin or mucous membrane may cause an inflammation If this happens refer to the sterilant s instruction manual Sterilant Exposure from Probe Handle to Patient e g Cidex DO NOT allow the sterilant to contact the patient Only immerse the probe to its specified level Ensure that no solution has entered the probe s handle before scanning the patient If sterilant comes into contact with the patient refer the the sterilant s instruction manual Sterilant Exposure from Probe Connector to Patient e g Cidex DO NOT allow the sterilant to contact the patient Only immerse the probe to its specified level Ensure that no solution has entered the probe s connector before scanning the paitent If sterilant comes into contact with the patient refer the the sterilant s instruction manual E8C Point of Contact Refer the the sterilant s instruction manual LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 17 11 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Probes and Biopsy Probe handling and infection control 17 12 CAUTION This information is intended to increase user awareness of the risks of disease transmission associated with using this equipment and provide guidance in making decisions directly affecting the safety of the patient as well as the equipment user Diagnostic ultraso
422. vascular measurements continued 09 03 03 3 11 36 PM Vascular B Generic Carotid CCA Prox Mid Dist Rt Lt PS ED MD RI PI HR VOLUME FLOW TAMEAH PY Measure Mode PW start e NOTE 3 Select the desired measurement MI0 6 Tis 0 0 3C RS Carotid 09 03 03 3 11 36 PM adm b GE B Fra 4 0 MHz Leti 50 E A 12 Map G0 D 17 0 cm DR 81 FR 29 Hz AO 100 GINGE Medical Systems 36 4 PW Fra 2 5 MHz Gn 16 AO 100 PRF 2 6 kHz WF 104 Hz SV 3 DR 36 ee a Rt Prox CCA PS 0 00 cm s PS Rt Prox ICA PS 44 89 cm s 46 47 cm s wie Cycle Select Angle Correct Side Rt PS ED MD RI Mark the first point on the spectral doppler Figure 11 9 Show All measurements The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze Vascular Acceleration Acceleration Time AT Heart Rate Select Accel The system displays an active caliper with vertical and horizontal dotted lines To position the caliper at peak systole move the Trackball To fix the measure point press Set The system displays a second active caliper To position the second caliper at end diastole move the Trackball To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the peak systole end diastole acceleration time and acceleration in the Results Window Select AT The system displays an active caliper and a vertical dotted line To position the caliper
423. vice Check Select to verify connectivity for a device or service If the service is a the system performs a TCPIP ping If the service is a the system performs a DICOM echo Properties Lists information about the selected device or service A dataflow is a set of services When you select one of the configured dataflows the ultrasound system is automatically set up according to the services associated with the selected dataflow For information about editing dataflows See Dataflow on page 16 90 for more information Each view includes a structure tree on the left and properties on the right The properties section lists information about the selected service The information shown in each view is as follows 16 102 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity Current dataflow The current dataflow view displays a three level structure tree showing the following information e The name of the current dataflow Level 1 e The type of services associated to the dataflow input or output services Level 2 e A list of the services configured for the current dataflow Level 3 EE my Computer using Local Archive Ei ep nots 3 i BS My Computer 3 28 1 41 Ez E S My Computer 3 28 17 41 Bae Local Archive Int HD Figure 16 61 Connectivity Views Current Dataflow LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 103 Direction 23
424. vice 16 68 Console moving 3 19 transporting 3 20 Contacts Clinical Questions 1 7 Internet 1 7 Service Questions 1 7 Contraindications 1 6 Control panel replacing key caps 18 13 replacing key lamps 18 13 Controls Index 2 annotation function overview 3 43 display function overview 3 42 keyboard 3 40 measurement function overview 3 43 mode function overview 3 42 operator 3 38 record function overview 3 42 Touch Panel 3 41 Crown rump length CRL 9 13 CUA OB worksheet 9 47 cursor specifying default type 16 18 D D S ratio 7 72 Danger icon 2 2 Dataflow Connectivity screens 16 90 dataflow adding a service to 16 92 selecting default 16 92 viewing structure of 16 103 16 104 dataflows provided with system list of 76 95 destination device adding for connectivity services 16 63 Device labels 2 10 DICOM Performed Procedure Connectivity Services 16 70 DICOM Worklist Search Criteria 16 77 Search Criteria list of tags 16 79 Disinfecting solutions 17 15 Disinfecting probes 17 15 Distance measurement general 7 40 Doppler measurements AIB ratio 7 73 D S ratio 7 72 GYN exam 9 75 Mean PG 7 75 OB GYN 9 35 pulsatility index 7 70 resistive index 7 71 S D ratio 7 72 slope 7 49 TAMAX 7 46 7 47 7 48 time interval 7 49 7 50 velocity 7 45 Doppler Mode LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5
425. when Mean PG Mean PG is first selected in the Selection Menu The waveform is automatically traced Velocity and Mean PG are also displayed on the screen If Trace Auto is off the Auto Trace function is off and traces can be performed manually LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 7 75 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 General Measurements and Calculations Heart Rate SV Diam Stroke Volume Diameter SV TAMEAN Stroke Volume TAMEAN CO HR Cardiac Output Heart Rate 7 76 To measure heart rate See Heart Rate on page 7 68 for more information or select any of the following measurements To measure SV Diam 1 From the Doppler Generic Selection Menu select the SV folder 2 Select SV Diam To measure SV TAMEAN 1 From the Doppler Generic Selection Menu select the SV folder 2 Select SV TAMEAN To measure CO HR 1 From the Doppler Generic Selection Menu select the SV folder 2 Select CO HR LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Helpful hints Generic Measurements HINTS The following hints can help when making a measurement Prior to making measurements use the Cine function if necessary to display the best image As you take measurements each measurement is given a sequential number on the display and in the Results Window Nine measurements can be displayed in the Results Window at one time Once the Results Window has nine measurements if you make any further mea
426. when you change the following Probe Exam Category Exam Calcs or New Patient Blood flow information is not cut off due to the effect of aliasing When you raise the velocity scale the spectral waveform may decrease in size when you lower the velocity scale the spectral waveform may increase in size Changes in the spectrum are relative to changes in the velocity scale that is it sizes accordingly When you adjust the velocity scale CINE memory is cleared Adjustments may affect sample volume size and Doppler wall filter Changing the velocity range may change the TI and or MI Observe the output display for possible effects LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Angle Correct Description NOTE Adjusting Values Benefits Quick Angle Description Adjusting Values Optimizing Spectral Doppler Estimates the flow velocity in a direction at an angle to the Doppler vector by computing the angle between the Doppler vector and the flow to be measured When the Doppler Mode Cursor and angle correct indicator are aligned the angle is O you cannot see the angle correct indicator Flow toward the probe is mapped above the baseline and right speaker as you are facing the system Flow toward the probe is mapped above the baseline To adjust the angle relative to the probe face adjust Angle Correct to the left right The velocity scale changes when you adjust angle correct 1 incre
427. xamination list window column configuration You can create new columns remove columns and select the information to display in a column 1 Move the Trackball to highlight a column 2 Press Set The system displays a list of options 3 Doone of the following To create a new column to the left of the selected column select INSERT e To delete the selected column select DELETE e To select the information to display in the selected column select from the list of data fields 4 Press Set 16 98 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Configuring Connectivity Tools The Tools tab allows you to e Verify the DICOM directory on removable media e Format removable media MO disk rewritable CD or ZIP disk e Copy CD Viewer Figure 16 59 Connectivity Tools Preset Menu LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 16 99 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Customizing Your System Tools continued Table 16 63 Tools Preset Parameter Description Media Select the removable media to format or verify Label Type a label for a new removable MO disk free text Verify Select to verify DICOM directory on removable DICOM disk Format Select to format removable media Copy CD Viewer CD Viewer application can open individual images from the archiving CD ona PC Export Paths This feature is not currently available The bottom of the
428. y Chapter 3 Preparing the System for Use Describes the site requirements console overview system positioning transporting powering on the system adjusting the display monitor probes and operator controls LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 1 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Introduction NOTE 3 2 Site Requirements Only qualified physicians or sonographers should perform ultrasound scanning on human subjects for medical diagnostic reasons Request training if needed The LOGIQ Book does not contain any operator serviceable internal components Ensure that unauthorized personnel do not tamper with the unit Perform regular preventive maintenance See System Care and Maintenance on page 18 9 for more information Maintain a clean environment Turn off and if possible disconnect the system before cleaning the unit See Cleaning the system on page 18 11 for more information Never set liquids on the unit to ensure that liquid does not drip into the control panel or unit LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Site Requirements Before the system arrives NOTICE This medical equipment is approved in terms of the prevention of radio wave interference to be used in hospitals clinics and other institutions which are environmentally qualified The use of this equipment in an inappropriate environment may cause some electronic interference to radios and te
429. y icon When you select this icon the following appears SYSTEM DATILRY STATUS Coen pune sime bs power Total battery power remaining tator not preesnt Warning Battery power te lowar nowi Figure 3 4 Battery Status Message Current power source displays the current power source AC power or Battery Total battery power remaining displays the current power remaining capacity When there is no battery Battery not present appears When using a battery it s current capacity in percent appears current capacity unit percent If the battery is not in use it states current capacity charging Warning information displays warning information when battery power is low See Figure 3 5 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 3 9 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing the System for Use Battery continued Battery power low warning NOTE AC Adapter CAUTION 3 10 If the battery is in use and the battery power is low a warning message appears to warn the user that the battery power is low and that it needs to be charged AN Warning Battery pwoer ie lower nowi Pla charge your battery immediately Or eyetem will ba Ehut down In 2 minutse L x Figure 3 5 Low battery power warning When the battery power is low and the user cannot charge the battery in time the system automatically shuts down in 2 minutes This protects the whole system You need to sav
430. y while connected to devices other than those recommended above if the devices and their specifications installation and interconnection with the system conform to the requirements of IEC EN 60601 1 1 The connection of equipment or transmission networks other than as specified in the user instructions can result in an electric shock hazard or equipment malfunction Substitute or alternate equipment and connections requires verification of compatibility and conformity to IEC EN 60601 1 1 by the installer Equipment modifications and possible resulting malfunctions and electromagnetic interference are the responsibility of the owner General precautions for installing an alternate off board remote device or a network would include 1 The added device must have appropriate safety standard conformance and CE Marking 2 There must be adequate mechanical mounting of the device and stability of the combination 3 Risk and leakage current of the combination must comply with IEC EN 60601 1 4 Electromagnetic emissions and immunity of the combination must conform to IEC EN 60601 1 2 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Safety Precautions Peripheral Update for EC countries continued Peripheral used in The LOGIQ Book has also been verified for compatibility and the non patient compliance for connection to a local area network LAN via a environment wireless LAN provided the LAN components are IEC EN 60950
431. you complete the length width and height measurements the system displays the ovarian volume in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 GYN Measurements Uterus length width and height Each of these is a standard distance measurement Typically length and height are measured on the saggital plane while the width is measured on the axial transverse plane To measure uterus length width or height 1 Scan the patient in the appropriate scan plane 2 Select the UT folder then select UT L UT W or UT H An active caliper displays 3 Perform a standard distance measurement a To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second active caliper at the end point move the Trackball A dotted line connects the measurement points To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the distance value in the Results Window After the first and second measurement the system displays an active caliper for the next measurement 4 To make the second and third distance measurement repeat steps 2 3 After you complete the third distance measurement the system displays the uterine volume in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 9 73 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 M Mode Measurements M Mode measurements f
432. ystem 4 Select the patients to be imported 5 Press Copy Patient from the Select All Copy Patient menu 6 Please wait for the patient information to be copied to this Ultrasound system Informational messages appear while the import is taking place 7 Press Ctrl E to eject the media LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 15 19 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Recording Images Daily Maintenance Patient Report and User Defined Backup Protocols Back up patient data AFTER you ve archived moved images so that the pointers to the patient s images reflect that the images have been moved to removable media and are no longer on the hard drive 1 Insert the backup media Format the backup media Select Utility gt Connectivity gt Tools Label the media GEMS_BACKUP in all capital letters CONNECTIVITY Views Tools Screens Dataflow Buttons Services Tcpip r Removable Media Media CD Rewritable z Verify Label GEMS_BACKUP Fom Copy CD Viewer Capacity 702 8 MB Free space 702 8 MB Formatted Ho Database present Ho DICOMDIR present Ho Finalized CD only Write protected Figure 15 9 Format CD ROM Screen 2 The Ultrasound system displays a pop up menu when the formatting has been completed Press Ok to continue Verify that the format was successful G Information Operation completed Figure 15 10 Format Successful Pop up Menu 15 20 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manua
433. ystem displays a second active caliper To position the second caliper at end diastole move the Trackball To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the peak systole end diastole acceleration time and acceleration in the Results Window Select AT AT The system displays an active caliper and a vertical dotted line 2 To position the caliper at the start point move the Trackball 3 To fix the first caliper press Set The system displays a second active caliper 4 To position the caliper at the end point move the Trackball 5 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the acceleration time in the Results Window LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual 8 11 Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Abdomen and Small Parts Abdomen and Renal Exam Calcs continued Heart Rate HR See Heart Rate on page 7 68 for more information Peak Systole PS To calculate the peak systole end diastole or minimum diastole End Diastole ED 4 Select PS ED or MD or Minimum Diastole MD The system displays an active caliper with vertical and horizontal dotted lines 2 To position the caliper at the measurement point move the Trackball 3 To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the peak systole end diastole or minimum diastole in the Results Window 8 12 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Abdomen Abdomen and Renal Exam Calcs continued
434. zed in a recommended disinfecting agent and reused E8C Probe Biopsy Guide When the E8C probe is attached and active the needle guide type is the TR5 Civco disposable guide with a 5 offset angle Preparation Figure 17 23 TR5 Biopsy Guide To prepare the E8C for use 1 NOTE 17 36 Remove the probe from the box and carefully examine it for any damage If the biopsy guide is to be attached use the filling removal tool to clean out the attachment area on the probe head a OF Figure 17 24 Attachment Filling Removal a Probe Head b Attachment c Filling Removal Tool Clean then disinfect the probe Ensure that protective gloves are worn LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Preparing for a Biopsy Preparation continued NOTE NOTE To install the sheath 1 Remove the sheath from its package Do not unroll the sheath Remember to rinse all sanitary probe sheaths of powder before placing on the probe Powder can degrade the displayed image Place an adequate amount of ultrasound gel inside the sheath tip the gel is between the sheath inner surface and the probe aperture Ensure that only acoustic coupling gel is used for this purpose Place the sheath tip over the probe aperture and then pull the sheath end toward the probe handle Inspect the sheath for nicks cuts or tears Figure 17 25 Probe with Sheath a Probe Handle b Sanitary Sh
435. zontal time interval e Press Measure four times an active caliper with a vertical dotted line displays To position the active caliper at the start point move the Trackball Ob Set To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper To position the second caliper at the end point move the Trackball Set To complete the measurement press Set The system displays the time interval between the two calipers in the Results Window 7 50 LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual Direction 2321062 100 Rev 5 Mode Measurements M Mode Measurements NOTE Tissue depth Basic measurements that can be taken in the M Mode portion of the display are e Tissue Depth Distance e Time Interval e Time Interval and Slope The following instructions assume that you do the following 1 In the B Mode part of the display scan the anatomy you want to measure 2 Go to the M Mode part of the display 3 Press Freeze Tissue depth measurement in M Mode functions the same as distance measurement in B Mode It measures the vertical distance between calipers Press Measure once an active caliper with a vertical and horizontal dotted line displays To position the active caliper at the most anterior point you want to measure move the Trackball To fix the start point press Set The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper 6

LOGIQ Book Basic User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents